Event Photos
LATEST NEWS

01 Nov 2023
We wanted to say thank you to everyone who attended our Annual Dinner on Thursday 26th October at the Hilton Glasgow, we hope you had a fabulous evening!
Huge thanks to our headline sponsor, Santander Consumer Finance and a big thanks also to all our wonderful sponsors!
More photos to follow!



11 Jul 2023

06 Jun 2023
Scottish car figures saw an increase of 10.65% in May compared to this time last year.
Scotland's top selling car for May is the Vauxhall Mokka.
Read the data report here

25 May 2023
At our AGM held on Wednesday 17th May, our new President Eddie Thomson was appointed for a period of two years. Eddie is Head of Business Development at ADESA UK and sat on the SMTA Board of Directors for the last two years. Eddie replaces outgoing President, Graham Greenwood, who will now be SMTA's Immediate Past President.
Photo to the left shows Eddie Thomson wearing the SMTA President's Chain of Office and alongside him is outgoing President, Graham Greenwood.
We would like to congratulate Eddie on his appointment and thanks to Graham Greenwood for his contribution as President of the last six years.

17 Apr 2023
In today's press release, the European Commission announced that it would soon publish the newly updated Motor Vehicle Block Exemption Regulation and its Supplementary Guidelines which will come into force on 1 June next.
The Commission has adopted a five-year prolongation period meaning that it will be applicable until 31 May 2028. During this period, the Commission will evaluate more closely the market developments and fundamental legislative changes might be needed after this period.
CECRA, which participated in the open consultations in 2021 and 2022, welcomes the prolongation of this sector specific Regulation and will now start to analyse it in-depth as soon as all the documents are available. But according to the press release it seems that the changes have focused on the issue of in-vehicle data and at first sight, it looks promising.
The updated Supplementary Guidelines stipulates that:
Clarify that data generated by vehicle sensors may be an essential input for the provision of repair and maintenance services. Therefore, to comply with Art. 101 of the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union (‘TFEU'), authorised and independent repairers should have access to such data on an equal footing. The existing principles for the provision of technical information, tools and training necessary for the repair and maintenance services have been extended to explicitly cover vehicle-generated data.
Specify that vehicle suppliers must apply the proportionality principle when considering whether to withhold inputs, such as vehicle-generated data, on the basis of potential cybersecurity concerns.
Warn that Art. 102 TFEU may be applicable where a supplier unilaterally withholds from independent operators an essential input, such as vehicle-generated data.
CECRA however remarks that authorised repairers continue to be the benchmark of what independent operators might receive as data. The inclusion of the proportionality principle and the reference to Art. 102 might be some good news. This needs to be analysed.
European Commission's Press release announcing the prolongation of the Motor Vehicle Block Exemption (‘MVBER’) with 5 years and the update of its Supplementary Guidelines.
www.cecra.eu

06 Apr 2023

04 Apr 2023
Update from DVSA:
We wanted to say a big thank you to everyone who completed their annual assessment on time this year.
We've seen even more testers plan ahead and complete their training and assessment well ahead of the deadline.
Keeping on top of things
Regular training improves testing standards and consistency across the industry. It means you can keep on testing Great Britain's motorcycles, cars and vans and make sure they are safe to drive.
Changes to training hours
We issued an MOT special notice 02-23 this weekend with some changes to training for this coming year (2023 to 2024).
This special notice tells you about:
- changes to annual training hours from 1 April 2023
- updates to the MOT testing guide for test stations from 3 April 2023
DVSA.

30 Mar 2023
- British car manufacturing output rises 13.1% in February to 69,707 units.
- Volumes up for both home and overseas markets but exports drive overall uplift.
- Hybrid, plug-in hybrid and battery electric vehicle output surges again, up 72.2%, accounting for two in five cars produced in the month.
- New SMMT member survey finds nine in 10 firms want measures to deliver low cost, low carbon energy to help support transition to zero emission technologies.
Thursday 30 March, 2023 UK car production rose 13.1% in February, up to 69,707 units, according to the latest figures published today by the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT). Factories made an additional 8,050 cars, with volumes buoyed by an easing of supply chain shortages – notably of semiconductors – which have bedevilled the global industry since the early months of 2021.
Production for both home and overseas markets rose by double digits, up 20.3% and 11.5% respectively, with exports driving the overall uplift. 56,634 cars were produced to fulfil global orders, up from 50,786 a year before and accounting for 81.2% of output, with the majority of these exports (59.6%) heading into the UK’s largest trading partner, the EU.
Shipments to the EU rose 6.5%, helping to offset declines to the US (-19.9%) and China (-21.6%), providing further evidence of the need for continued free trade across the Channel. Exports to Turkey, Japan, Australia and South Korea, meanwhile, also rose, collectively by 85.0%, and together represented a total of 6,498 cars, or 11.5% of exports.
The UK’s automotive industrial transition to hybrid, plug-in hybrid and battery electric vehicles continued, with combined volumes surging 72.2% from 15,905 to a total of 27,392 units and accounting for two in five (39.3%) cars produced in the month. Ramping up output of these vehicles still further is crucial, and a new SMMT member survey reveals that nine in 10 firms want measures to deliver low carbon and cost-effective energy supply, to help support the transition to zero emission technologies.1
While automotive businesses are broadly optimistic about the next 12 months, more than eight in 10 report that input and employment costs have risen in the past three months, so action to alleviate cripplingly high and uncompetitive energy costs ranks as their number one concern. Support on business rates, easing supply shortages and access to trade are also all viewed as beneficial for growth.
Mike Hawes, SMMT Chief Executive, said, “February’s growth in UK car production signposts an industry on the road to recovery. The fundamentals of the sector are strong; a highly skilled workforce, engineering excellence, a sector that is embracing new electrified vehicle manufacturing and wide ranging capabilities in the EV supply chain. To take advantage of global opportunities, however, we must scale up at pace and make the UK the most attractive destination for automotive investment by addressing trading and fiscal costs and delivering low carbon, affordable energy.”

09 Mar 2023
Please find below our car data report for Scottish new car registrations in February 2023.
Data courtesy of SMMT.
Click here for report

28 Feb 2023
We are delighted to announce the appointment of Eddie Thomson as Vice President of the SMTA. Eddie, who is Head of Business Development at Adesa UK, will become the 76th President of the association on the 17th of May at the Annual General Meeting.
Sandy Burgess, Chief Executive of the SMTA, commented “Eddie has held a number of very high-profile positions within the remarketing sector and as such is a well-known and respected member of the automotive community across the UK. I look forward to working with Eddie and drawing on his extensive remarketing knowledge and experience for the good of our membership and the sector in Scotland.”
Graham Greenwood, the current SMTA President added “Since joining the SMTA’s Board of Directors, Eddie has made many positive contributions to benefit the association and I am therefore very pleased to announce that he has accepted the position of Vice President.
Eddie brings with him a huge amount of experience in the Remarketing Industry at a senior level, this knowledge is most helpful to the SMTA board and all its members as the sector continues to evolve.”

08 Feb 2023
Brussels, 06/02/2023
As European industry, including fuel and automotive suppliers, vehicle manufacturers, dealers, repairers and transport operators we eagerly anticipate the European Commission proposal on the revision of the CO₂ Regulation for Heavy-Duty Vehicles (HDVs). Heavy-Duty transport is a vital sector for the functioning of the internal market and a suitable regulatory framework shall support the development of clean vehicles using different technologies and fuels.
Decarbonisation is an immediate challenge and all options that can have a rapid impact need to be enabled. Sustainable and renewable fuels can speed up the process and contribute to achievement of the “Fit for 55” and the full decarbonisation targets in road transport. The signatories of this letter welcome the revision of the CO₂ standards for HDVs in line with the “Fit for 55” objectives and believe that a recognition of all CO₂ emission reduction pathways along the entire value chain is critical.
Transport operators and vehicle manufacturers must be encouraged to consider cleaner fuel alternatives to fossil fuels, immediately available today, including liquid and gaseous renewable and synthetic fuels. Depending on use cases, technology diversity is needed where all technologies, including electrification/hybridisation, hydrogen and sustainable and renewable fuels can play a role.
The undersigned* organisations recommend that sustainable and renewable fuels are considered for compliance in the CO₂ Regulation for HDVs. Including such a provision in the Regulation would support the EU’s Green Deal objectives and accelerate the decarbonisation of the commercial transport sector.
*refer to website for organisations and to read online https://www.cecra.eu/news

08 Feb 2023
Scotland sees a 3.82% increase compared to January 2022.
MG's HS takes top seller in January with Volkswagen top marque for the month of January.
Full details can be found here
Data supplied by SMMT.

26 Jan 2023
- Annual UK car production falls -9.8% to 775,014 units in 2022 as global chip shortages and structural changes depress output.
- Record levels of electrified vehicle production with almost a third of all cars made fully electric or hybrid – worth £10 billion in exports alone.
- Volumes for UK rise 9.4% but fail to offset declining exports, down -14.0%, with some eight in 10 cars shipped overseas.
- Auto sector, which is integral to levelling up, net zero and advancing global Britain, calls for dedicated framework to drive rapid upscaling of UK battery production and shift to EVs.
Thursday 26 January, 2023 UK car production declined -9.8% in 2022 to 775,014 units, according to the latest figures issued today by the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT). December rounded off a volatile year, with output down -17.9% in the month after growth in October and November, with most of the year’s volume loss occurring in the first half.
The annual total was 84,561 units down on 2021 and -40.5% off the 1,303,135 cars made in 2019 pre-pandemic, equivalent to a loss of more than half a million cars.1 The main reasons for the depressed output were the crippling global shortage of semiconductors, which limited the ability to build cars in line with demand; significant structural changes, reflecting a loss of production at two volume manufacturing sites; and the impact of supply chain pauses in China due to Covid lockdowns.
Despite these challenges, UK factories turned out a record 234,066 battery electric (BEV), plug-in hybrid (PHEV) and hybrid (HEV) electric vehicles, with combined volumes up 4.5% year-on-year to represent almost a third (30.2%) of all car production. Total BEV production rose 4.8%, with hybrid volumes up 4.3%, and boosting output of these vehicles will be critical in the attainment of net zero, for both the UK and major overseas markets.
The figures come as fresh SMMT analysis confirms the increasingly important role of electrified vehicle production to the UK economy, especially the value of exports. Since 2017, the value of BEV, PHEV and HEV exports has risen seven-fold, from £1.3 billion to more than £10 billion. As a result, electrified vehicles represent 44.7% of the value of all UK car exports, up from a mere 4.1%. BEVs, in particular, are critical to the future prosperity of the UK, with their export value up more than 1,500%, from £81.7 million to £1.3 billion.2
The UK’s strength in specialist, luxury and performance car makers was also further underlined, with output climbing 6.6% to 32,575 units, worth an estimated total of £3.7 billion at factory gate prices, driven by a number of new launches and models in high demand from buyers around the world. These manufacturers play an important role in the development of advanced automotive technologies such as light-weighting and electrification which, in turn, can help advance wider industry.
Total annual output for the UK market grew 9.4%, but this was not enough to offset a -14.0% drop in exports. Nearly eight in 10 cars (606,838 units) were built for overseas markets, compared with 168,176 for British buyers, emphasising the importance of free and fair global trade.
The EU remained by far the sector’s largest market, even as shipments declined -10.0%, with 57.6% of exports (349,424 units) heading into the bloc. While exports to the US and China also fell, down -31.6% and -8.3% respectively, the number of cars sent to Japan (+5.7%), South Korea (+32.8%), Australia (+4.7%), Switzerland (+2.7%) and South Africa (+23.0%) all increased, although together these represented just 8.4% of exports. Exports to Russia, a top 10 export market in 2021, meanwhile, fell -78.3%, with shipments made before the outbreak of war in Ukraine and the cessation of business.

25 Jan 2023
The Department for Transport has commenced consultation on proposed and potential changes to the MOT Scheme.
The consultation covers many aspects, including but not limited to:
- Changes to the MOT Test
- When the first MOT Test should be carried out
- Frequency of subsequent MOT Tests
- MOT Test Fees
The consultation is open until 01 March 2023 and the final outcome could have a significant effect on your business, whether or not you own or operate an MOT Testing Station. https://bit.ly/3WvIFPO
As you would expect, The Scottish Motor Trade Association will be responding on behalf of our members. However, we encourage anyone with strong views on this subject to also respond in order to make those views known.
We would also be happy to receive your comments as it helps us to make sure that our response accurately reflects the views of our members. You can do that by sending you comments by email to david.innes@smta.co.uk
18 Jan 2023
- Grey is UK’s most popular new car colour for fifth consecutive year with 25.7% market share, followed by black and white to complete a monochrome podium.
- Maroon, pink and cream were bottom of the charts, taking just 0.02% of all registrations combined.
- Green enjoys resurgence with biggest volume uplift of +13,293 units while electric vehicles account for a quarter of all new green cars.
Hi-res infographics and tables available on Dropbox:
https://www.dropbox.com/sh/fnxjc67skhvivub/AAC5yXY7_dtDlNjK-n-ZxNuja?dl=0
More than six in 10 (62.5%) new cars hitting British roads in 2022 were painted in grey, black or white. Silver, meanwhile, which held first or second place in car buyers’ affections for 12 straight years from 2000 to 2011, posted just 98,483 units and a 6.1% market share in 2022 – its lowest level in more than two decades. Red, although retaining its fifth-place ranking, also recorded a decline to reach its lowest market share since 2008, at 136,793 units accounting for 8.5% of all cars registered.
At the other end of the spectrum, the least popular shades were maroon, pink, and cream, which, combined, recorded less than 1% of all registrations.2 Pink tinted vehicles tallied their lowest number since 2009, while other niche paints, including orange, yellow, bronze, turquoise and mauve, all posted growth, hinting at a broader trend, although combined, the colours only make up 3.4% of the market at 55,401 units.
Meanwhile, green enjoyed a resurgence in popularity to a level not seen for 16 years, up by 74.2% on 2021 with the largest volume growth of all colours (up 13,293 units).3 Some 31,220 new green cars were registered in total – perhaps fittingly a quarter of which (24.1%) could be plugged-in. Overall though, the top colour for most powertrains remained grey, with just PHEVs opting for black.
Grey was also the top selling colour in every region and every county in the UK, bar the Scottish Borders where blue pushed it into second spot. Red cars proved most popular in Berkshire with 6,735 registrations, while the highest number of green cars was registered in Greater London, at 1,894 units, and Strathclyde registered more orange cars (1,313) than any other county. Cheshire took top spot for turquoise, with 291 units, while pink was most favoured in Derbyshire, although it accounted for just 10 new car registrations in the county, demonstrating how rarely drivers picked the colour.
While grey was the most popular colour in the UK’s three largest segments, superminis, lower mediums and dual purpose, as well as in upper medium and specialist sports, white was the most popular shade for the mini and multi-purpose segments and black was most popular for executive cars and luxury saloons.
www.smmt.co.uk

10 Jan 2023
Scottish new car registrations for December 2022 and year to date for 2022 are available via the links below:
Scottish New Car Data Report -December 2022

04 Jan 2023
The Scottish Government has now published the final version of the Hydrogen Action Plan. This sets out the strategic approach and actions required to support the development of the hydrogen economy in Scotland over the course of this Parliament, including a number of transport specific actions:
- Create an environment for the public and private sector to co-design technology and infrastructure pathways for the application of hydrogen in transport, and deliver coincident benefits for jobs and supply chains.
- Help facilitate the rollout of the infrastructure needed for hydrogen vehicles to operate in Scotland.
- Work collaboratively with the transport sector to drive down the cost of hydrogen in transport applications and encourage uptake of both hydrogen and battery-electric vehicles.
- Make Scotland a global centre of expertise for innovation in hydrogen mobility technologies, collaborate with international partners and grow our hydrogen mobility manufacturing base.
- We will continue to support a growing Scottish skills base in hydrogen for transport.
The Action Plan is supported by a £100m capital funding programme, designed to accelerate the production of renewable hydrogen in Scotland. £10m of this capital funding programme is for Hydrogen Innovation Scheme and the remaining £90m for the Green Hydrogen Fund which will be launched early next year. This investment is aimed at driving Scotland’s hydrogen production capability to meet an ambition of at least 5GW of renewable and low carbon hydrogen by 2030 and 25GW by 2045.

07 Dec 2022
Scottish car figures increase by 14.5% compared to this time last year.
Our data report is available below.
Car Data including EV breakdown

29 Nov 2022
Following a strong start to 2022 and fresh from their second year presenting at Automotive
Management Live, new tech kids on the block Vehicles In Video are continuing to disrupt the motor industry with their video communication technology. This new partnership with automotive web solutions provider Spidersnet allows VIV to expand their network of contacts, and for Spidernset, an opportunity to offer their customers a way to streamline their sales and service processes. The enhancement of digital services is hugely important to businesses whose buyers complete the majority of their purchase journey online.
The VIV digital app focuses on the customer’s digital experience, allowing for personalised videos to be sent quickly without moving from your desk. The app seamlessly integrates with dealership sales and servicing teams maximising their time and streamlining their services.
“We are privileged to be partnering with such a reputable company as Spidersnet, their
product portfolio lends itself well to video, which in turn benefits our customers. Having met the team, we are in no doubt our partnership can only strengthen as we move forward delivering a joint approach into the marketplace.” - Matt Maley, CEO, Vehicles in Video.
Spidersnet is an award-winning web service provider catering to every type of dealership. Their digital marketing solutions help to increase brand awareness, website traffic and enquiries. Spidersnet offers their clients website, management and marketing services to strengthen digital presence. From themed or bespoke designs to additional services such as a Service Booking Tool, Automated Video creation and a whole host of additional tools and features through their management system, Autopromotor. This partnership with VIV will further enhance their current product set and give their customers the ability to fulfil customer requests for personalised videos. Collaborating together allows both to provide exceptional customer service and work together to provide the best for the businesses they support.
“We’re really excited to partner with Vehicles in Video. The innovative video services they provide will be a huge benefit to our network of automotive businesses to help increase enquiries and sales. The team at VIV always go the extra mile for their customers, which is exactly the same ethos we have. It’s a great fit!”
Katie Balkham, Managing Director, Spidersnet
Interested in knowing more about how Vehicles in Video can help your business? Book a demo to receive a free digital health check: https://www.vehiclesinvideo.com/book-a-demo/

14 Nov 2022
The SMTA held its black-tie dinner on Thursday 27th October at the Hilton Glasgow, we played host to an audience of 330 guests from all sectors of the Scottish motor trade, the event was also attended by fellow trade associations from the rest of the UK, Southern Ireland and Brussels.
A huge thank you to our headline sponsor Central Car Auctions and all our other supporting sponsors:
Adesa, Automotive Compliance, Arnold Clark, Car Care Plan, EMR Metal Recycling, Marsh, Moto Novo Finance, Supagard, Tyres Life and Viking Wholesale Tyres - many thanks indeed!
We were delighted to award a number of our members with our C.A.R Star Awards – (Community Activity Recognition) Awards recognising these members that have given up their time or funds and in doing so contributed to their local community-based projects and charities. It is always humbling to highlight these efforts and we feel that these actions deserved to be rewarded. This process just serves to display that all of our members businesses form part of the community within which they trade and sometimes it is nice to let everyone know that they are not just somewhere to buy a car or get your car repaired!
Sandy Burgess commenting on the Award winners said “On behalf of SMTA, we are delighted to be able to broadcast some of the wonderful contributions made to local charities and their respective communities by our membership, day in and day out, these awards are so diverse and well deserved it really can be quite humbling handing them out!”

06 Oct 2022

28 Sep 2022
The Chancellor of the Exchequer Kwasi Kwarteng has announced £45 billion of tax cuts in a ‘mini’ budget set to cost the exchequer around £100bn.
Kwarteng moved to axe the additional 45% income tax band, cut the basic rate of income tax to 19%, scrap plans for a hike in corporation tax, reverse next April's planned 1.25% National Insurance increase and abolish a cap on bankers’ bonuses in what has been described as the biggest tax cutting event since 1972.
The cost of Kwarteng’s bid to address UK inflation of 9.9% and boost the economy is estimated by the Institute of Fiscal Studies (IFS) to be around £37bn in the next financial year.
That total excludes the estimated £60bn already committed to tackle soaring energy prices by capping the average household energy bill to £2,500 and handing businesses an energy price guarantee for the next six months.
Read the full article at AM Online here

12 Sep 2022
The SMTA joins the nation in sending condolences to the Royal Family and expressing our gratitude for the lifelong commitment made by HM Queen Elizabeth II.

06 Sep 2022
Scotland sees increase in August of almost 20% compared to August 2021
Citroen C3 takes the top spot for August 2022 in Scotland - full report available here

10 Aug 2022
Data released by SMMT shows the UK’s used car market shrank by -18.8% during the second quarter of 2022, with 1,759,684 transactions taking place, according to the latest figures released today by the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT). Some 407,820 fewer vehicles changed hands compared with the same period last year, although the scale of this decline was artificially inflated by comparison with 2021 when the easing of Covid restrictions saw the busiest second quarter since records began. By comparison, Q2 2022 was -13.5% behind pre-pandemic 2019.
The ongoing shortage of semiconductors continued to impact new car market supply, with an inevitable knock-on effect on used transactions. Declines were recorded in each month, with falls in April, May and June of -16.8%, -20.9% and -18.6% respectively. As a result, the market is down -8.3% year to date on 2021, and -12.8% on pre-pandemic 2019.
However, battery electric vehicle (BEV) sales rose 57.1% to reach 16,782 units, doubling market share to 1.0%, while plug-in hybrids held relatively stable with 1.0% growth and 0.9% of the market. Hybrids (HEVs), meanwhile, declined by -4.0% with 2.4% of the market. As a result, used petrol and diesel vehicles remained dominant, totalling 1,682,280 units and accounting for 95.6% of sales.
Reflecting the new car market, the most popular segment types were supermini (31.4%), lower medium (26.5%) and dual purpose (14.7%). Black cars proved the most popular, accounting for more than one in five (21.5%) sales, followed by blue and grey. Pink cars proved the least popular overall, comprising 1,135 units.
Mike Hawes, SMMT Chief Executive, said, “It was inevitable that the squeeze on new car supply would filter through to the used market. Despite this, Britain’s used car buyers clearly have a growing appetite for the latest low and zero emission cars, and we need a thriving new car market to feed it. The next Prime Minister must create the conditions to drive consumer confidence, especially in EVs, and the fleet renewal necessary to meet our decarbonisation goals.”
- UK used car market falls -18.8% in Q2 2022 with 1,759,684 cars changing hands.
- First half transactions down -8.3% on last year and market now -12.8% year to date behind pre-pandemic 2019.
- Battery electric vehicles (BEVs) see boost of 57.1% to reach one in 105 transactions.
www.smmt.co.uk/reports/smmt-motor-industry-facts/

10 Aug 2022
Scotland sees new car registrations for July drop by -0.3%
Vauxhall Corsa remains in the top spot as a consumer favourite in Scotland for both the month and year to date! Our report is attached here!
Data supplied by SMMT.

27 Jul 2022
The UK automotive industry has reduced its carbon footprint to the lowest level on record, with a reduction of 11.2% in 2021.
Data from the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders’ (SMMT) latest Sustainability Report shows that automotive production and the supply chain emitted 81,095 fewer tonnes of CO2 in 2021 compared with the previous year.
UK car production in 2021 fell 6.7% to only 859,575 units, the worst total since 1956. Output was 61,353 less than 2020, which was affected by coronavirus lockdowns, and 34.0% below pre-pandemic 2019.
Despite reduced production, the industry was still able to improve its environmental efficiency, with a 6.1% reduction in water used per vehicle produced, and a 2.6% reduction in waste going to landfill year on year.
The SMMT’s research shows that 96.2% less waste per vehicle goes to landfill than did at the start of the millennium. In addition, since 2015 the industry has ensured 95% of a vehicle by weight goes through a takeback network to be re-used, recycled or recovered.
Specialist and low volume manufacturers were even more successful in delivering sustainable production, emitting 26.6% less CO2 per vehicle produced and sending no waste to landfill at all. Water use per vehicle also fell by 11.6%, while overall production increased by 40.2%.
Article courtesy AM Online - read full article here https://bit.ly/3zyOrrG

14 Jun 2022
The government has axed the plug-in car grant as it ‘has little effect’ on the current explosion in new electric car sales.
The Department for Transport (DfT) said today (June 14) that the scheme – which gives a £1,500 discount on cars costing less than £32,000 – will be closed to new car orders. The move comes as full-electric car sales have risen by 70 per cent in the last year.
In the announcement, the DfT said the funding will now be ‘refocussed’ on the ‘main barriers in the EV transition’, namely public charging. The grant is only ending for cars, however, and does not affect plug-in taxis, small and large trucks and vans, mopeds, motorcycles and wheelchair accessible vehicles.
The DfT reiterated the plug-in grant for cars was always ‘temporary’, and that despite reductions in the grant offered and the number of cars it covered, [the reductions] ‘have had little effect on rapidly accelerating sales, or on the continuously growing range of models being manufactured’.
Dealers that have already sold electric cars through the scheme two working days before the announcement today (June 14) will still qualify.

14 Jun 2022
Monday 13 June, 2022 Some of the UK’s most innovative companies in electric and zero emission vehicle technology will today attend one of the world’s largest EV events, the Electric Vehicle Symposium and Exhibition (EVS35) in Oslo. The trade mission, with a dedicated UK Pavilion organised by the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT) in collaboration with the Advanced Propulsion Centre (APC), is set to boost trade and investment into the UK automotive sector, with the Prime Minister’s Trade Envoy to Norway and Iceland, Felicity Buchan MP, joining senior industry executives to showcase British expertise in designing and deploying low carbon mobility solutions.
SMMT and APC are joined at EVS35 by the Department for International Trade (DIT) and Innovate UK, all united in their ambition to deliver zero emission transport while driving new, clean-tech jobs and greater trade. As the global pace of electric vehicle uptake quickens, led by massive industry investments in the latest technology, so too do the opportunities to unlock new jobs, capital and growth in the automotive sector.
The UK is one of the leaders in this transition, with upstream R&D as well as downstream development and engineering of the parts, components, powertrains and the vehicles themselves. The UK will also be arguably the first major market to go electric, phasing out the sale of new pure petrol and diesel cars and vans by 2030 with a Zero Emission Vehicle mandate to drive this evolution. This is one of the most ambitious timelines in the world and requires the UK automotive sector to make more significant and accelerated investment in manufacturing and market development than just about any other major automotive nation.
The wheels are in motion, with manufacturers already committing at least £10.8 billion to EV and battery R&D and production in the UK while British factories have produced a quarter of a million electric cars, vans, buses and trucks since 2011.1 In April alone, more than one-in-four (26.4%) cars produced by UK car makers was electrified, boosted by battery electric vehicle (BEV) output up 38.2%, meaning one-in-10 cars made was powered purely by electricity.2
The UK market for these cutting-edge models, meanwhile, is one of the largest in Europe, behind only Germany in terms of new registrations last year.3 There are now more than 150 models of plug-in cars and vans on sale in Britain and, while globally BEV sales doubled in 2021, the UK had its best ever year with more electric cars registered than over the previous five years combined.4 BEV registrations have surged more than 70% to 92,512 this year and, by year end, they are expected to take 16.8% of the UK car market equivalent to one in seven sales.5
Mike Hawes, SMMT Chief Executive, said, “We are at a pivotal moment on the road to zero emissions. Countries are competing for investment to drive production of the next generation of clean transport solutions and the UK must be in the vanguard. The UK has advantages over its rivals as a place to do business, with a highly productive workforce, some of the best R&D minds and universities globally and close collaboration between its automotive sector and government, not to mention strong consumer and business demand for the latest vehicles. EVS35 provides the perfect platform to demonstrate these capabilities to the world and strengthening our global trade and investment links will only bring mutual success.”
Philippa Oldham, Director of Stakeholder Engagement at Advanced Propulsion Centre, said: “We're pleased to be working with SMMT to showcase why Britain is a world leader in automotive technology and an ideal place to invest.
“Electrification is shaping the future of automotive, and as one of the most important segments of the UK's low-carbon economy it is vital that the sector continues to build global alliances to secure its future in the years to come. The UK Pavilion at EVS35 provides the perfect platform for UK businesses to engage with some of the leading players in electric vehicle technology, helping to demonstrate the value they bring to the wider industry and create new opportunities in the process.
“The UK has a valuable role to play in the continued evolution of automotive and clean technologies from British businesses will be critical amid the push to net zero.”
Felicity Buchan MP, said, "As the Prime Minister's Trade Envoy to Norway and Iceland, I am delighted to be attending the EVS35 to support British exporters of Electrical Vehicles. The UK is leading the world in our transition to a green economy, particularly in our automotive sector where nearly £11 billion has been committed by manufactures in R&D funding for EVs and battery production in the last decade. With our Zero Emission Vehicle mandate by 2030, EVs are a critical part of our path to net zero and I am proud to be supporting companies that will help us achieve that."
Sue Wilthil, DIT Senior Market Adviser, Trade, said, “As part of the Government’s focus on greening our economies and reducing global emissions, DIT Oslo are delighted to support UK EV companies in the export of their technologies and services to Norway. Norway is a market which is leading the world in the introduction of electric and hybrid vehicles and not only provides a potential market for UK exports but is also a market from which the UK EV sector can learn a great deal.”
The UK Pavilion exhibitor line-up at EVS35 will include these cutting-edge companies:
- Autocraft Solutions Group – repairs and remanufactures battery packs for several original equipment manufacturers and also remanufactures electric drive units.
- Cenex – focuses on low emission transport and associated energy infrastructure and operates as an independent, not-for-profit research technology organisation and consultancy.
- ENSO Ltd – makes tyres for electric vehicles to extend range and reduce tyre pollution.
- ePropelled Ltd – specialises in the design of innovative propulsion motors for electric vehicles.
- Switch EV – produces electric vehicle charging management software.
- Tevva – designs and manufactures zero-emission medium to heavy duty trucks with a revolutionary combination of battery electric and hydrogen fuel-cell range extender technology. David Thackray, Marketing Director, will be speaking on the main stage, Tuesday June 14, as part of a panel discussion.
- Versinetic – produces cutting-edge integration hardware and software solutions for EV charge points and offers consultancy to help accelerate time-to-market.

01 Jun 2022
THE LOW EMISSION ZONES (SCOTLAND) REGULATIONS 2021
EDINBURGH/GLASGOW/DUNDEE
On 31 March 2022 the Transport and Environment Committee approved the Low Emission Zone Scheme Proposal, following legal processes. The city centre LEZ was approved by Scottish Ministers on 19 May 2022. The three cities involved have now introduced their Low Emission Zones however, enforcement days vary - Edinburgh and Glasgow is 1 June 2024 and Dundee is 30th May 2024, following a two-year grace period for all. Find out about how the LEZ was developed, including supporting evidence.
Visit Edinburgh City Council page for more info:
https://www.edinburgh.gov.uk/lowemissionzone
Visit Glasgow City Council page for more info:
https://www.glasgow.gov.uk/LEZ
Visit Dundee City Council page for more info:
https://www.dundeecity.gov.uk/service-area/city-development/sustainable-transport-and-roads/dundee-low-emission-zone-scheme

26 Apr 2022
- Average battery range of vehicles at annual SMMT Test Day grows from 74 miles to almost 260 miles during Britain’s first ‘electric decade’.
- Industry confirms commitment to zero-emission motoring, from hatchbacks to supercars, as more than 40% of models on the market now come with a plug.
- SMMT Test Day reflects EV model choice with two in five cars on the track running on a battery or plug-in hybrid powertrain, alongside electric vans, pick-ups, taxis and trucks.
Millbrook Proving Ground, Bedford, Tuesday 26 April, 2022 Massive investment by car makers since 2011 means today’s electric vehicle buyers can benefit from a 15-fold increase in choice of model, as well as, on average, more than three times the battery range compared with a decade ago, according to new research by the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT).
At the time of the launch of Britain’s first mass-produced battery electric vehicle, the Nissan LEAF, in 2011, just nine plug-in car models were available in the UK – making up less than one in 1,000 total registrations.1 Today, there are more than 140 plug-in models available, accounting for around one in five new cars sold this year, with a further 50 models expected to be launched by the end of 2022.2
SMMT will show this wide range of choice at its annual Test Day driving event on Tuesday, with 33 manufacturers demonstrating more than 100 models at Millbrook Proving Ground, including 42 plug-in electric models on the circuit.3 Hundreds of media guests will test the high-level performance, safety and technology features of the latest cars, vans, pick-ups and taxis. They will also get first-hand experience of the dramatic improvements in electric vehicle battery technology, with the battery electric vehicles on display averaging 257 miles on a single charge3 – more than treble the average of 74 miles available at Test Day in 2011.4
This increased range is a direct result of the automotive industry’s ingenuity and investment – and the trend will continue, with all of Britain’s leading car manufacturers and importers committed to decarbonising their model line-ups, whether hatchbacks, SUVs or hypercars, with a further 150 new and updated plug-ins due to be delivered to the UK market by 2025.
Newly introduced for SMMT Test Day 2022 is the Working Vehicle Zone, where 15 trucks will be tested – almost half of them zero-emission – having undergone significant technological advancements during the last decade.5 These larger, heavier vehicles are vital to the UK economy and its green transition, with similar timescales to electric cars and vans, in spite of their highly complex mechanical and infrastructural challenges. However, truck manufacturers are already providing innovative solutions, with mammoth battery and plug-in hybrid powertrains, hydrogen fuel cell and quick-charging capability to meet their varied transportation uses.
While electric vehicles of all shapes and sizes have become more visible across the UK – alongside the gradually increasing presence of chargepoints at fuel stations and roadside in cities and on motorways – infrastructure has failed to keep up with demand, and could stifle greater uptake, with 75% of motorists saying there are not enough public chargepoints to meet their needs.6
Further investment in chargepoint infrastructure, therefore, is essential so that all consumers in all regions of the UK can be confident they will be able to charge their electric vehicle whenever and wherever they want. The government’s new EV infrastructure strategy launched last month was a positive step towards addressing consumers’ needs, but there must be binding targets for chargepoint delivery that match the latest ambitious mandates on electric vehicle production to deliver this fundamental infrastructure ahead of need.
www.smmt.co.uk

14 Apr 2022
The First Minister issued a statement yesterday confirming that the legal requirement to wear face coverings in most indoor public spaces and on public transport will become guidance next week.
It is strongly recommended that face coverings continue to be worn where appropriate – including in indoor crowded spaces and on public transport - as members of the public are advised to carry on taking sensible precautions to reduce the spread of COVID-19.
Businesses may also wish to strongly recommend, or indeed require, people to wear face coverings in areas where the risk of transmission is higher or where your risk assessment supports the wearing of them, noting exemptions.
On Monday 18 April, we will publish updated guidance for people who are managing a workplace, organisation or premises, providing advice on steps you can take to help reduce the risk of transmission of COVID-19 to create a safer environment.
To coincide additional 'Covid Sense' Campaign assets are now available in the 'Covid Sense' Stakeholder Toolkit. The COVID-19 safety behaviours are well-known and have been a part of our everyday life for the past two years. The 'Covid Sense' Campaign aims to provide a little reminder of these behaviours and the positive impact they can have, protecting yourself and others.
Key Messages
'Covid Sense' is protecting yourself and others by:
- Opening windows when socialising indoors
- Wearing a face covering in indoor public places or on public transport
- Washing your hands to protect yourself
- Getting your vaccine when offered

24 Mar 2022
The automotive industry has called for all stakeholders to match its commitment to deliver zero emission mobility, as new analysis by the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT) reveals some £10.8 billion has been dedicated to UK electric vehicle production and gigafactories since 2011, with billions more invested globally to bring new technology to market.1 Given the figure accounts purely for public announcements by vehicle and battery manufacturers, and does not include wider supply chain investment, the overall UK automotive commitment to electrification will be even higher.
In Britain’s first ‘electric decade’, kicked off by a £420 million investment in Sunderland for the UK’s first mass-produced battery electric car, more than 10 vehicle manufacturers have invested in communities across the country to create jobs and to design, engineer and build the cleanest, greenest vehicles for domestic and export markets. Alongside cars, the UK also produces electric vans, buses and trucks, as established manufacturers and new entrants have invested in production.
The UK electric vehicle market has followed suit, growing rapidly. Ten years ago, six models of electric car were available, accounting for less than one in 1,000 new car registrations. There are now more than 140 models on the market, with electric vehicles comprising more than one in six new cars and one in 28 vans registered. Just one in 80 cars on the road, however, runs on electricity, with the UK aiming for one in three by 2030 if net zero ambitions are to be met. The challenges are examined in Plugging the Gap, SMMT's updated blueprint for delivering the zero emission transition.
Private motorists accounted for just a third of new plug-in registrations in 2021, with uptake far higher among businesses and fleets, which benefit from generous fiscal incentives.2 Conversely, purchase incentives have been rolled back dramatically over the past year, with the UK’s EV adoption now falling behind some European markets which offer more attractive incentive packages.
Further growth in this market, however, depends as much on chargepoint provision as affordability. Research by SMMT reveals that the ratio of public standard chargers to electric vehicles has rapidly deteriorated, with just one charger for every 32 plug-ins across the UK compared with one for every 16 just 12 months ago, and significant regional variations. The industry is calling on all parties integral to the drive to zero, including chargepoint operators and government, to help ‘plug the gap’ between infrastructure rollout and uptake.
SMMT has advocated a nationally co-ordinated, locally delivered infrastructure plan, with binding targets for chargepoints that match those imposed on vehicle manufacturers. Overseen by a regulator, such a plan would put consumers at the heart of the transition, accelerating chargepoint provision and addressing charging anxiety among drivers and businesses. It would also help the one in three households that do not have off-street parking and would therefore be reliant on public charging, to make the switch.3
Furthermore, a vibrant, well-supported market would help attract greater industrial investment, creating jobs and supporting economic growth. Gigafactory investment is essential if the UK is to achieve the 60GWh capacity it needs by 2030, a capability that would support the production of around one million electric vehicles a year.
This, in turn, would enable the industry to exploit the benefits of the UK’s ambitious trade agenda, maximising locally originating content to achieve tariff-free exports to key growth markets worldwide, and help Britain to realise a zero-emission future with greater resilience and self-sufficiency in battery production and the wider electrified supply chain.
While overall UK gigafactory capacity is currently just 2GWh, the £10.8 billion figure includes major battery production commitments that will come online in the coming years, estimated to take UK capability to around 41GWh by 2027. The EU, meanwhile, is forecast to have a capacity of up to 1.5TWh by 2040, with more than 25 gigafactories either under construction or in development.
For the UK to become a location of choice for potential investors, therefore, government must create the right conditions, with a streamlined process for obtaining the necessary permits and licences, easy access to skilled and productive labour, and competitively priced clean energy.
Mike Hawes, SMMT Chief Executive, said, “The UK automotive industry has set out its intent – to meet the challenge of net zero – and has backed that ambition with cash, investing massively during Britain’s first electric decade. As we enter the second, the stakes are higher, with some of the world’s toughest regulation coming, regulation that will seek to determine the pace of change in a market constantly buffeted by headwinds. But mandates on manufacturers alone will not drive the market. Delivering net zero needs a competitive industry and a competitive market. We need a holistic strategy with binding targets on chargepoint provision, attractive fiscal and purchase incentives, and a reliable, accessible and affordable user experience. We need a universal right to charge electric vehicles, for all drivers, wherever they live, wherever they travel and whatever their needs.”www.smmt.co.uk

01 Feb 2022
- Grey is the UK’s most popular new car colour for fourth consecutive year, followed by black and white to complete the monochrome set.
- Blue edges closer to top three but appetite for niche paints gold, yellow, turquoise and green grow fastest.
- Green also boosts under-bonnet appeal as drivers switch to electric vehicles in record numbers, with one in six choosing a car with a plug.
British drivers doubled down on their preference for monochrome cars in 2021, with grey increasing its dominance as the UK’s favourite new car colour for the fourth year in a row, according to figures published today by the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT). During a year of pandemic-related disruptions impacting total new car registrations, 408,155 grey cars were sold, up 2.8% and accounting for a quarter (24.8%) of the market.
Black, the most popular car paint in Britain from 2009 to 2012, wrapped 20.5% of passenger cars, while white was in third place (17.2%), meaning UK drivers were most likely to choose a monochrome car for the 11th year running. More than six in 10 (62.4%) of all new cars joining British roads in 2021 were painted in one of these shades, although blue edged closer to the top three, increasing its sales (1.4%) for the first time in five years and trailing just 2,638 units behind white.
The rest of the top 10 remained largely unchanged from 2020, although green overtook orange to gain seventh place, cladding 17,927 cars. Sales of green cars rose for the first time since 2015, with 24.0% more buyers opting for the colour than in the previous year.
A record number of drivers also opted for ‘green’ under the bonnet, with battery electric and plug-in cars accounting for more than one in six registrations – up from around one in 10 in 2020 and one in 30 in 2019. However, whether battery electric, plug-in hybrid, hybrid, petrol or diesel, grey was the colour of choice across all fuel types.
White was the most popular shade for mini-sized and sports cars, while larger dual purpose, luxury saloons and executive cars were, as usual, most likely to be black.
At the niche end of the colour palette, gold, yellow and turquoise were the fastest growing colours, with gold more than tripling its appeal (up 231.8%), yellow up by a third (31.3%) and turquoise up by a fifth (19.2%), although together they accounted for less than one percent of the market (0.9%).
Article credit: SMMT

26 Jan 2022
COVID-19 ‘Living Safely for Us All’ Campaign – please find the updated Stakeholder Toolkit here.
With Omicron cases declining and restrictions easing, yesterday saw the re-introduction of the ‘Living Safely For Us All’ campaign. Messaging has been updated to reflect a more positive tone, while still covering the COVID-19 safety behaviours. Living Safely For Us All illustrates that by keeping up with the key behaviours, it helps keep life moving elsewhere. Living Safely For Us all will run throughout February across TV, radio, outdoor and digital advertising channels.
Key Messages
The ‘Living Safely for Us All’ key messages include:
- By living as safely as we can with COVID around, we’re helping others, helping our NHS and helping Scotland’s recovery.
- Get vaccinated (1st, 2nd, 3rd or booster)
- Take an LFD test before socialising, mixing with others or using public transport
- Wear a face coverings in indoor public places
- Self-isolation and testing has now changed to reduce isolation periods in certain circumstances.
- Report LFD test results, even if negative
- Let fresh air in regularly if meeting others indoors
- Clean your hands and surfaces regularly
How You Can Help
- Please use the updated assets moving forward
- Please discontinue use of any ‘stay at home’ materials and previously shared TV advert to ensure the latest self-isolation guidance is being shared
- If you don’t already, please follow SG channels across Facebook, Twitter and Instagram and share and retweet content
Stakeholder Toolkit
The ‘Living Safely this Winter’ Stakeholder Toolkit contains the following, with all download links available within the toolkit:
- Campaign overview and key messages
- TV ad and 10 sec social cut-down films
- Stakeholder Posters – Key COVID Protection Measures and Flowchart of Self-Isolation Changes
- Editable Stakeholder Posters for Local Test Centres
- Social media assets with suggested copy
- Email signature and web banner
- Useful links

10 Jan 2022
The Frankfurt court has just ruled that the Opel dealer remuneration system in Germany is illegal. The Belgian Competition Authority received a complaint for similar facts
In November 2020, VDOH, the Association of German Opel Dealers which is member of the European Opel Dealer Council, member of CECRA, had filed a lawsuit on behalf of its members against Opel’s so-called "Commercial Policy", which regulates the remuneration system for its authorised dealers.
According to the association, the complaint is directed against the general structure of the remuneration system, its incalculability and, above all, against the numerous unilateral possibilities for change, including intervention in the margin.
Last week, the Frankfurt Regional Court upheld the action against Opel for its “Commercial Policy”. Opel may no longer impose a regulation on its sales partners in which the manufacturer can arbitrarily change the remuneration of its dealers consisting of a fixed margin and bonuses.
Opel Germany has already announced that it will appeal the ruling to the Higher Regional Court of Frankfurt am Main.
CECRA’s Director General Bernard Lycke said: “We very much welcome the decision of the Frankfurt Regional court as anotherbreakthrough in dealers’ decade-long struggle for more fairness. Especially in light of all current radical changes and challenges, this Court’s decision could change the margin regulations of many makes and therefore paving the way for a balanced and fair partnership in the automotive industry”.

22 Dec 2021
SMTA AND SCOTSURE OFFICES WILL CLOSE AT 5PM ON THURSDAY 23RD DECEMBER AND RE-OPEN AT 9AM ON WEDNESDAY 5TH JANUARY 2022
We wish all our members a Merry Christmas and a happy New Year.

08 Dec 2021
Yesterday, the First Minister delivered a statement to Parliament where she said Cabinet had agreed to keep all current COVID protections in place, given the very significant risks posed by Omicron and the continuing high and rising number of cases overall.
It was also agreed that it was vital to strengthen compliance with existing protections and to keep the need for any additional protections under daily review.
The First Minister said heightened compliance with current protections will give the best chance of avoiding any additional protections and asked everyone to make an extra effort to do so from now through the festive period and into January.
Employers are also being asked to ensure that people are working from home wherever practical and that if staff were working from home at the start of the pandemic then they should be enabled to do so again. This advice will be reviewed in the middle of January.
People are also being asked to do a lateral flow test before mixing with people from other households and on every occasion they intend on doing so.
In addition, since this morning, anyone aged 12 or over, who is travelling to the UK from outside the Common Travel Area, will be required to take a Covid test shortly before they leave for the UK, in addition to the requirement to take a test on day two after arrival in the UK and to self-isolate pending the result.
Guidance for businesses and workplaces on reducing the risk of COVID-19 and supporting staff and customers has been published. |
The NHS Inform coronavirus webpage is the fastest way for people to get the latest health advice and information.
|

07 Dec 2021
Scotland saw a drop of just over 15% in car registrations compared to this time last year.
You can view the data here.

30 Nov 2021
The First Minister held a media briefing following the emergence of the COVID-19 Omicron variant – of which six cases have been identified in Scotland. Read the full statement here.
The First Minister asked that everyone significantly step up and increase compliance with all existing precautions - face coverings, hygiene like washing hands and surfaces, getting vaccinated and testing regularly with lateral flow devices - and to now test before mixing socially with people from other households.
She also reminded people to work from home if possible and asked employers to make sure they are maximising the potential of home working.
In line with the rest of the UK, the red list of countries has been reinstated and to date 10 countries from Southern Africa have been added. This will be kept under review. Anybody travelling back to Scotland from those 10 countries must enter managed quarantine for 10 days on their arrival. In addition, any vaccinated traveller arriving in Scotland from anywhere outside the common travel area, will need to self-isolate until they get a negative result from a PCR test taken on the second day after arrival. The rules for people who are not fully vaccinated will stay the same.
Following the launch of COVID-19 winter campaign: ‘Living Safely for Us All’, a series of social films have been produced. The full length films are available here and cut down films are available here and can be shared with audiences via social media channels.

03 Nov 2021
- Latest SMMT outlook forecasts that some 287,000 plug-in vehicles will be registered in 2021 – more than from 2010 to 2019 combined.
- Battery electric vehicles forecast to outsell conventional diesel and mild-hybrid diesel cars in 2022.
- Industry credits acceleration in growth to wide choice of vehicles, growing public acceptance and incentives.
Wednesday 3 November, 2021 New plug-in vehicle uptake rates have accelerated so rapidly that more will join Britain’s roads in 2021 than during the whole of the last decade, according to the latest forecast from SMMT.
A total of 271,962 new battery electric (BEVs) and plug-in hybrid vehicles (PHEVs) were registered between 2010 and 2019. However, as the UK hosts the COP26 environmental summit, SMMT now expects Britain to break its plug-in records, forecasting that businesses and consumers will take up around 287,000 of the latest zero-emission capable cars during 2021 alone – around one in six new cars. Based on current forecasts, BEV registrations are also expected to exceed those of diesel by the end of 2022.
The rise is even more remarkable given that 2021 is expected to be a relatively weak year for new car registrations, some -30% below the average recorded over the past decade.1 The semiconductor shortage has reduced overall global car production, but manufacturers have done all they can to ensure the availability of as many plug-in vehicles as possible.
Uptake rates of plug-in vehicles began to accelerate dramatically during 2020, as the billions of pounds invested by manufacturers in new technology resulted in the widest ever choice of zero emission-capable cars. More than a quarter of all car models available in the UK can now be plugged in.
Businesses have been particularly incentivised to invest in plug-in cars thanks to a range of tax breaks and grants, meaning around two in every three new BEV registrations this year have been for large fleets.
Sustaining this surge and ensuring zero-emission mobility is accessible for all will depend on encouraging all consumers to make the switch away from fossil fuels. The UK already plans to be the first major automotive market to end the sale of new conventional petrol and diesel cars in 2030, but delivering this bold aim will require the continuation of purchase incentives to encourage those drivers currently unable or unwilling to make the transition to electrified motoring. Even more significant, however, is the need for turbocharged investment by both the public and private sector into the essential public charging infrastructure required by a growing plug-in vehicle fleet.
Mike Hawes, SMMT Chief Executive, said: “As Britain hosts COP26 and seeks to align the world in committing to achieving net zero and limiting the global average temperature rise to 1.5 degrees above pre-industrial levels, our latest outlook shows the UK experiencing a surge in plug-in vehicle uptake. Massive investment by industry as well as long standing government incentives have seen us go from just 188 new plug-in cars in 2010, to almost 300,000 in 2021.
“To achieve net zero by the desired date, however, uptake rates must continue to grow. This requires ongoing incentives to help consumers make the switch and significant investment in public charging infrastructure. Backed by the ingenuity and innovation of the automotive sector, we can then deliver zero-emission mobility that is accessible and affordable for all.”

12 Oct 2021
- SMMT calls for automotive sector to be the engine of the UK’s future international trade deals after new report reveals vehicles are the nation’s most valuable exported good, worth £27 billion.
- Total automotive sector trade drops -26% during pandemic-hit 2020 but still reaches £74 billion, benefiting every UK region.
- Long-term global car market growth provides major opportunity to accelerate economy.
- Supportive Rules of Origin to reflect post-Brexit supplier base and gigafactory investment will aid Global Britain in leading worldwide transition to electric vehicles.
Tuesday 12 October, 2021 The Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT) has called on government to put the automotive sector at the heart of future trade negotiations, after publishing a new report today confirming vehicles as the UK’s single most valuable goods trade export.
Vehicle export revenues reached £27 billion in 2020, making them more valuable to the UK than power-generating machinery and gold, even during a year when the global pandemic disrupted trade flows and shut down markets around the world.
The UK automotive sector as a whole generated a total trade revenue of £74 billion, underlying its monumental importance to international trade, with more than 80% of British-built cars and more than 60% of light commercial vehicles destined for export.
With hopes rising worldwide that the pandemic is now in retreat, the UK’s trade policy must now take advantage of the opportunities from a post-Brexit, post-fossil fuel world to restore growth and jobs with automotive central to this ambition.
With the global car market expected to grow significantly in regions such as Asia and Eastern Europe, SMMT is calling for future trade deals to include dedicated automotive annexes and provisions to reduce tariffs and regulatory barriers. It also recommends establishing Rules of Origin that will reflect the UK’s future supplier base as manufacturing moves away from the combustion engine, as well as ensuring manufacturers have the ability to recruit top talent from around the world to drive growth.
www.smmt.co.uk

15 Sep 2021
Stop the Spike and COVID-19 Pillars Campaign Stakeholder Toolkit. The overarching aim being to remind the public of the key safety measures they can continue doing to keep each other safe.
Asymptomatic Universal Testing Campaign Launch – ‘Wee Reminder’
Also, as of Monday, 13th September, we have launched the new Asymptomatic Universal Testing Campaign – ‘Wee Reminder’. The ‘Wee Reminder’ Campaign looks to help engrain twice weekly asymptomatic universal testing as a habit for people of Scotland.
How You Can Help
- Please share the social videos and accompanying social copy on your social media channels
- If you don’t already, please follow SG channels across Facebook, Twitter and Instagram and share and retweet content
Stop the Spike and COVID-19 Pillars Stakeholder Toolkit
Please find Stakeholder Toolkit attached, which contains the Stop the Spike COVID-19 pillar assets:
- Safety Measures campaign:
- Overview and key messages
- Social assets and suggested social copy
- Includes specific messages on: ventilation when socialising outdoors, outdoor socialising where possible, cleaning hands, wearing face coverings and transport safety measures
- Asymptomatic Universal Testing campaign:
- Overview and key messages
- Social assets and suggested social copy
- Symptomatic Testing and Isolation campaign:
- Overview and key messages
- Posters, social assets and suggested social copy
- COVID-19 Vaccine campaign:
- Campaign overview
- Posters, social assets and suggested social copy
Campaign Assets
All ‘Stop the Spike’ COVID-19 pillar campaign assets can be found via the links below:
- Download the Stop the Spike Campaign assets via WeTransfer here
- Download the Safety Measures Campaign assets via WeTransfer here
- Download the Asymptomatic Universal Testing Campaign assets via WeTransfer here
- Download the Symptomatic Testing and Isolation Campaign assets via WeTransfer here
- Download the COVID-19 Vaccine Campaign assets via WeTransfer here

30 Aug 2021
Since the start of the pandemic, businesses have made huge changes and sacrifices to protect public health. I’m incredibly grateful to the business community and would like to thank everyone who has spent time and effort to make their businesses as safe as possible for customers and staff. Your contribution has been vital in helping us control the spread of the virus.
We know these necessary modifications have often had a detrimental impact on the economic activity of businesses so I’m pleased our economy is now able to open fully as we move beyond Level 0.
However, the virus has not disappeared and case numbers have been increasing. That is why it is important we keep some precautionary measures in place to allow for a gradual and cautious approach, particularly as we move into the winter when more people will be interacting indoors. This will help to reduce the risk of outbreaks and allow all sectors of the economy to stay open.
Businesses have shown great leadership throughout the pandemic in encouraging adherence with mitigations and we would ask that this continues at this fragile time. I would urge customers to follow the guidance too, to support the businesses they use.
The most important step we can take to control the virus is to get vaccinated and we would encourage all who have not yet been vaccinated to do so.
Alongside this we urge businesses to continue to communicate and work with their employees to implement measures which will help us supress the virus:
- wear face coverings – this is legally required in most indoor public places including retail, restaurants, cafes, bars, workplaces and on public transport for staff and customers
- support staff to self-isolate if they are asked to do so by the NHS
- regular testing of staff to help break the chains of transmission
- continue to work with staff to support home working
- keep your premises as well ventilated as possible
Guidance for safer businesses and workplaces can be found on the Scottish Government website, including a range of further precautionary measures and good practice which can be used in workplaces to reduce the risk of outbreaks.
By working together, we can ensure businesses remain open and our economy recovers from the effects of the pandemic.
Kate Forbes
Cabinet Secretary for Finance and the Economy

29 Jul 2021
- 69,097 cars roll off production lines in June, weakest total since 1953, bar Covid hit June 2020.
- UK factories turn out 498,923 cars in first half of year, down -38.4% on five-year average.
- Latest forecast suggests global chip shortage could negatively impact planned UK production volumes by up to 100,000 units.
- Industry calls for immediate action to mitigate impact of self-isolation or risk further blow to recovery.
Thursday 29 July, 2021 UK car factories turned out 69,097 units in June, according to the latest figures released today by the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT). While this was a rise compared with the Covid-depressed June 2020, it still represents the worst June total since 1953 as the global chip shortage, caused by the pandemic, and other factors continued to take a toll on production.1
The performance rounded off a turbulent first six months for UK car production, with the pandemic, new trading rules with Europe and supply issues causing ongoing challenges. 498,923 units rolled off production lines, down -38.4% on the five-year, first-half average representing a loss of 311,160 cars worth more than £8.5billion.2 This reflects how far the sector must go before it can talk about recovery.
Exports continued to sustain British car manufacturing with more than eight in ten (83.4%) models made here so far this year shipped overseas. More than half of these (51.7%) headed into the EU, with the US the UK’s next most important global market (taking 18.8% of exports) followed by China (7.8%), Japan (1.9%) and Australia (1.8%).
UK production of battery electric (BEV), plug in hybrid (PHEV) and hybrid electric (HEV) vehicles, meanwhile, remained steady year-to-date with around a quarter (22.6%) of all cars alternatively fuelled. However, with the looming end of sale date for new petrol and diesel cars less than nine years away, the industry is challenged to accelerate the transition from fossil fuel to zero emission vehicles. This will require significant investment into vehicle manufacturing, battery production and supply chain transformation for which a clear commitment to enhancing UK automotive competitiveness is essential.
Despite the easing of Covid restrictions, manufacturers are experiencing staff shortages due to self-isolation arising from notification of contacts outside the workplace. This is putting production at risk and is another drag on the sector’s recovery. Indeed, an independent study forecasts the negative impact on planned UK car production, primarily due to the worldwide shortage of critical semiconductors, could be as much as 100,000 units this year.3
Mike Hawes, SMMT Chief Executive, said, “While the UK automotive industry continues to suffer the effects of the global pandemic, with first half year production down significantly and a tough few months looming, the sector has the capability to recover. The latest investments into new models and battery production show a bright future is within reach, yet the industry still faces headwinds most notably from global semiconductor shortages and staff absenteeism as a result of staff being ‘pinged’.
“Businesses have ensured their facilities are Covid secure but urgent action is needed, such as bringing forward the 16 August target date for exempting fully vaccinated adults from self-isolation and introducing a “test to release” scheme to support those employees not yet fully vaccinated.
“Operating conditions are still challenging, however, highlighting the need for specific actions to help competitiveness, such as creating a Build Back Better Fund and the alleviation of high energy costs, to get the sector back on track and towards the volumes that make UK facilities viable.”
The current situation for UK manufacturers remains difficult with the supply uncertainty expected to last into 2022. Despite this, there have been recent announcements of significant long-term investment into UK Automotive, including in Sunderland, Ellesmere Port and Norfolk, investment which is much needed following four years of Brexit uncertainty and some recent factory closures.
Much more such investment is needed, however, if the British vehicle manufacturing sector is to remain in step with its overseas rivals. ‘Full Throttle: Driving UK Automotive Competitiveness’, a report launched recently by SMMT, sets out a series of steps needed to attract such commitments and assure the sector’s long-term competitiveness. Recommendations include for the establishment by government of a ‘Build Back Better Fund’ for the manufacturing sector, the construction of gigafactories with 60 GWh of capacity and the installation of 2.3 million public charge points by 2030.
www.smmt.co.uk

22 Jul 2021
In this issue of AutoFocus, Cox Automotive look at the new and used car sectors, providing context to some of the forces driving current market trends. In addition, we discuss how global new car production issues are creating huge supply issues, impacting both the new and used markets and changing the way dealers go about business.
They also look at how the reopening of physical showrooms has affected car sales over the last few months and reveal their brand-new Q3 'new and used' forecast and revised 2021 forecasts.
You can read the publication here
Finally, we’re pleased to include guest features from the NFDA and Grant Thornton once again who take a forensic look at the important franchise dealer and manufacturer sectors respectively.

12 Jul 2021
In the European Commission’s communication on the ‘European Green Deal’ published end 2019, it was announced the Commission, would by June 2021, propose its revised legislation on CO2 emission performance standards for cars and vans.
Within the so-called ‘Fit for 55’ legislative package, the Commission is currently finalising its proposal for a directive amending Directive 2003/87/EC and decision (EU) 2015/1814 to strengthen the EU Emissions Trading System and extend it in line with the Union’s increased climate ambition for 2030. Once this Directive is approved, Member States shall bring into force the laws, regulations and administrative provisions necessary to comply with this Directive by 31 December 2023 at the latest.
CECRA, the European Council for Motor Trades and Repairs, representing automotive sales and repairs businesses at European level are looking forward to take stock of the Commission’s proposal and to examine whether it is achievable within the set timeframe.
Jean-Charles Herrenschmidt, President of CECRA says: “it is necessary to move forward towards zero-and low-emission vehicles and thereby achieve the Commission’s goal of a carbon-neutral Europe. The automotive sales and repair businesses welcome all new technologies to reduce CO2 emissions, however, it is essential to move forward offering a certain transitional period which is crucial to prepare our businesses for the upcoming challenges and thereby ensuring high qualified maintenance and repair of the cars of tomorrow.”
It goes without saying that the entire automotive value chain, including dealers and repairers, is facing enormous challenges. An extended infrastructure of recharging and refuelling stations is crucial for the deployment of massive sales of zero- and low-emission vehicles. European customers will only be willing to shift towards these vehicles if the infrastructure is available. Automotive manufacturers are questioning the speed of its deployment. If tomorrow, customers remain reluctant who will buy these vehicles.
CECRA is therefore requesting the Commission to take into account a transition period which is needed to transform all stakeholders’ businesses as well as to set the deployment of recharging and refuelling stations into high gear.

30 Jun 2021
The Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (the “furlough scheme”) is currently envisaged to end on 30 September 2021 and there are changes as to how the furlough scheme will operate in July, August and September 2021.
Currently, the government covers the full 80% of employee earnings (not including employer National Insurance and pension contributions) which furloughed employees are entitled to under the furlough scheme, subject to a cap of £2,500 per month.
From 1 July onwards, in addition to the employer National Insurance and pension contributions which employers are already required to cover, employers will also be required to make a 10% contribution in respect of furloughed hours in July, with the government’s contribution capped at £2,187.50 and the employer’s contribution capped at £312.50. This will then increase on 1 August to the employer having to make a 20% contribution for the months of August and September 2021, with the government’s contribution for those months being capped at £1,875 and the employer’s contribution capped at £625.
These increased contributions will apply to the unworked hours of any employee on ordinary furlough leave or on flexible furlough leave.
For the avoidance of doubt, the percentage of earnings which employees will require to receive from 1 July until 30 September must remain the same as it has been to date, namely 80% and subject to a cap of £2,500. It is the ability of employers to recover the furlough pay from the government which is reducing on the sliding scale in the months to come.
As always, employers are able to ‘top up’ furlough pay in excess of the above minimum rates at their discretion.
Whilst none are envisaged at present, should there be any further extensions or changes to the furlough scheme, we will update clients accordingly.
If you have any questions on the furlough scheme, or if you require support or advice on any other employment law matters, please do not hesitate to contact Just Employment Law on 0141 331 5150.www.justemploymentlaw.co.uk

29 Jun 2021
- ‘Full Throttle: Driving UK Automotive Competitiveness’ explains how government can deliver manufacturing competitiveness in the transition to net-zero and help ‘level-up’.
- Sector calls for a ‘Build Back Better Fund’, 60 GWh of gigafactory capacity and 2.3 million charge points by 2030.
- Industry has potential to gain 40,000 jobs this decade but, if left stranded, risks precipitous decline.
Tuesday 29 June 2021 The Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT) today launches a new, ambitious plan, ‘Full Throttle: Driving UK Automotive Competitiveness’, to secure the future of one of Britain’s most important industries.
The automotive manufacturing sector employs around 180,000 people nationwide, contributes £15bn to the economy and is the country’s largest exporter of goods.1 Moreover, automotive enables mobility. Cars and other vehicles take people to work and education, deliver food and goods and support our essential and emergency services, not least during the pandemic. Three-quarters of people over 17 in England hold a driving licence, and 95% of car owners agree that their car gives them significantly greater freedom and mobility.2 It is an industry that warrants unambiguous backing.
Commissioned by SMMT and written by Public First, the strategy sets out a series of bold policy proposals for this coming year and remainder of the decade, covering all aspects essential to automotive industry competitiveness. The UK industry has many strengths – the diversity of its companies, its engineering excellence, innovation, a highly skilled workforce and the strength of the UK market, but the global industry is fiercely competitive, and weaknesses must be addressed if its long term success – and the benefits that come with it – are to be assured.
The strategy calls for a new ‘Build Back Better Fund’ to support industry transformation, not just in automotive but across other manufacturing sectors, to revolutionise production lines and overcome some of the areas where the UK lags in cost competitiveness or strategic support – from skills to energy costs. Most importantly, the fund will help the sector transition to Net Zero and transform our existing manufacturing and supply-chain.
The shift to electrified vehicles is the biggest challenge facing the sector. Government is already working with industry to attract additional battery manufacturing to the UK but the report calls for a binding target of 60 GWh of battery capacity be built by 2030. These ‘gigafactories’ would give British manufacturers the capability to produce up to one million electric vehicles a year and ensure tariff free access to critical markets in the EU.
Finally, to support market transition, the report calls for the installation of at least 2.3 million charging points nationwide before the end of the decade. This would ensure all drivers – especially those without driveways – have the confidence to invest in the latest zero emission technologies, investment that will not just support a healthy domestic vehicle market, but which will underpin mass market automotive manufacturing in the UK and help deliver the country’s climate change and air quality goals.
The stakes are high. In a best-case scenario with the sector transitioning successfully to a zero emissions future, with ambitious global trading terms, there is the potential to gain 40,000 new, well paid and highly skilled sector jobs by 2030. This would provide a significant impact in auto heartlands such as the North-East and West Midlands, directly helping ‘level up’ the UK.3
Without the competitive conditions, however, the UK’s automotive industry risks decline. In a worst-case situation, with the sector left stranded, analysis shows that around 90,000 jobs could be lost compared with the central scenario, with most of these outside London and the South-East, increasing UK regional inequalityThe 12 Policy Proposals:
Technology & Innovation
- Commit to creating 60 GWh of battery production within the UK via gigafactories by 2030.
- Support development of a fuel cell gigafactory with 2GWh capacity to support cars, heavier vehicles and rail units by 2030.
- Roll out a comprehensive and long-term skills strategy that supports auto needs combined with piloting greater flexibility in the Apprenticeship Levy to support retraining.
- Commit to the UK becoming a global leader in developing, testing, trialling and deploying Connected and Automated Vehicle (CAV) technology.
Manufacturing Competitiveness
- Introduce a new ‘Build Back Better Fund’ to support good manufacturing jobs for the future and help lower manufacturing costs such as energy.
- Allow net zero critical industries, such as manufacturers of low carbon, hydrogen and battery vehicles, to access the same benefits and compensation schemes as energy intensive industries and get more support within the UK Emission Trading Scheme (ETS).
- Fund trial and demonstration projects to explore the use of hydrogen during manufacturing.
- Ensure the UK tax system helps position Britain as an attractive destination for global investment.
Consumer, Market & Trade
- Develop a holistic infrastructure strategy to ensure that at least 2.3 million public charging points are in place by 2030.
- Commission an independent review to holistically consider the long-term future of fuel duty and CO2 based taxes like vehicle excise duty in a decarbonised sector.
- Continue Plug-in Vehicle Incentives beyond their current term and exempt Ultra Low Emission Vehicles from taxation for the next five years
- Work with the industry to develop an ambitious, forward looking trade strategy, which targets the sector’s most important markets.

28 Jun 2021
- UK factories made 116,639 engines in May, more than double May 2020’s output.
- May 2021 output down -47.6% on five-year average for the month.
- Year-to-date output rises 18.8% with increased production for the domestic market.
Mike Hawes, SMMT Chief Executive, said, “It’s no surprise to see exponential growth in engine production, as the pandemic subdued demand across key global markets last May. Despite the doubling of output this month, a recovery to pre-pandemic levels is still some way off as export volumes remain low and the industry is hindered by the global shortage of semi-conductors. As the UK approaches the end of the lockdown, it is vital that the Government continues to support the industry for as long as is required, as production uncertainty is likely to remain at least until the end of the year.”
Credit: www.smmt.co.uk

17 Jun 2021
Key info on pricing, supply and trends in the new and used car market.
Read the report by Cox Automotive here

14 Jun 2021
Organisers of Automechanika Birmingham, Messe Frankfurt UK, made the decision following close discussion with exhibitors and other key stakeholders in the UK aftermarket.
Through this consultation process, there has been a strong interest from suppliers and manufacturers for a face-to-face national event to take place sooner than 2023.The organisers have therefore revealed that they are working with suppliers to formulate a specialist national garage and bodyshop event in 2022, with more details to follow soon.
Meanwhile, Messe Frankfurt continues to offer new digital initiatives, such as auto:resource, which provides suppliers with a digital content marketing platform as a way to connect with their customers.
Simon Albert, Managing Director of Messe Frankfurt UK, said: “We could never have imagined that when we closed the doors to a successful Automechanika Birmingham in 2019, it would be four years until the next edition. Despite these acutely challenging times, we will continue to support the automotive industry by running quality events at the right time for our partners. It has been clear from our conversations with suppliers that the industry has missed events and we look forward to providing them again soon.
“Throughout the coronavirus pandemic, the way the automotive industry, and garages in particular, have consumed content has expanded, with a growing number visiting online and digital platforms to find out information on a raft of issues affecting their business. That is why we created www.autoresource.co.uk to further serve the market. “With our commitment to organising large scale quality face-to-face events, we will continue to serve the needs of the UK aftermarket.”
Automechanika Frankfurt Digital Plus will run 14 -16 September 2021, and will then take place in its familiar format on the trade fair grounds in Germany 13 -17 September 2022. The Birmingham event will return to the NEC on 6-8 June 2023. More details will be released about the specialist UK garage and bodyshop event in 2022 in due course.
Credit: www.autoresource.co.uk

09 Jun 2021
HMRC Employer Bulletin - June 2021
This June edition brings the latest HMRC updates to support employers and payroll agents.
The bulletin contains key messages on COVID-19 updates and includes a gentle reminder to send in your expenses and benefits in kind information for the 2020 to 2021 tax year.
This edition of the Employer Bulletin covers updates on:
- COVID-19 information
- PAYE
- tax updates and changes to guidance
- customer support.

09 Jun 2021
Yesterday in a statement to Parliament the First Minister confirmed there was no immediate changes to the COVID-19 levels of protection that currently apply to different parts of the country.
The First Minister said it appears that vaccination may be reducing the proportion of people who require hospital treatment as a result of COVID-19 and there is some encouraging evidence that the length of time people spend in hospital is reducing, which may allow more scope to ease restrictions in the future.
However, she also said there is a need for continued caution while a significant proportion of the population has not yet had both doses of the vaccine and so remains more vulnerable to becoming ill and needing hospital treatment.
The Scottish Government is awaiting advice from the Joint Committee on Vaccination and Immunization (JVCI) on the vaccination of children aged 12 to 15 years old with the Pfizer BioNTech vaccine after it was approved for use in those age groups by the Medicines and Healthcare Products Regulatory Agency. If the JCVI recommends the use of the vaccine for children aged 12 and over, their advice will be implemented as quickly as possible.
Read the full statement here.

03 Jun 2021
As part of the Heavy Vehicle Testing Review, The Department for Transport has recommended that the Driver and Vehicle Standards Agency (DVSA) should consider allowing more Authorised Testing Facilities (ATFs) to open.
Until now DVSA has temporarily paused applications for new ATFs. This has sometimes been called a moratorium. We stopped accepting new applications to set up ATFs in 2017 to help us support existing ATFs and meet their needs.
DVSA and industry bodies have reviewed this policy and developed a plan with several steps to allow applications for new ATFs.
As a first step towards ending the moratorium, DVSA will now accept new applications if a proposed ATF:
- Is a move of premises for an existing ATF, but it is within the same geographic area
- Already has ‘approval in principle’ from DVSA
- Is in an area with a substantial shortage of ATFs, currently Orkney and mainland Highlands of Scotland
- Is in Southern England and is offering testing of fully laden fuel tankers (this is often known as a full pet. reg. site) or ADR testing
- Will significantly improve the service to heavy vehicle operators, by reduced journey times or other efficiency benefits. Applications made under this criteria will be prioritised based on the certainty and scale of improvement in service the proposed ATF can offer
Timings
As an operator, you may also be interested in joining the ATF network by opening a testing site. You can make an application under any of the 5 criteria from now, Thursday 3 June 2021. We have made some minor changes to the application form to include these criteria. You can find further guidance on how to apply to open an ATF.
Next steps
Applications will need to be assessed to ensure that requirements are met. Once approved and contracts are in place, staff will be scheduled as soon as possible. However, testing staff are scheduled some months ahead, so start dates may not be immediate.
DVSA knows there will be businesses which do not qualify under these criteria, and there will be further announcements on how these criteria will be widened in the future.
DVSA is working with industry bodies to develop this plan and we welcome feedback on the future priorities through your trade organisation.
This is the first in a series of regular messages following the review of heavy vehicle testing and we will continue to communicate with you regularly on our progress.

31 May 2021
At the weekend, the First Minister said that there are signs that the situation in Glasgow is stabilising in the postcodes at the heart of the initial outbreak and across the city generally, and that, if that trend continues, the city can move to Level 2 from 00:01 on Saturday 5 June.
Further funding has been made available to Glasgow City Council to provide additional support for businesses in hospitality and leisure in Glasgow, with grants ranging from £250 to £750 per week.Other areas of concern across Scotland continue to be monitored closely, including Renfrewshire, East Renfrewshire and Clackmannanshire. These areas will remain in Level 2 for now, although public health efforts will be intensified to tackle the increased prevalence.
Read the full statement here.

24 May 2021
Moray moves to Level 2, Glasgow remains in Level 3.

24 May 2021
- Total vehicles in use on UK roads falls to 40.35m units – the first drop since 2009.
- Average age of car rises to 8.4 years old – the oldest on record – with almost 10m vehicles from 2008 and earlier still in service.
- Vans reach historic highs, up to 4.6m, but declines recorded in truck, bus and coach numbers.
- Number of BEVs and PHEVs increase by more than 168,000 cars, but account for just 1.3% of the parc – demonstrating scale of task ahead to meet ambitious green targets.
Vehicle numbers on UK roads fell to 40,350,714 in 2020, according to Motorparc data released today by the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT), the first time the total number has fallen since the global financial crisis of 2009. As the pandemic stifled new vehicle uptake, the average age of cars on UK roads is now the highest on record at 8.4 years. Van uptake, however, has grown to the highest level in history, accounting for 11.4% of all vehicles on the road.
The latest parc data illustrates that, for the second consecutive year, there were more than 35 million cars registered on UK roads (35,082,800), although that figure represents a modest -0.2% dip as Covid impacted new volumes entering the market.
Light commercial vehicles (LCVs) – the only vehicle type to see an increase – saw 1.7% growth over the past year, up to a new record high of 4,604,861 vehicles. Many of these have been instrumental in supporting the nation during the pandemic, providing support to the NHS, and delivering food and goods across Britain.
Meanwhile, the number of heavy goods vehicles on our roads declined by -3.1% to 589,445 units. Bus and coach numbers saw the most significant fall at -10.7% to 73,608, as the pandemic dramatically reduced already-declining passenger numbers causing fleet operators to pause new fleet purchases and take unused vehicles off the road.
With showrooms closed for large periods of 2020 due to lockdowns, fewer new cars were registered, resulting in the oldest average car fleet since records began. The average car on UK roads was built in 2011, while almost 10 million cars have been in service since 2008 or earlier. While this is testament to the durability and quality of modern vehicles, an ageing fleet risks stalling the UK’s attempts to reduce emissions. A new car from 2020 emits, on average, 112.8g/km of CO2, which is 18.3% better than a model registered in 2011. Fleet renewal is essential if the UK is to reach its net zero target, with both conventional and alternatively fuelled vehicles having a significant role to play in the transition.
As part of the journey towards zero emission motoring, the number of battery electric vehicles (BEVs) on UK roads increased by 114.3% to a record high of 199,085, while plug-in hybrid vehicles (PHEVs) also saw their numbers increase by 35.2% to 239,510. However, combined, they represented just 1.3% of all cars on our roads – emphasising the importance of replacing older vehicles with newer, cleaner ones. Hybrid electric vehicles (HEVs) saw their numbers grow by a fifth to 621,622 cars. Petrol car volumes remained stable, down -0.2%, with diesel falling -2.3%. Combined, internal combustion engine (ICE) models accounted for 97.1% of the total parc – or 34,018,599 units.
Britain’s favourite car types are still the supermini and lower medium segments which account for six in 10 cars in service, at 11,620,733 and 9,256,839 units respectively. Dual purpose vehicles remain a distant third, with 4,619,061 in use but now account for 13.2% of cars on the road, as consumer tastes and demand shift.
www.smmt.co.uk

17 May 2021
The Scottish Government have added text to the Sector specific advice section to reflect the position that accompanied test drives can be conducted in Level 3 and below. Further details on mitigations advised are in this section. The Scottish Government understood there was ambiguity about whether test drives could happen or not and they wanted to amend the guidance to be more explicit on this.
Covid-19 retail sector guidance update:
Motor vehicle showrooms
Level 4
Additional restrictions apply to motor vehicle showrooms in Level 4 where, by law, customer access to an indoor showroom must be by staggered appointment with, where reasonably practicable, a gap between each appointment. In Level 4, test drives are permitted prior to final completion of the sale. These should take place with one sole occupant (the purchaser) and the car must be fully cleaned before and after. Motor dealers should put in place processes to ensure test drives are conducted in a restricted and responsible manner, for example through the use of appointments or by offering a test as part of the vehicle collection process.
Level 3 and below
Accompanied test drives are allowed to take place within the vehicle with the purchaser and designated motor salesperson. Motor showrooms should put the following mitigations in place to minimise transmission risk:
- Face coverings must be worn in the vehicle at all times (See: guidance on the use of face coverings)
- Vehicles should be well ventilated, by opening windows. Ventilation systems should be set to draw in fresh air and not to recirculate it.
- There should be a maximum of two people in the vehicle (seller and buyer) and they should sit in front driver seat and back passenger seat to ensure physical distancing
- Hands should be sanitised before and after the drive
- Vehicles should be cleaned before and after use, ensuring that all touch points have been sanitised and wiped clean

12 May 2021
The First Minister announced that from Monday 17th May most of mainland Scotland will move to Level 2, with eased restrictions on hospitality, entertainment, education and sport. You can read her full statement here.
Under Level 2 restrictions:
- up to six people from three households will be able to meet in each other’s homes or gardens without physical distancing – this was the limit previously planned for Level 1 but has now been accelerated for areas in Level 2. People will be encouraged to use their judgment about close physical contact with others
- up to six people from three households will be able to meet indoors in places such as pubs, cafes and restaurants, while up to eight people from eight households will be able to meet outdoors
- pubs and restaurants will be able to serve alcohol indoors until 10:30pm in two-hour booked slots
- venues including cinemas, theatres, concert halls, music venues, comedy clubs, amusement arcades, casinos, snooker halls and bingo halls will be able to reopen
- events will resume with a maximum capacity of 100 people indoors, 250 outdoors where there is unrestricted standing and 500 for events with seating. Organisers will be allowed to apply to hold bigger events
- outdoor contact sports and indoor group exercise classes will be able to restart
- more than one person will be able to sing during religious services
- amateur performing arts groups will be able to perform outdoors
- colleges and universities will have more flexibility to resume in-person learning
Moray
The new rules will apply to all mainland local authority areas with the exception of Moray, which is experiencing a high and increasing number of Coronavirus cases. As a result Moray is likely to remain in Level 3 for a further period, with travel in and out of the area prohibited other than for permitted purposes. A final decision on this will be made at the end of this week. The Scottish Government is working with Moray Council and Grampian Health Board to reduce case numbers, and will provide financial support for affected hospitality and leisure businesses if Level 3 restrictions do remain in place.
Western Isles, Orkney, Shetland and remote Highland and Argyll islands
As the virus is now sufficiently under control in the Western Isles, Orkney, Shetland and remote Highland and Argyll islands, these communities are expected to move straight to Level 1.
International Travel
From 17 May, anyone entering Scotland from countries on a new international travel ‘Green List’ will not be required to quarantine on arrival, but will have to take a PCR test for COVID-19. The Green List will initially be the same as that in place for England but will be subject to review based on Scotland’s specific needs.
If you arrive from a country on the amber list – which will be the majority of countries – you must self-isolate at home for 10 days, and take two PCR tests during this period.
If you enter Scotland from a red list country – one of the countries identified as acute-risk under our current regulations – you will be required to enter a managed isolation hotel and stay there for 10 days. Due to changes coming into force from tomorrow, those countries will include Turkey, the Maldives and Nepal.
11 May 2021
Turbulent first quarter for UK used car market as sales fall -8.9%
- UK used car transactions fall -8.9% in Q1 2021 with 1,687,755 transactions.
- Monthly performances impacted by lockdowns, but March up on particularly weak 2020.
- Market for used plug-in vehicles stays strong with a 37.9% rise in Q1 transactions.
Tuesday 11 May, 2021 The UK’s used car market declined -8.9% in the first quarter of 2021 according to the latest figures released today by the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT). Some 1,687,755 transactions took place, with the overall decline driven by large falls in January and February, of -27.1% and -19.4% respectively, as lockdown measures depressed demand and again closed car showrooms nationwide.
March saw the market show signs of recovery with a 32.2% year-on-year rise, amounting to 638,570 cars changing hands, although this compares with a weak March 2020 when the UK entered its first lockdown partway through the month. Compared with 2019, March was still down, -8.4%, and Q1 by -16.5% or 332,389 fewer transactions.
Among the turbulence, demand for used battery electric (BEV), plug-in hybrid (PHEV) and hybrid vehicles (HEV) remained strong in Q1. Buyers were keen to purchase pre-owned ultra-low and zero emissions cars, helped by increased availability and more models available. HEV transactions rose 16.6% to 27,694 units while PHEVs saw a 32.1% uplift to 10,534 units, and BEVs surged 48.3% to 6,564 sales.
However, the combined number of plug-in vehicles traded still represented only 1.0% of the market, up from 0.7% in Q1 2020. This illustrates the scale of the challenge ahead to transition the entire used car arena away from traditional fuels. Petrol and diesel powertrains combined represented 97.1% of all first quarter activity at 1,638,536 units.
Luxury saloons and specialist sports were the only segments to see growth, up 10.3% and 5.4% respectively, with transactions in the mini segment falling the most, down -18.3%. Superminis (31.4% share) were by far the most popular used buy, followed by lower medium (27.2%) and dual purpose (13.1%). Together these accounted for more than 7 in 10 (71.7%) of all cars finding new owners. Black was the number one colour choice, with almost 370,000 transactions, followed by silver/aluminium and blue, while at the other end of the spectrum, 981 pink cars changed hands.
Mike Hawes, SMMT Chief Executive, said, “These figures lay bare the turbulent impact of coronavirus lockdowns on the used car market and, while March’s performance suggests there is some pent-up demand, this is against a weak month last year, so its true extent remains to be seen. The second quarter will see significant growth as last year’s April and May markets were severely limited by lockdown measures. It’s vital that the used market is rejuvenated to help sustain jobs and livelihoods, drive fleet renewal and support environmental progress. With car showrooms open again and the UK coming out of Covid restrictions, the sector can look forward with renewed optimism.”
www.smmt.co.uk

29 Apr 2021
- March UK car output grows 46.6% against Covid hit 2020 when pandemic forced factories to close.
- Monthly performance down -22.8% on five-year March average and Q1 down -4.0% year-on-year.
- Companies continue to wrestle with global supply chain issues, impact of new EU trading arrangements and Covid recovery at home and abroad.
- New SMMT member survey reveals nine-in-ten companies expending additional resource managing UK/EU trade requirements with six-in-ten large firms expecting Covid recovery to take at least six months.
Thursday 29 April 2021 UK car production rose 46.6% in March, the first increase after 18 months of decline, with 115,498 cars manufactured, according to the latest figures released today by the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT).1 The performance marks one year since the coronavirus crisis caused all UK automotive plants to be shuttered in mid-March 2020, after only 78,767 cars had left factory gates that month.
Compared with the five-year March average, production was down -22.8%, equivalent to a loss of 34,047 units, and some -32.1% lower than the 2017 record for the month.2 It rounds off a -4.0% decline in the first quarter of 2021 with 306,558 units produced, 12,694 less than a year before.
March output for the domestic market rose 19.4% to 20,269 units with exports also increasing, up 54.1% to 95,229 units. More than eight-in-ten (82.5%) cars were sent overseas in March, with shipments to major destinations rising dramatically compared with 2020 when many markets were already shut before the UK itself entered lockdown.
Exports to the EU, US and Asia were all up in March, by 33.5%, 36.4% and 54.1% respectively. The EU remained by far the number one market for UK made cars, with more than half (51.9%) of all exported cars heading across the channel. Meanwhile, combined output of battery electric (BEV), plug-in hybrid (PHEV) and hybrid vehicles (HEV) amounted to a 21.5% share of all cars produced, up from 13.7% a year before, meaning one-in-five-cars produced in the UK is now alternatively fuelled.
www.smmt.co.uk

27 Apr 2021
The Scottish Government has confirmed to SMTA that accompanied test drives are permitted under level three guidelines and that this is allowed in all level 0-3 areas, using the same mitigations as a driving lesson e.g. wearing a face covering, ventilation, cleaning of hands and surfaces.

22 Apr 2021
In advance of the easing of restrictions coming into effect from 26 April, the Scottish Government have now updated their retail guidance, including checklists, on our website. Please find the link below:
Retail guidance: Coronavirus (COVID-19): retail sector guidance - gov.scot (www.gov.scot)
Also, the ‘Helping your business to reopen safely’ toolkit is listed below. This has been developed by the Scottish Government to support businesses across Scotland to reopen safely by providing them with posters and digital assets they can use to promote the latest guidance and regulations to employees and customers.
We encourage you to utilise them in key spaces where staff and the general public can see them. The guidance and regulations promoted in the resources are critical in our combined efforts to enable businesses to reopen safely while minimising the spread of COVID-19.
The campaign toolkit attached includes the following resources:
- 5 posters, covering messaging for both business staff and customers
- 4 social / digital posts
- An A5 leaflet
- A window sticker
Please find the assets below in DropBox format:

21 Apr 2021
From Monday 26 April, hospitality venues such as cafés, pubs and restaurants can reopen, along with tourist accommodation. Non-essential retail outlets and close contact services such as beauty salons can also reopen, in addition to indoor attractions and public buildings such as galleries, museums and libraries.
Help and support if your business is affected by coronavirus (COVID-19)
Watch videos and register for the free webinars to learn more about the support available to help you deal with the economic impacts of coronavirus (updated 20 April 2021).
Find business support in Scotland
Find the business support you need, including help and advice for those affected by the
coronavirus pandemic and operating after Brexit

21 Apr 2021
HMRC latest information about financial support schemes available to help you as part of the UK Government’s Plan for Jobs, including the VAT deferral new payment scheme and the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS).
AT deferral – apply now to spread your payments
The VAT deferral new payment scheme is open for all businesses who deferred paying VAT due between 20 March and 30 June 2020 and have been unable to pay in full by 31 March 2021.
Apply now to spread these payments over a number of months – join by 21 April 2021 to benefit from up to 10 monthly instalments. The sooner you join, the more instalments are available to you.
You can join the scheme quickly and simply online without needing to call HMRC. To find out more information, including the things you need to prepare before joining online, go to GOV.UK and search 'VAT deferral'.
You need to apply by 21 June 2021 at the latest if you want to join the scheme online.
You can now submit your CJRS claims for periods in April. These must be made by Friday 14 May.
You can claim before, during or after you process your payroll. If you can, it’s best to make a claim once you’re sure of the exact number of hours your employees will work so you don’t have to amend your claim later.
Check if you and your employees are eligible and work out how much you can claim using our CJRS calculator and examples, by searching 'Job Retention Scheme' on GOV.UK.
What you need to do now
- If you haven’t submitted your claim for March but believe that you have a reasonable excuse for missing the 14 April deadline, check if you can make a late claim by searching 'claim for wages' on GOV.UK.
- Submit any claims for April no later than Friday 14 May.
- Keep records that support the amount of CJRS grants you claim, in case HMRC needs to check them.
You must pay the associated employee tax and National Insurance contributions to HMRC. If you don’t do that, you’ll need to repay the whole of the CJRS grant to HMRC.
The UK Government will continue to pay 80% of your furloughed employees’ usual wages for the hours not worked, up to a cap of £2,500 per month, to the end of June.
In July, CJRS grants will cover 70% of employees' usual wages for the hours not worked, up to a cap of £2,187.50. In August and September, this will then reduce to 60% of employees’ usual wages, up to a cap of £1,875.
You will need to pay the difference from July, so that you continue to pay your furloughed employees at least 80% of their usual wages for the hours they do not work during this time, up to a cap of £2,500 per month.
If you have employees who have previously been ineligible for the CJRS, as they were not on your payroll on 30 October 2020, they may be eligible for periods from 1 May 2021 onwards.
From May you will be able to claim for eligible employees who were on your PAYE payroll on 2 March 2021. This means you must have made a PAYE Real Time Information (RTI) submission between 20 March 2020 and 2 March 2021, notifying HMRC of earnings for that employee.
You and your employees do not need to have benefitted from the scheme before to make a claim, as long as you meet the eligibility criteria. For more information on eligibility, search 'check if you can claim for your employees’ wages' on GOV.UK.
Changes to CJRS claims for variable pay from May
For periods from 1 May, when calculating the average wages for employees who are not on a fixed salary, you should no longer includes period of:
- Statutory Sick Pay related leave
- family related statutory leave
- reduced rate paid leave following a period of Statutory Sick Pay or family related leave.
However, if your employee was on one of these types of leave for the entire period used to calculate their average wages, then you should continue to include the days and wages related to that date.
For more information on variable pay calculations, go to GOV.UK and search 'calculate how much you can claim'.
Frequently asked questions about the CJRS
You can find everything you need to know about the CJRS on GOV.UK by searching 'Job Retention Scheme', but here are some answers to the questions that employers have been asking us recently:
Can I still use the CJRS if I’m starting to re-open my business?
You can continue to use the CJRS if your business is affected by coronavirus. You don’t need to place all your employees on furlough. You can also use the CJRS flexibly to bring your employees back to work for some of their usual hours. You can claim for a portion of the usual wage costs for the hours spent on furlough.
Can I claim a CJRS grant to pay for holiday leave?
If you have furloughed employees because of the effects of coronavirus on your business, you can claim under the CJRS for periods of paid leave they take while on furlough, including for bank holidays. You should not place employees on furlough just because they are going to be on leave.
If your employee is furloughed for only some of their hours, you can count time taken as holiday as furloughed hours, rather than working hours. This means you can currently claim for 80% of your employee's usual wages when they're on leave.
In line with the Working Time Regulations, if a furloughed employee takes holiday you should make sure you are calculating the correct holiday pay, and not simply continuing to pay the 80% you receive through the CJRS. You may need to top up your employees’ pay to 100% of their normal hourly rate or salary. For more information search 'check if you can claim for your employees' wages' and 'holiday entitlement and pay during coronavirus' on GOV.UK.

15 Apr 2021
As the new tax year starts, the Employer Bulletin 89 has some important information following the Spring Budget and Tax Policies and Consultations for Spring 2021.
There's also information about COVID-19 easements, new products, guidance updates and information for your employees.
This edition of the Employer Bulletin covers updates and information on:
- COVID-19
- UK Transition
- consultation calls and responses
- PAYE
- tax and changes to guidance.

14 Apr 2021
Coronavirus (COVID-19) latest news and updates
Self-Employment Income Support Scheme
Coronavirus (COVID-19): local protection levels
Accelerated easing of restrictions
Virtual business events and webinars
Operating after Brexit latest news and updates
Moving your goods and services
Virtual business events and webinars to help your business operate after Brexit
SME Brexit Support Fund

13 Apr 2021
The Covid-19 restriction on travelling around Scotland is to be lifted from Friday, while people are to be allowed to meet up in larger groups outdoors.
First Minister Nicola Sturgeon said measures were being eased earlier than planned to help people's mental health.
People will be allowed to meet in groups of up to six adults from six households in outdoor settings.
And they will be permitted to travel across Scotland to do so, as long as they do not stay overnight.
Other restrictions are expected to be eased from 26 April - with premises including shops, gyms, pubs and restaurants due to reopen on a restricted basis.
Hospitality businesses will need to close their doors at 20:00 indoors and 22:00 outdoors, with alcohol only allowed to be served outside.
Restrictions on travel from Scotland to other parts of the UK are also expected to be lifted from 26 April.
Read the full article at www.bbc.co.uk

12 Apr 2021
- SMMT analysis reveals around 460 models, 4,650 standard specifications and an almost infinite number of options, giving customers near limitless choice as showrooms reopen.
- Breadth of range highlights vital role of showrooms and staff in helping drivers select the right vehicle for their requirements.
- Vehicle renewal essential for Britain to achieve its green goals, as electric powertrains and more efficient engines deliver -21.7% reduction in CO2 emissions per average car over past decade.
Monday, 12 April 2021 As showrooms reopen their doors today, consumers will be greeted by a vast choice of the cleanest ever vehicles to suit their needs according to new research by the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT).
The latest analysis reveals that there are now 462 individual car models available in around 4,650 standard specifications augmented by an almost infinite number of options. With the widest ever choice of zero-emission cars – accounting for one in three available models1 – consumers will have a near limitless choice of mobility options as lockdown restrictions are eased. Now, they will also be able to tap directly into dealer expertise to identify the vehicle, power source and specification best suited for their needs.
New vehicle uptake is crucial to the UK reaching its emission reduction goals, as older, less efficient cars are taken off the road and replaced by the latest lower emission ones. The average new car in 2020 emitted -21.7% less CO2 than its 2010 counterpart,2 helping the country and the industry meet their respective climate change targets.
Despite the variety available and anticipated consumer demand, the industry has warned that a full recovery by the end of the year remains highly challenging. New car registrations during Q1 2021 were -37.1% down on the average for 2010-2019,3 and for levels to return to ‘normal’ by the end of the year would require keys to a new car being handed over every 12 seconds.4
With dealerships across Britain having rolled down their shutters on 5 January as part of lockdown, drivers will be rewarded for their patience over the past few months with an exceptional breadth of options that will ensure they can find the right vehicle for their needs. The automotive industry, which supports 864,000 skilled jobs across the country, has weathered a £22.2 billion loss in turnover from new car registrations since March 2020 and hopes the variety of options available will stimulate demand.
Mike Hawes, SMMT Chief Executive, said: “After one of the hardest years in living memory for everyone, reopening showrooms today takes the handbrake off UK Auto. With the widest and greenest choice of cars ever seen, unleashing pent up consumer demand can accelerate the industry’s recovery and that of the economy. As the automotive sector counts the cost of £22.2 billion lost in turnover during the pandemic, we hope today marks the start of that recovery, as well as giving consumers ever more choice for their motoring needs.”
www.smmt.co.uk

07 Apr 2021
This update from the Scottish Government directs businesses towards the most up to date information on COVID-19.
The Find Business Support website has details of support and guidance for businesses that have been affected by the pandemic.
The most recent Brexit advice and support can be accessed here.
Please see updated guidance for sectors of the economy who rely on shared, self-catering accommodation for work, such as forestry, construction and telephone engineers, which was published today.
***The Scottish Parliamentary pre-election period began on the 25 March and runs until the election to the Scottish Parliament takes place on 6 May 2021. This places some restrictions on the activities of civil servants. Our response to COVID-19 is on-going we are issuing this update to signpost you towards new and essential information***
The Scottish Government’s timetable for easing restrictions has been published. The timetable sets out how and when we plan to lift the current coronavirus restrictions over the coming weeks and months.
Safer workplace guidance is released on a sectoral basis and can be found here.
The NHS Inform coronavirus webpage is the fastest way for people to get the latest health advice and information.

07 Apr 2021
As of 1st April the annual index-linked increases to various employment law rates and allowances have come into effect.
For information on new National Minimum Wage rates, which came into effect a few days earlier on 1 April, please see our recent JEL Alert on this topic.
Likewise, for details of increases to the maximum amounts of compensation that can be awarded in certain claims at Employment Tribunal, JEL Alert in relation to these.
They have detailed below the new rates for other key allowances that have now increased:
- Statutory Sick Pay (SSP) has increased to £96.35 per week for eligible employees. Further information regarding who is eligible for SSP and how long it is payable for can be found at statutory sick pay factsheet.
- Statutory Maternity Pay, Statutory Paternity Pay, Statutory Shared Parental Pay, Statutory Adoption Pay and Statutory Bereavement Pay have all increased to £151.97 per week. You can find more information here statutory payment factsheet.
- The cap on a week’s pay for a statutory redundancy payment has increased to £544 per week. This means that the maximum statutory redundancy payment is now £16,320. (This is also the maximum Basic Award in an unfair dismissal claim.) More information is set out in their termination payment factsheet
Just Employment Law
www.justemploymentlaw.co.uk

06 Apr 2021
Scotland's new car registrations for March 2021 saw an increase of 23.53% compared to March 2020.
Please click here to read the full report.

01 Apr 2021
Scottish car retailers have been told that they can resume unaccompanied test drive provision to boost their retail recovery from April 5.
The Scottish Motor Trade Association (SMTA) confirmed that dealers will be able to allow customers access to a car, prior to a purchase, following confirmation from the Scottish Government today (April 1).
Responding to an enquiry from SMTA chief executive Sandy Burgess, the Scottish Government’s head of retail policy, Catherine Brown, revealed details that were set to be updated in official guidance posted online ahead of showrooms re-opening (for schedules appointments) on Easter Monday.
In response to the question ‘Can a potential buyer take a car for a test drive before buying it?’, the guidance states: “Test drives are permitted prior to final completion of the sale.
“Test drives should take place with one sole occupant (the purchaser) within the vehicle and the car must be fully cleaned before and after.
“Motor dealers should put in place processes to ensure test drives are conducted in a restricted and responsible manner, for example through the use of appointments or by offering a test as part of the vehicle collection process.”
Burgess had appealed to the Scottish Government for clarification of its policy on test drives ahead of the Easter Bank Holiday weekend.
He said that SMTA members were “raring to go” and keen to get their plans and any required protocols into place in advance of the weekend.
He warned government officials that some traders – not SMTA members – had already started advertising they are advertising they are open.
But he added: “I am passionate about our members abiding by the rules.”
Read the full article on AM Online

29 Mar 2021
- UK engine manufacturing output declines -20.5% in February with 170,271 units built.
- Production for domestic and overseas markets falls -13.1% and -25.9% respectively.
- Engine output has fallen by a quarter so far in 2021, down to 338,562 units.
Mike Hawes,SMMT Chief Executive, said, “Now one year into the coronavirus pandemic, UK engine manufacturers have seen their output significantly affected. With subdued car markets at home and abroad, new customs processes with the EU, and global supply chain issues impacting the sector, this month’s figures are further evidence of the challenging circumstances. There is, thankfully, a roadmap out of the pandemic in this country but, with the majority of our engines exported, we need to see global markets on the road to recovery before UK manufacturers can look forward with confidence.”

23 Mar 2021
When Arnold Clark chief executive Eddie Hawthorne openly conceded that he had initially felt the COVID-19 crisis would be “over by Easter”, it was clear that nobody in the sector could have imagined being in lockdown 12 months on.
Even the sector’s most pessimistic car retailers would have been hard-pushed to predict that they would be waiting once again for showroom reopenings as the UK reached the first anniversary of Prime Minister Boris Johnson’s announcement that retail would close its doors on March 23, 2020.
But as Vertu Motors’ Robert Forrester took to twitter this morning to mark a year passing since “the worst day” in his career, the sector is also able to acknowledge an acceleration in retail evolution which has future-proofed many for challenges that were already on the way.
And the sector has also been able to acknowledge the role that Government’s fiscal measures, some OEM partners’ swift support and suppliers efforts to mitigate costs have had on their business.
At the beginning of March last year Marshall chief executive Daksh Gupta decalred in an AM News Insight report that COVID-19 coronavirus posed the ‘biggest threat’ to UK car retailers.
Speaking at AM Live Virtual 10 months on, Gupta said he was proud to have been part of a team who decided to close its car retail business ahead of Prime Minister Boris Johnson’s lockdown announcement a year ago.
“To make that call is pretty brave, to shut 132 operations with over 4,000 people. I was really proud we’d done that,” he said.
Gupta also told AM Live Virtual how the business started tracking business decisions in minutiae after COVID-19 struck.
He begun chairing twice weekly executive committee meetings, on a Tuesday and a Friday, and took minutes himself – logging every action.
Gupta said: “When you capture the action, you know who’s doing what and when by. We’ve kept that going and we are now on over 500 actions. From a business continuity perspective that was key.”
Marshall has weathered the COVID storm in impressive style.
Earlier this month Gupta told AM that the group would consider repaying its CJRS furlough support after reporting 2020 financial results which showed revenues down by 5.3% to £2.15bn as pre-tax profits rose 3.7% to £20.4m.
Nonetheless, Gupta is keen to get back to trading and back out into his dealership sites.
While he said video conference meetings had proven to be efficient, he said: “I’m not a person that likes to sit behind a desk.”
For Hawthorne, the COVID experience has been a sobering process.
As lockdown drew to an end in June last year, Hawthorne admitted in an interview with AM that he initially felt that the COVID-19 coronavirus crisis would be “over by Easter”, later conceding that it had fundamentally changed car retail.
Hawthorne said that his first reaction had been that the health crisis would have “all blown over in two to three weeks” but asked “how naive was I?”
Last week Hawthorne suggested that Arnold Clark would be taking a pragmatic approach to its return from the latest ‘Lockdown 3’ restrictions, stating that the coronavirus pandemic would not simply “go away” in mid-April.
Hawthorne told AM that the trend of the COVID-19 pandemic across the UK has been mirrored among the employees of the top AM100 retail group, with “hundreds of staff” self-isolating or affected directly by COVID during January spike in infection rates.
“As of today, that number has come down to 28, so things are looking up,” he said.
Car retail appears to have adapted well to COVID-19, with an race to adopt new digital retail methods and consumers becoming more open to online purchasing to ensure driving sales to a point where Auto Trader could report car sales volumes around 90% of their seasonal norm in early March.
However, Hawthorne and Gupta remain among the business leaders who are well aware of the toll the pandemic has had on the car retail sector and its workforce.
“It doesn’t matter whether you’re a CEO general manager or working elsewhere in the business – everybody will have had a very difficult year,” said Gupta.
Article Credit: AM Online

18 Mar 2021
Mike Hawes, SMMT Chief Executive, said, "The decision to slash the Plug-in Car Grant and Van & Truck Grant is the wrong move at the wrong time. New battery electric technology is more expensive than conventional engines and incentives are essential in making these vehicles affordable to the customer.
Cutting the grant and eligibility moves the UK even further behind other markets, markets which are increasing their support, making it yet more difficult for the UK to get sufficient supply. This sends the wrong message to the consumer, especially private customers, and to an industry challenged to meet the Government’s ambition to be a world leader in the transition to zero emission mobility.”

17 Mar 2021
In a Statement to Parliament yesterday, the First Minister set out an indicative timetable for the re-opening of parts of the economy over the next two months.
The indicative timetable includes:
From 2 April:
- A lifting of the ‘Stay at Home’ requirement and replacing it with a ‘Stay Local’ message (retaining the current, local authority-based travel restrictions for at least a three-week period)
From 5 April:
- reopening of non-essential ‘click and collect’ retail
- extending the list of retail permitted to include garden centres (indoor and outdoor), key cutting shops, mobility equipment shops, baby equipment shops, electrical repair shops, hairdressers and barbers (with shopfronts – not mobile services) by appointment only, homeware shops and vehicle showrooms (appointment only) and forecourts
From 26 April:
- travel within all of mainland Scotland permitted (subject to other restrictions that remain in place)
- remaining shops can reopen and mobile close contact services can resume
- gyms can reopen for individual exercise
- tourist accommodation to reopen (self-catering accommodation to be restricted in line with rules on indoor gathering)
- work in people’s homes to resume
- driving lessons to resume
- weddings and funerals for up to 50 (including wakes and receptions with no alcohol permitted)
- libraries, museums, galleries re-open
- outdoor hospitality to open till 22:00 with alcohol permitted. Indoor hospitality permitted without alcohol and closing at 20:00
From 17 May:
- further re-opening of hospitality: bars, pubs, restaurants and cafes can stay open until 22:30 indoors with alcohol permitted and 2 hour time-limited slots and until 22:00 outdoors with alcohol permitted
- adult outdoor contact sport and indoor group exercises can resume
- cinemas, amusement arcades and bingo halls can re-open
- small scale indoor and outdoor events can resume subject to capacity constraints (to be confirmed following stakeholder engagement)
- non-professional performance arts can resume outdoors
June
The First Minister said it is too early to give specific dates beyond May. However, understanding the need for people and businesses to plan, from the start of June, it is hoped that Scotland can move back to Level 1 of the Strategic Framework, allowing further relaxation across all areas of the economy and society, while still applying physical distancing and other non-pharmaceutical interventions and the FACTS guidance.
A move to Level 0 is hoped to be able to take place from the end of June.
Business Support
The last four-weekly Strategic Framework Business Fund payment of up to £3,000 will be paid on 22 March, as scheduled and grants of up to £7,500 for retailers and up to £19,500 for hospitality and leisure businesses will be paid in April to help businesses re-open progressively. These one-off re-start grants will replace ongoing SFBF payments and will provide more money up front to help with the costs of re-opening. Eligible businesses must have applied to the SFBF by 22 March in order to receive these payments.
Further Information
Link to the full indicative timetable https://www.gov.scot/publications/coronavirus-covid-19-timetable-for-easing-restrictions/pages/timetable/
Link to further information on support for businesses https://www.gov.scot/publications/coronavirus-covid-19-timetable-for-easing-restrictions/pages/support-for-business/
Link to the First Minister’s statement https://www.gov.scot/publications/coronavirus-covid-19-update-march-16-2021/
Link to News Release https://www.gov.scot/news/timetable-for-further-lockdown-easing/

15 Mar 2021
The Finance and Leasing Association (FLA) has predicted a “strong recovery” from the consumer car finance sector after volumes declined by 35% as COVID-19 ‘Lockdown 3’ stalled trading in January.
Geraldine Kilkelly, the FLA’s director of research and chief economist, said that the impact of the latest coronavirus restrictions on the car retail sector’s ability to trade had “not been as severe” as that experienced in H1 2020 she reported the latest finance data.
Kilkelly said: “The impact of the latest UK-wide lockdown restrictions has not been as severe as the first lockdown introduced last March with many dealerships able to offer click and collect or deliver services.
“The value of new business in the consumer car finance market is expected to fall by 16% in Q1 2021 as a whole.”
However, predicting a strong recovery for the sector, Kilkelly added: “Our latest research suggests that once showrooms re-open there will be a strong recovery in the consumer car finance market, with the value of new business expected to grow by 17% in 2021, and a further 12% growth forecast for 2022.”
The FLA reported that the consumer new car finance market had seen a 38% fall in new business volumes in January (to 36,134) compared with the same month in 2020 as the consumer used car finance market reported a 34% fall (to 87,557).
The value of advances across both new and used declined by 31% during the month, it said, finishing the month’s trading at £1.99 billion.
Article Credit: AM Online

11 Mar 2021
The Government has set out the next steps towards its ban on the sale of new internal combustion engine (ICE) cars and vans in 2030, starting with a consultation this year on which hybrid vehicles will remain on sale from 2030 to 2035.
When the Government announced the phase-out dates, it said that only hybrid cars and vans that could drive a ‘significant distance’ with no carbon coming out of the tailpipe, would remain on sale until 2035.
The consultation will determine the definition of ‘significant zero emission capability’.
The Government will also consider a very limited range of derogations to the phase out dates for specialist vehicles, including military service and emergency vehicles, and for parts of the market which may need further time to transition, such as small volume manufacturers.
It said that it will “consult on these derogations in due course”.
The consultations will be followed by a delivery plan this year which will “set out major milestones towards the phase out dates and committed spending and regulatory measures”.
The Government said it will monitor progress against the plan and report publicly on an annual basis, with a full a review of progress towards the phase out dates taking place by 2025.
Hydrogen's potential
In publishing its response today to the consultation on ending the sale of new petrol, diesel and hybrid cars and vans, the Government reiterated that it takes a “technology neutral approach” on how the transition to zero emission vehicles (ZEVs) will be achieved.
“While it is true that battery electric vehicles (BEVs) dominate the current ZEV market, we recognise the potential of hydrogen as another solution for zero emission transport, particularly for heavier road vehicles,” it said.
The Government will discuss the potential role for hydrogen in decarbonising the transport sector, including road transport in its delayed transport decarbonisation plan, which is due to be published this year.
A separate hydrogen strategy, also expected this year, will set how the UK hydrogen economy will be developed, including how the Government will work with industry to create 5GW of low carbon hydrogen production for use across the economy by 2030.
The Government has said it will consult the heavy goods vehicle (HGV) industry before making a decision on bringing in a diesel ban for those vehicles from 2030.
Courtesy www.smarttransport.org.uk

09 Mar 2021
The National Minimum Wage and National Living Wage rates will increase on 1 April. In addition to the new rates, the age from which workers become eligible for the National Living Wage will be lowered. From 1 April all workers aged 23 and over must be paid the National Living Wage or above.
Visit National Minimum Wage and National Living Wage rates - GOV.UK (www.gov.uk) to find full information on this.
HMRC is offering live webinars in March to explain the upcoming rate rises, including when exactly you should start paying the new rates.
Choose a date and time to attend

08 Mar 2021
Fewer vehicles will need an MOT during April and May this year.
This means garages will be quieter and looking to make up the shortfall of work.
Last year, we helped you to encourage motorists to come in early and ‘Beat the Rush’.
We now want to help you promote your other safety checks to motorists, like a health check or service, during the quieter months.
Whatever your essential journey, make it SAFE
As the schools return, some people may need to use their vehicles more regularly.
So, we’ve developed a campaign to help motorists to check their vehicle is safe before they set off.
We’re recommending motorists do four basic things:
Service or health check if needed
Air in tyres
Fill up screenwash
Examine lights and tyre tread
As part of the campaign, we’ll be promoting the value of a getting a service or health check at a local garage.
Working together: free toolkit for communicating with your customers
Our research shows 95% of customers trust you.
So, to help you manage the shortfall in MOT work, we’ve developed another toolkit to help you reach out to customers who need to drive. It’s designed to help you contact them to:
- offer a service or health check for peace of mind
- provide information about how to do simple vehicle safety checks
- ask them to consider going back to their original MOT date
When is this happening
The ‘Whatever your essential journey, make it SAFE’ campaign begins today, Friday 5 March 2021.
We will encourage motorists who need to drive to carry out the SAFE checks and promote the value of getting professional services from a local garage.
3 easy steps to get involved with the campaign
- Download the toolkit and images below
- Use the templates for social media and email messages to your customers – or create your own
- Keep an eye on your emails as we will contact you as the campaign progresses
Here's the SAFE vehicle safety checks toolkit (MOT garages) (click link to download)
There are several images available to download - click here
Promoting vehicle safety checks to your customers who need to drive - Matters of Testing (blog.gov.uk)

08 Mar 2021
Last Wednesday, the Chancellor of the Exchequer, the Rt. Hon Rishi Sunak MP delivered the government’s Budget for 2021.
In his speech, the Chancellor announced extensions to a number of current COVID-19 schemes, alongside additional support for individuals and businesses, as the UK continues to navigate the impact of the pandemic, including extending the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme until the end of September 2021, alongside other measures.
We have summarised some of these measures for employers below, including details about tax rate changes. Information about all Budget 2021 measures announced, can be found on GOV.UK.
To allow for more transparency and scrutiny of documents that would traditionally be published at Budget, Her Majesty’s Treasury have also announced that a range of tax consultations and calls for evidence will also be published on 23 March. Several of these consultations are key to the government’s 10-year tax administration strategy. We'd encourage you to engage with these, a further email will be issued sharing details of these documents with you once published.
COVID-19 support
Extending the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS) until the end of September 2021: The UK government will continue to pay 80% of employees’ usual wages for the hours not worked, up to a cap of £2,500 per month, up to the end of June 2021. For periods in July, CJRS grants will cover 70% of employees’ usual wages for the hours not worked, up to a cap of £2,187.50. In August and September, this will then reduce to 60% of employees’ usual wages up to a cap of £1,875. Employers will need to continue to pay their furloughed employees at least 80% of their usual wages for the hours they do not work during this time, up to a cap of £2,500 per month. They also need to pay the associated Employer National Insurance contributions and pension contributions on subsidised furlough pay from their own funds. When claiming for periods from 1 May 2021 onwards, eligible employees must have been employed on 2 March 2021 and had a Real Time Information (RTI) submission to HMRC notifying a payment of earnings for that employee by their employer between 20 March 2020 and 2 March 2021. You can find out more about the CJRS on GOV.UK.
The VAT deferral new payment scheme: The new payment scheme helps businesses with deferred VAT to pay what they owe in smaller, monthly instalments from March, interest free. The scheme is now open, and you can choose to make 2-11 monthly payments, depending on when you join. The later you join the fewer instalments are available to you. You can join through a simple online service without needing to contact HMRC. You need to join the scheme before the end of June. More details are available from GOV.UK.
VAT reduction for the UK’s tourism and hospitality sector: The government will extend the temporary reduced rate of 5% VAT for goods and services supplied by the tourism and hospitality sector until 30 September 2021. To help businesses manage the transition back to the standard 20% rate, a 12.5% rate will apply for the subsequent six months until 31 March 2022.
Income Tax exemption for employer-reimbursed coronavirus antigen tests for tax year 2020-21 and 2021-22: This measure will continue the Income Tax exemption for payments that an employer makes to an employee to reimburse for the cost of a relevant coronavirus antigen. There will be no Income Tax liability for the employee or employer.
Continuation of the home office equipment expenses COVID-19 easement for the 2021-22 tax year: An Income Tax exemption and corresponding NICs disregard were introduced for the 2020-21 tax year. This allowed employers to reimburse employees for the cost of home office equipment deemed necessary to work from home as a result of the COVID-19 outbreak free from Income Tax and Class 1 NICs. The exemption was due to end on 5 April 2021 but will now be extended to have effect until 5 April 2022.
Extended loss carry back for business: To help otherwise-viable UK businesses which have been pushed into a loss-making position, the trading loss carry-back rule will be temporarily extended from the existing one year to three years. This will be available for both incorporated and unincorporated businesses. Further details are available from our guidance note.
Tax rate changes
Personal Allowance and higher rate threshold (HRT): The income tax Personal Allowance will rise with CPI as planned to £12,570 from April 2021 and will remain at this level until April 2026. The income tax HRT will rise as planned to £50,270 from April 2021 and will remain at this level until April 2026. The Personal Allowance applies across the UK. The HRT for savings and dividend income will also apply UK-wide. The HRT for non-savings and non-dividend income will apply to taxpayers in England, Wales, and Northern Ireland.
Corporation tax: The rate of Corporation Tax will increase from April 2023 to 25% on profits over £250,000. The rate for small profits under £50,000 will remain at 19% and there will be relief for businesses with profits under £250,000 so that they pay less than the main rate. In line with the increase in the main rate, the Diverted Profits Tax rate will rise to 31% from April 2023 so that it remains an effective deterrent against diverting profits out of the UK.
Pensions Lifetime Allowance: The government will maintain the Lifetime Allowance at its current level of £1,073,100 until April 2026.
Annual Tax on Enveloped Dwellings (ATED) and 15 per cent rate of Stamp Duty Land Tax (SDLT): Relief for Housing Co-Operatives: Following a consultation on draft legislation over the Summer of 2020, the government will introduce new reliefs from ATED and the 15% rate of SDLT for certain qualifying housing co-operatives. For SDLT, the relief can be claimed for land transactions where the effective date of the transaction is on or after 3 March 2021. For ATED, the relief will apply to chargeable periods beginning on or after 1 April 2020, allowing eligible housing co-operatives who have already paid ATED for that period to claim a refund. A tax information and impact note has been published on GOV.UK.
Other HMRC related measures
OECD reporting rules for digital platforms: The government will consult on the implementation of the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) rules that will require digital platforms to send information about the income of their sellers to both HMRC and the seller themselves. This will help taxpayers in the sharing and gig economy get their tax right, and help HMRC detect and tackle non-compliance.
The Van Benefit and Car and Van Fuel Benefit uprating for 2021: The government has announced that the van benefit charge and fuel benefit charges for cars and vans will be uprated by the Consumer Price Index from 6 April 2021.
Interest harmonisation and reform of penalties for late submission and late payment of tax: The government will reform the penalty regime for VAT and Income Tax Self Assessment (ITSA) to make it fairer and more consistent. The new late submission regime will be points-based, and a financial penalty will only be issued when the relevant threshold is reached. The new late payment regime will introduce penalties proportionate to the amount of tax owed and how late the tax due is. The government will introduce a new approach to interest charges and repayment interest to align VAT with other tax regimes. These reforms will come into effect:
- for VAT taxpayers, from periods starting on or after 1 April 2022
- taxpayers in ITSA with business or property income over £10,000 per year, from accounting periods beginning on or after 6 April 2023
- all other taxpayers in ITSA, from accounting periods beginning on or after 6 April 2024.
For details about all other measures please visit GOV.UK.

04 Mar 2021
Scotland's car registrations saw a 20.62% drop compared to this time last year and the whole of the UK saw a 35.53% drop.
You can view a more detailed report on the car figures which includes regional figures and top tens - click here.
[Car data provided by SMMT]

04 Mar 2021
Extension to the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme
The Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS) has been extended until the end of September 2021.
The UK Government will continue to pay 80% of employees’ usual wages for the hours not worked, up to a cap of £2,500 per month, up to the end of June 2021.
For periods in July, CJRS grants will cover 70% of employees’ usual wages for the hours not worked, up to a cap of £2,187.50. In August and September, this will then reduce to 60% of employees’ usual wages up to a cap of £1,875.
You will need to continue to pay your furloughed employees at least 80% of their usual wages for the hours they do not work during this time, up to a cap of £2,500 per month. This means, for periods between July and September, you will need to fund the difference between this and the CJRS grants yourself. You can also top up wages above the 80% if you wish, but you are not required to do so.
You must continue to pay the associated Employer National Insurance contributions and pension contributions on subsidised furlough pay from your own funds.
CJRS eligibility from May
For periods from 1 May 2021 onwards, you will be able to claim for eligible employees who were employed by you and on your PAYE payroll on 2 March 2021. This means you must have made a PAYE Real Time Information (RTI) submission to HMRC between 20 March 2020 and 2 March 2021, notifying us of earnings for that employee.
You and your employees do not need to have benefitted from the scheme before to make a claim, as long as you meet the eligibility criteria.
For more information on the extension to the scheme and the support available, search 'Job Retention Scheme' on GOV.UK.

02 Mar 2021
- UK engine manufacturing output declines -29.3% in January with just 168,291 units built.
- Production for domestic and overseas markets falls -27.2% and -30.8% respectively.
- 13th consecutive month of decline as automotive sector looks towards March budget for support.
Mike Hawes, SMMT Chief Executive, said, “It has been an extremely challenging start to the year for UK engine manufacturers who have seen their output severely dented by the ongoing pandemic, a subdued market, and border friction following agreement of the UK/EU trade deal. While there is a roadmap out of lockdown, the sector still faces multiple headwinds and so the Chancellor’s Budget is an opportunity to enhance the industry’s competitiveness and ensure that the UK’s skilled engine building workforce is part of the future of the sector as it transforms to electrified powertrains.”
Courtesy www.smmt.co.uk

25 Feb 2021
SMMT News Release:
Mike Hawes, SMMT Chief Executive, said, “ The announcement today confirming E10 petrol will be available for motorists from this September is another step towards the 2050 net zero target. Its introduction is significant in that it assists with the decarbonisation of the existing UK car parc as well as those new cars powered by petrol engines.
“Vehicle manufacturers have been preparing for its introduction for many years so drivers can be reassured that it is compatible with most cars currently on the road. Together with the introduction of new electrified vehicles, the range of which is accelerating rapidly, this new fuel will help reduce the overall emissions of road transport for many years to come.”

24 Feb 2021
Updated Strategic Framework published.
Scotland’s phased and careful approach to easing lockdown restrictions while continuing to suppress Coronavirus (COVID-19) has been outlined by the First Minister.
The updated Strategic Framework sets out the six tools the Scottish Government will use to restore, on a phased basis, greater normality to our everyday lives.
The immediate priority will continue to be the phased return of education, building on the return of some pupils to school yesterday. On the basis that progress in suppressing the virus and vaccinating key groups remains on track restrictions would be eased in the following order:
- the next phase of school returns with the rest of the primary school years, P4 to P7, and more senior phase secondary pupils back in the classroom for part of their learning and the limit on outdoor mixing between households increasing to four people from a maximum of two households
- the stay at home restriction to be lifted and any final school returns to take place. Communal worship to restart in limited numbers mindful of the timing of major religious festivals. This phase would also see the re-opening of retail, starting with an extension of the definition of essential retail and the removal of restrictions on click-and collect
- return to a levels approach with all of Scotland moving to at least level 3, with some possible adjustments. This could mean that from the last week of April that we would expect to see phased but significant re-opening of the economy, including non-essential retail, hospitality and services like gyms and hairdressers
The First Minister said, while lockdown measures have had a positive impact, suppression of the virus is still heavily reliant on restrictions due to high transmissibility and case numbers. However, it is hoped that vaccination will become the main tool for suppressing the virus once the vast majority of the adult population has received at least one dose.
The Framework sets out:
- a progressive easing of the current level 4 restrictions that apply across most of Scotland at intervals of at least 3 weeks - along with changes nationally on education and care home visiting - with the immediate priority being the continued return of schools. The first easing started yesterday with the partial return of schools.
- A move – subject to the data allowing it - fully back to a levels system from the last week in April, when it would be expected to see phased but significant re-opening of the economy, including non-essential retail, hospitality and services like gyms and hairdressers. More detail will be set out in mid-March on the indicators that will guide decisions on levels, as well as on any revision to the content of each level - taking account of experience and sectoral views - and the order in which we expect those parts of the economy that have been restricted to start reopening.
- Ongoing financial support, which is set out in the Framework, continuing to be available to businesses. This includes the ongoing commitment to fund the Strategic Framework Business Fund and to provide Level 4 payments for an additional month once businesses are moved down a level. These proposals are contingent on receipt of additional consequentials from the UK Government.

23 Feb 2021
HMRC is providing you with more information on the financial support schemes available to help you through the COVID-19 pandemic, including updates on deferring VAT and claiming for furloughed staff through the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS)
VAT deferral new payment scheme – join from 23 February
If you deferred paying VAT due in the period from 20 March to 30 June 2020, you should pay it by 31 March 2021 if you can.
If you can’t afford to pay by 31 March 2021, you can join the VAT deferral new payment scheme and pay your deferred VAT over a longer period.
The online service will open on 23 February 2021 and close on 21 June 2021. You can make up to 11 monthly instalments, interest free. The earlier you join, the more months you can spread your payments across.
You can join the scheme online without the need to call – search 'Pay deferred VAT' on GOV.UK for more information and to join quickly and simply online when the scheme opens.
If you need more time, go to GOV.UK and search 'if you cannot pay your tax bill on time'.
January CJRS claims
Thank you if you submitted your January claim by the deadline of 15 February.
If you didn’t, we may still accept it if you have a reasonable excuse for not claiming by the deadline, such as you were self-isolating (and no-one else could make the claim for you) or had an unexpected stay in hospital that prevented you from completing it.
If your reason means you can apply to claim late, please do so as soon as you’re able to. For more information on reasonable excuses, go to GOV.UK and search 'claim for wages'.
You can now make February CJRS claims
You can now submit your claims for periods in February. These must be made by Monday 15 March.
You can claim before, during or after you process your payroll. If you can, it’s best to make a claim once you’re sure of the exact number of hours your employees will work so you don’t have to amend your claim later.
Check if you and your employees are eligible and work out how much you can claim using our CJRS calculator and examples, by searching 'Job Retention Scheme' on GOV.UK.
What you need to do now
- If you haven’t submitted your claim for January but believe that you have a reasonable excuse for missing the deadline, check if you can make a late claim by searching 'claim for wages' on GOV.UK.
- Submit any claims for February no later than Monday 15 March.
- Keep records that support the amount of CJRS grants you claim, in case HMRC needs to check them.

23 Feb 2021
- SMMT signs Armed Forces Covenant, reaffirming importance of recruitment and retention of veterans and service leavers for automotive industry.
- 55 SMMT member companies already working with armed forces community, with engagement up as companies look to secure talent.
- Automotive sector and veterans rally during Covid crisis, deploying vehicle fleets and transporting PPE to hospitals and vulnerable communities.
SMMT press release: Tuesday 23 February, 2021 The Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT) has signed a ground-breaking Armed Forces Covenant, pledging its commitment to advocate for recruitment and retention of ex-military personnel across the automotive industry. The pledge commits SMMT to promoting best practice, fostering a culture and ethos of inclusivity, and making the commercial case for automotive companies to also sign up to the Covenant. The signing reaffirms the work done through Mission Automotive, an initiative dedicated to placing ex-servicemen and women in jobs across the sector, set up in partnership with the Royal Foundation of the Duke and Duchess of Cambridge, the forces’ charity Mission Motorsport, and supported by the Ministry of Defence.
Making the process as easy as possible, SMMT has helped members create tailored engagement programs, guiding and aligning their interactions with the Armed Forces community across brand, corporate and HR areas to support their own business strategies. Some 55 SMMT member companies already work with the armed forces community, employing veterans, service leavers and their spouses across all parts of the automotive supply chain, from cars to commercial vehicles, across design, manufacturing, repair and through to retail and logistics.
As the UK looks to secure battery gigafactory investment ahead of the 2030 phase-out of sale for new conventional petrol and diesel engine cars and vans, the automotive industry hopes to help fill the skills gap with service leavers, offering opportunities for development and mapped-out career paths which translate military skills into qualifications required by the sector. Many service personnel are uniquely suited to this industry, with experience of high voltage equipment and other technologies. Veterans, therefore, are potentially some of the best candidates for roles working in electric and hydrogen vehicle manufacturing and engineering.
The past year tested the auto industry’s resilience as the country battled coronavirus, with the sector keeping essential services and key workers moving, supporting the vulnerable and even manufacturing ventilators. Many automotive companies worked with veteran volunteers to redeploy vehicle fleets across the country to transport medical supplies and PPE.
www.smmt.co.uk

16 Feb 2021
Mike Hawes, SMMT Chief Executive, said, “We urgently need more charging points to accelerate our transition to electric motoring, so this announcement is welcome and a step in the right direction. As we race towards the phase out of sales of new petrol and diesel cars and vans by 2030, we need to accelerate the expansion of the electric vehicle charging network. An electric vehicle revolution will need the home and workplace installations this announcement will encourage, but also a massive increase in on-street public charging and rapid charge points on our strategic road network. This will give drivers the confidence that recharging will become as easy as refuelling.”

16 Feb 2021
Important technical update from DVSA:
Due to a technical issue with OCRS Customer Reports they will be unavailable while we work to fix the problem. We expect this to be around 8 weeks.
You can still access the following TOP services:
- vehicle test history
- encounter report
- top up your Pre-Funded Account (PFA)
- book an annual test at a Goods Vehicle Test Station (GVTS)
Our enforcement work will continue whilst OCRS is unavailable. Enforcement staff will continue to use additional targeting information, such as encounter history.
We are sorry for any inconvenience and will inform you when the service is back up and running.

09 Feb 2021
- Used car transactions fall -14.9% in 2020 with 6,752,959 units changing hands as coronavirus lockdowns curb activity.
- Weak end to year with Q4 transactions down -6.2% to round off a turbulent 2020 for the UK used car market.
- Alternatively fuelled vehicle used transactions rise 5.2% to 144,225 taking 2.1% market share.
- News comes as industry calls for reopening of automotive retail as soon as possible to help protect jobs and economy.
Tuesday 9 February, 2021 The UK’s used car market declined in 2020, down -14.9% according to the latest figures released today by the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT). 6,752,959 used car transactions took place, 1,182,146 fewer than in 2019, making 2020 the lowest performing year since 2012 as lockdown measures to tackle the coronavirus pandemic and turbulent consumer and business confidence dented sales.1
Despite used car transactions increasing 3.7% in October, a fourth consecutive month of growth, the combination of new lockdowns and tougher restrictions across the UK later in the year saw activity tail off, with declines of -18.3% and -4.2% in November and December respectively. Combined Q4 transactions fell by -6.2% to 1,693,138, rounding off a tough year for the sector.
Alternatively fuelled vehicles (AFVs) bucked the trend, however, with 144,225 of these models sold during the year, an increase of 5.2%, with their market share rising to 2.1%. Battery electric vehicles (BEVs) saw their transactions increase by 29.7% to 19,184 units, but still only a fraction of all activity at 0.3%. The market for hybrids (HEVs) also rose, by 4.7%, while demand for plug-in hybrids (PHEVs) fell by -5.0%. Used diesel and petrol car transactions also fell, by -15.5% and -15.2% respectively, yet combined were still equivalent to some 6.6 million units finding new owners.
Last year all used car segments experienced declines, however superminis remained the most popular choice with 2.2 million units purchased, accounting for 32.0% of all transactions. Lower medium cars were the next most traded segment, with 1.8 million sales to take 27.0% market share. Luxury Saloon (-5.8%), dual purpose (-7.2%) and specialist sports (-8.4%) saw more modest declines with a combined 1,084,504 transactions.
Courtesy SMMT

08 Feb 2021
From HMRC:
January claims – submit now
Thank you if you have submitted your January furlough claims already. If you haven’t submitted your claims for January, you must do so by the deadline of Monday 15 February.
As a reminder, the UK Government will pay 80% of employees’ usual wages for the hours not worked, up to a cap of £2,500 per month. You and your employees do not need to have benefitted from the scheme before to make a claim, if you and your employees meet the eligibility criteria.
What you need to do now
- Check if you’re eligible and work out how much you can claim using our CJRS calculator and examples, by searching 'Job Retention Scheme' on GOV.UK.
- Submit any claims for January no later than Monday 15 February.
- Keep records that support the amount of CJRS grant you claim, in case HMRC needs to check them.

08 Feb 2021
BMW UK has named its highest performing dealers over the past 12 months with Douglas Park Hamilton taking the top gong.
For 2020, the annual Retailer of the Year Awards were held virtually for the first time and ‘celebrated the leadership, aptitude and adaptability of the BMW retail network, who brilliantly served new and returning customers throughout 2020’, BMW UK said.
‘Retailer of the Year 2020’ went to Douglas Park Hamilton after it impressed across a range of categories including aftersales, marketing and financial services.
Graeme Grieve, BMW Group UK CEO, said: ‘It’s important that we recognise the incredible efforts of our retail teams after such a challenging year.
‘We launched a host of new and enticing models – including the BMW 4 Series Coupe – and our retailers rose to the challenge. Our dedicated teams ensured BMW customers received an outstanding experience, whether their interaction was face-to-face in the showroom, or virtual during lockdown periods.
‘I’m always proud of our retailers but over the past year they’ve demonstrated how important they are to the automotive industry and our customers.’
David McBennett, head of business, Douglas Park Hamilton, said: ‘Everyone at Douglas Park BMW is delighted with the recognition of our achievements, winning not only four category awards but also the ultimate accolade of BMW Retailer of the Year for the second time.
Read the full article here at Car Dealer Magazine

04 Feb 2021
Scotland sees a 29.95% drop in January 2021 compared to January 2020, click here to view the data.
(The data in this link should be accredited to SMMT)

03 Feb 2021
The Institute of the Motor Industry (IMI) chief executive Steve Nash and newly-appointed president Jim Saker have said that the “fuel of skills” among car technicians is needed to power Government’s 2030 electric vehicle (EV) ambitions.
In an open letter responding to last November's announcement by Prime Minister Boris Johnson that the sale of non-electrified diesel or petrol powered cars would be banned in 2030 – with a ban on hybrids due to be introduced in 2035 – the two IMI leaders aired their concerns about a lack of necessary skills in the sector.
“Compressing the transition timescale means we must now accelerate the detailed implementation,” they said, adding that “serious injury or death is a very real prospect” without the rapid roll-out of the correct training for automotive technicians.
The letter said: “Yes, we have Electricity at Work regulations, but right now only 5% of the technicians working in garages and dealerships are appropriately qualified to work on these vehicles. This is the real context to the government’s Green Plan.
“Unless we start to discuss these issues, that plan will be compromised and – much more importantly – the UK won’t meet its net zero targets and we’ll imperil our next generation’s future.”
The IMI’s latter said that it was “inspiring” to see how quickly automotive manufacturers were adapting their model ranges to transition towards hybrid and EV, acknowledging that consumers had begun to respond enthusiastically.
But the IMI added: “Anyone who wants to make a green choice, whether it’s full EV or hybrid, needs to know that they can access technicians able to work safely on these vehicles.
“Right now, though, the chances of finding qualified technicians are reducing.
“Today 5% of the UK automotive workforce – between 13,000 and 20,000 technicians – are working on around 380,000 plug-in cars and vans.
“Ramp-up the numbers based on the government’s Green Plan and the capacity is simply not there to support the transition the government wants.”
According to IMI data, some 6,500 certificates for working on EVs were issued last year with the minimum required qualified technicians potentially reached by 2030 had that rate had continued.
However, in Q2 2020 certification numbers were down 85% compared to the same period in 2019, it said.
The letter, penned by Nash and regular AM contributor Saker, said: “What’s the answer? As a country, we urgently need a concerted, ongoing workforce development strategy.
“The automotive workforce is already behind in the skills required for these emerging technologies – through no fault of its own.
“Embattled employers need support and incentives to get more of their technicians trained, and to re-ignite recruitment and apprenticeship plans.
“Electric is the right choice – for the environment, for jobs, for our children’s futures. But like all revolutions, this one requires fuel. The fuel of skills. We have a generation that’s wondering just where their future might lie.”
In concluding their letter Nash and Saker issued an appeal from the IMI. They want the following actions to be taken by the automotive aftersales sector:
- Let’s make it possible for anyone excited by the electric revolution to acquire the skills they need to become part of it.
- Let’s enable employers to enter 2021 with the confidence to train and retrain existing employees.
- Let’s give employers the tools – and, yes, the funding – to develop fresh, hungry talent through exciting apprenticeship opportunities.

03 Feb 2021
Measures to encourage car buyers to opt for electric models ahead of the Government’s planned 2030 ban on the sale of new petrol and diesel cars are expected to be introduced ahead of the cut-off date.
Dealers should expect restricted supply of ICE models in the lead up to 2030, with Government intervention likely to include punitive taxation on higher-emitting models.
Speaking at the Westminster Energy, Environment & Transport Forum policy conference for low emission vehicles in December, Katie Black, joint head of the Office for Low Emission Vehicles (OLEV) at the Department for Transport (DfT), indicated that the Government wants to avoid a situation where car makers are “selling the maximum amount of petrol and diesel cars right up to the 2030 milestone”.
She said: “We do see it as a risk, and we will be looking publicly at ways to mitigate that. What you probably want is a gradual phase out, a gradual shift across the fleet. And we’re looking at how a regulatory regime could support that.”
The finer details of the Governments 2030 strategy is expected to be published in the spring.
Read the full story at AM online

03 Feb 2021
Brussels, 03/02/2021
CECRA welcomes the Portuguese national trade association, ARAN as an active member and FinMobility as a goodwill member.
ARAN’s new President, Rodrigo Ferreira da Silva, said “our board agreed to apply for a membership within CECRA and as President I welcome this decision as it is very significant, with an ever more challenging future for our sector, only together we grow stronger”.
CEO, Head of Brussels Office of FinMobility, Pasi Moisio said “we are willing and committed to join and strengthen the cooperation between CECRA and FinMobility. FinMobility has several pillars of mobility advocacy (passenger and freight transport, logistics, taxi sector, automotive, infrastructure, driving schools). I am sure that CECRA will also benefit from this teamwork”.
ARAN’s mission is to promote, defend and support the interests of the activities within the automotive sector. It fosters the spirit of solidarity and mutual support among its members, as well as their development. ARAN develops skills and promote activities that boost the interests and the professional development of its members.
FinMobility is a leading voice in the EU for the Finnish employers’ and business organisations in the mobility sector. FinMobility represents 13.500 companies employing 100.000 people. FinMobility cooperates widely and transparently with the EU-institutions, Brussels-based representatives of transport and mobility sectors, business organisations and authorities of the EU member states. We also participate in the activities of our members’ umbrella organisations in the EU.

02 Feb 2021
Mini UK has revealed the winners of its 2020 Retailer Awards in a virtual ceremony.
The brand’s retailer awards recognise talent across its 131-strong UK dealer network, with the 2020 running marking ‘exceptional retailer dedication and talent after a rollercoaster year of exciting new products and defying market challenges like no other’.
‘Retailer of the Year’ 2020 was awarded to Grassicks Mini, Perth, for the second time, after first lifting the trophy for their performance in 2017.
Mini said Grassicks were top performers across nine key areas, including new car sales, used car sales (for which they were also category winners), profitability and customer satisfaction.
Grassicks scoops Mini Retailer of the Year 2020 in brand's dealer awards ceremony – Car Dealer Magazine

02 Feb 2021
To support the 2030 ban on pure petrol and diesel vehicles EV charging points need to be rolled out five times quicker, according to one think tank.
A report published by Policy Exchange has said the UK will need 400,000 EV charging points by the 2030 cut-off date – some five times more than the 35,000 points already installed.
To reach this total, the annual rate at which new chargepoints are being installed must increase from around 7,000 over the past three years to 35,000 over the next decade.
It also urged the government to avoid ‘charging blackspot’ in small towns and rural areas.
Researchers recommended that the government should issue contracts to private firms to install chargepoints in areas where they are sparse.
This would mark a switch from the existing policy of offering grants, and would be similar to offshore wind farm auctions.
Under the proposal, a price cap would be introduced for chargepoints that received government support, to avoid operators exploiting local monopolies.
The report called for local authorities to be given Department for Transport funding for dedicated teams tasked with boosting rollout in residential areas.
Read the full article at www.cardealermagazine.co.uk

28 Jan 2021
- UK engine manufacturing down -27.0% in 2020 to just over 1.8 million units.
- Production for domestic and overseas markets falls -23.4% and -29.1% respectively.
- December saw production fall -7.9% to round off bleak year for sector.
Mike Hawes, SMMT Chief Executive, said, “2020 was a tough year for UK engine manufacturers with the coronavirus pandemic chiefly responsible for the fall in output. That said, factories still turned out more than 1.8 million internal combustion engines, with the majority of these exported globally. This reinforces how important it is that, in the increasingly rapid transition to electrification, the UK’s skilled engine manufacturing workforce is not left behind, as they should be a critical component in positioning the country as a competitive place to produce ultra-low and zero emission vehicles.”
Courtesy www.smmt.co.uk

28 Jan 2021
- UK car manufacturing output falls -29.3% in 2020 to 920,928 units, the lowest total since 1984.
- Production for UK and overseas markets declines -30.4% and -29.1% but more than eight in 10 cars still head abroad.
- Latest independent outlook forecasts car output to reach one million units in 2021, but much depends on Covid recovery, market confidence and new cross-channel rules.
Thursday 28 January 2021: UK car production declined -29.3% in 2020, to 920,928 units, according to the latest figures issued today by the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT). December, output was down -2.3% to 71,403, with some firms affected by border closures and thus component supply issues. This rounded off a dreadful year, the worst since 1984 for UK car makers, with the pandemic chiefly responsible for the decline.1 Manufacturing operations were severely disrupted throughout 2020, with lockdowns and social distancing measures restricting factory output, Brexit uncertainty continuing until Christmas Eve and depressed market demand in key export destinations.
Production for overseas buyers fell -29.1% in the year, to 749,038 units, while output for the UK also fell in double-digits, down -30.4% to 171,890. Even amid the global pandemic, exports continued to drive UK car manufacturing, however, with more than eight in 10 of all cars made shipped overseas. Reinforcing the importance of avoiding ‘no deal’ tariffs with Europe, the EU remained the UK’s biggest export destination, taking a 53.5% share, despite volumes falling -30.8% to 400,460 units.
Elsewhere, trade with most of the UK’s other key export partners declined in line with the tough market conditions resulting from the pandemic. Shipments to the US, Japan and Australia all fell, down -33.7%, -21.6% and -21.8% respectively. Exports to China, however, ended the year up 2.3%, and those to South Korea and Taiwan also rose 3.6% and 16.7% respectively as these nations travelled on different trajectories in dealing with Covid.
Despite the gloom, the UK continued to rollout battery electric (BEV), plug-hybrid (PHEV) and hybrid vehicles (HEV) to buyers at home and around the world. Combined production of these models rose to 18.8% of all cars made in Britain, up from 14.8% a year before, with BEVs increasing to a 4.5% share, up from 3.4%. All told, the UK turned out 172,857 alternatively fuelled vehicles, with 79.6% of these exported, evidence of the country’s existing capability in building the vehicles essential to a Net-Zero future.
Mike Hawes, SMMT Chief Executive, said, “These figures, the worst in a generation, reflect the devastating impact of the pandemic on UK automotive production, with Covid lockdowns depressing demand, shuttering plants and threatening lives and livelihoods. The industry faces 2021 with more optimism, however, with a vaccine being rolled out and clarity on how we trade with Europe, which remains by far our biggest market.
“The immediate challenge is to adapt to the new conditions, to overcome the additional customs burdens and regain our global competitiveness while delivering zero emission transport. We will continue to work with Government to attract investment in battery production and supply chain transformation as we transition to smart and sustainable mobility, supporting jobs and driving economic growth nationwide.”
To read the full article click here
Courtesy www.smmt.co.uk

20 Jan 2021
In December 2020, DVSA told you about a new secure way to log into the MOT testing system (MTS) via your smartphone.
If you don’t have a smartphone, you can still log in by email or with your existing security card.
Chris Price, Head of MOT policy, takes a closer look.
From mid-February 2021, you will be able to log into MTS using an authentication app on your smartphone.
Once the app is set up, you only need to authenticate once a day, which will make it easier to access MTS.
The system will remember certain details when the authentication takes place. If any of these change, the system prompts you to authenticate again, much like a bank does.
So, if you change site location, such as visiting another garage, the system will prompt you to authenticate again.
As we rollout the app, we will stop issuing replacement and new security cards. So, from mid-February if you lose or damage your security card it won’t be replaced. From then, you will be able to login to MTS via email or by using the authentication app.
Once you’ve set up the app you will no longer be able to use the security card.
Click here to read full article and how to use the app

20 Jan 2021
Please find below a link to a letter to business from Cabinet Secretary for Finance Kate Forbes.
As well as an overview of the current restrictions, the letter also highlights available business support and links to useful information and advice for businesses and employees.
Kate Forbes letter

19 Jan 2021
We have been contacted by one of our members with regards to a memo that is being distributed by Trading Standards which details the instruction they have from the Scottish Government and their interpretation of this relevant to test drives. Please see below including the relevant links.
“You will see that from 16thJanuary 2021, outdoor car lots are permitted to be open, but only for the collection of a vehicle that has been purchased, or the delivery or collection of a vehicle for the purposes of a repair, MOT or service. Vehicle test drives are NOT permitted. Further advice can be found in the undernoted guidance, under the section ‘The shopping experience’
You can, of course, continue to make deliveries to fulfil orders received online, by phone, text or post. You should be aware that car sales using such methods will be subject to the Consumer Contracts (Information, Cancellation and Additional Charges) Regulations 2013, which set out the information to be given to a buyer both before and after a contract is concluded. They also give the consumer the right to a “cooling off” period of 14 days, during which they may cancel the contract and return the vehicle for a full refund. Further information on these regulations can be found at the Business Companion website, links below.
https://www.businesscompanion.info/en/quick-guides/distance-sales/consumer-contracts-distance-sales
It is clear from the above that test drives are not permitted and may well be subject to checks by Trading Standards under the current lockdown rules, clearly as the “click and collect” rules are clear that consumers are able to visit a dealer to collect a previously purchased car, test drives would not be expected to be required."
The relevant act is located here.

19 Jan 2021
The EU passenger car market contracted by 23.7% to 9.9 million units as a direct result of the COVID-19 pandemic. 2020 saw the biggest yearly drop in car demand since records began, with new-car registrations falling by 3 million units compared to 2019. All 27 EU markets recorded double-digit declines throughout 2020.
Among the region’s biggest car markets, Spain posted the sharpest drop (-32.3%), followed closely by Italy (-27.9%) and France (-25.5%), while full-year losses were significant but less pronounced in Germany (-19.1%).
This drop in sales has a huge impact on the entire automotive value chain and in particular on automotive dealers and repairers represented by CECRA.
CECRA’s European Car Dealers Chairman Peter Daeninck said “These figures are to be taken into account during manufacturers’ sales target negotiations with their authorised network”.
ACEA’s full report on new passenger car registrations – December & full year 2020.

18 Jan 2021
In the last ten months, both the UK and Scottish Governments have made multiple announcements on the financial and other support available for people, businesses and charities affected by COVID-19.
This document aims to pull together all that information in a single place. Click here to access the document
In addition, you should follow the latest medical advice at www.nhsinform.scot/coronavirus.

14 Jan 2021
The SMTA is delighted to have received written confirmation from the Scottish Government regarding 'Click and Collect' and that it will be allowed to continue in Scotland from Saturday 16th January.
Please see the official statement below:
"Under the current Regulations, outdoor car lots are listed amongst those businesses that are able to remain open in level 4, albeit with the underlying legislative requirement that stay at home regulations mean that people should only leave their homes for an essential purpose. As continues to be the case, people should not be browsing in car lots for vehicles that do not meet that requirement. As the First Minister announced yesterday, the Regulations are being amended and will come into force on Saturday 16 January. From Saturday, outdoor vehicle lots will only be able to open in order to allow collection of a purchased vehicle or for delivery or collection of a vehicle for repair, service or MOT.
We will update the Scottish Government's retail guidance to reflect these changes and to provide additional FAQs to help with understanding and implementation."

12 Jan 2021
The DigitalBoost Development Grant Fund is now open (as of Tuesday 12th January 2021) to Scottish businesses. This £10m fund is being processed on a first come, first served basis.
If you are running a business in Scotland and want to do more with digital; for example to, increase productivity, safeguard jobs, improve cyber security, build online booking systems, develop apps or invest in hardware/software then this fund may be applicable to you.
Get the support your business needs to do more online.
- Funded by The Scottish Government
- The Grant will contribute 75% and clients will contribute 25% of total project costs
- Grants of up to £25K for VAT registered businesses, or £5K for non-VAT registered
- Quick and easy application process
- Funds paid directly into your bank account retrospectively

12 Jan 2021
The Scottish Government have amended their rules slightly and now advise that:
Outdoor markets and outdoor car lots – Sales of cars should be concluded electronically or outside with physical distancing and face covering mitigations in place. Test drives should only take place with the driver in the vehicle, accompanied test drives should cease for the time being.
In line with this guidance, completing paperwork for the purchase of a vehicle would not appear to be permitted to be carried out inside the premises, whether that's a showroom or a portacabin.
Distance Selling - You may need to consider the information you provide to your customers, there is a useful website called Business Companion which provides guidance on a number of different areas, including Distance Sales and covers certain information requirements.

11 Jan 2021
Scottish motoring retailers and garages have vowed to keep motorists on the road in a Covid-safe way despite the latest lockdown restrictions as they are viewed as "essential". Here, industry leaders and a number of major outlets explain how they can still help.
MOTORISTS can still rely on Scotland’s dealers and garages to buy a car or maintain their pride and joy despite the new coronavirus lockdown.
That’s the message coming loud and clear from industry chiefs and leading retailers across the country, who have vowed to operate in a Covid-secure manner at all times.
Scottish Motor Trade Association chief executive Sandy Burgess stressed it was very much “business as usual” – although in line with the latest advice issued from Holyrood.
Mr Burgess explained that this allowed would-be buyers to visit dealer forecourts to check out vehicles. Traders can also continue to run online “click and collect” or “click and deliver” services for new and used car sales.
This kind of service was established or enhanced by motoring outfits as the pandemic developed in the spring of 2020.
Mr Burgess said: “To date, this has been very successful – with many thousands of customers concluding business online and the feedback from those who have done so is very positive indeed.”
Read the full article here at the Daily Record

07 Jan 2021
Update from HMRC:
You must submit any December claims no later than Thursday 14 January.
You can claim before, during or after you process your payroll. If you can, it’s best to make a claim once you’re sure of the exact number of hours your employees worked so you don’t have to amend your claim at a later date.
As a reminder, the UK Government will pay 80% of employees’ usual wages for the hours not worked, up to a cap of £2,500 per month, until the end of April 2021.
What you need to do now
- Check if you’re eligible and work out how much you can claim using our CJRS calculator and examples, by searching 'Job Retention Scheme' on GOV.UK.
- Submit any claims for December no later than Thursday 14 January.
- Keep records that support the amount of CJRS grant you claim, in case HMRC needs to check them.
If you have already submitted your claims for December but find you need to make a change because you didn’t claim enough, you can do this until Thursday 28 January.
To find out how to amend your claim, search 'Get help with the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme' on GOV.UK.
Frequently asked questions about CJRS
You can find everything you need to know about CJRS on GOV.UK by searching 'Job Retention Scheme', but here are some answers to the most frequently asked questions.
Can I claim CJRS now if I haven’t previously?
You and your employees do not need to have benefited from the scheme before to make a claim. You can check if you’re eligible and work out how much you can claim using our CJRS calculator and examples, by searching 'Job Retention Scheme' on GOV.UK.
If you’re claiming for the first time, you’ll need:
- a Government Gateway (GG) ID and password – if you don’t already have a GG account, you can apply for one on GOV.UK by searching for 'HMRC services: sign in or register'
- to be enrolled for PAYE online
- the following information for each furloughed employee you’ll be claiming for:
- name
- National Insurance number
- claim period and amount
- PAYE/employee number.
There’s a list of monthly claims deadlines and a helpful step-by-step guide on GOV.UK, summarising the latest information on CJRS and the steps you need to take to make a claim – you can find these by searching 'Job Retention Scheme step by step guide'.
Can I furlough an employee if they are unable to work due to caring responsibilities?
If an employee asks to be furloughed because they have caring responsibilities resulting from coronavirus, such as caring for children who are at home as a result of school or childcare facilities closing, you can place them on furlough and claim for them under the CJRS.
Can I claim a CJRS grant to pay for holiday leave?
If you have furloughed employees because of the effect of coronavirus on your business, you can claim under the CJRS for periods of paid leave they take while on furlough, including for bank holidays such as Christmas Day or Boxing Day. You should not place employees on furlough just because they are going to be on leave.
If your employee is flexibly furloughed, you can count any time taken as holiday as furloughed hours rather than working hours. This means you can claim 80% of their usual wages for these hours.
If a furloughed employee takes holiday, you should top up their pay to their normal rate in line with the Working Time Regulations. For more information search 'check if you can claim for your employees' wages' on GOV.UK.
Can I include a Christmas bonus in my calculation for the grant?
You can claim for regular payments that you are contractually obliged to pay your employees, including compulsory commission, fees and overtime. However, you cannot claim for discretionary commission, non-contractual bonuses (including tips) and non-cash payments. For more information search 'steps to take before calculating your claim' on GOV.UK.
Where can I get further support?
Thousands of people have joined and benefited from our live webinars which offer more support on changes to CJRS, and how they affect you. To book online, or to view updated guidance, go to GOV.UK and search 'help and support if your business is affected by coronavirus'. If you’re booked on a webinar but no longer able to attend, please cancel your place where possible to allow space for others to register.
Our phone lines and webchat remain very busy, so the quickest way to find the support you need is on GOV.UK. This will leave our phone lines and webchat service open for those who need them most.

05 Jan 2021
- Chancellor announces one-off top up grants for retail, hospitality and leisure businesses worth up to £9,000 per property to help businesses through to the Spring
- £594 million discretionary fund also made available to support other impacted businesses
- comes in addition to £1.1 billion further discretionary grant funding for Local Authorities, Local Restriction Support Grants worth up to £3,000 a month and extension of furlough scheme
This follows the Prime Minister’s announcement last night that these business will be closed until at least February half-term in order to help control the virus, and, together with the wide range of existing support, provides them with certainty through the Spring period.
The cash is provided on a per-property basis to support businesses through the latest restrictions, and is expected to benefit over 600,000 business properties, worth £4 billion in total across all nations of the UK.
Chancellor Rishi Sunak said:
The new strain of the virus presents us all with a huge challenge - and whilst the vaccine is being rolled out, we have needed to tighten restrictions further.
Throughout the pandemic we’ve taken swift action to protect lives and livelihoods and today we’re announcing a further cash injection to support businesses and jobs until the Spring.
This will help businesses to get through the months ahead – and crucially it will help sustain jobs, so workers can be ready to return when they are able to reopen.
A further £594 million is also being made available for Local Authorities and the Devolved Administrations to support other businesses not eligible for the grants, that might be affected by the restrictions. Businesses should apply to their Local Authorities.
The new one-off grants come in addition to billions of existing business support, including grants worth up to £3,000 for closed businesses, and up to £2,100 per month for impacted businesses once they reopen.
The government has also provided 100% business rates relief for retail, hospitality and leisure businesses, £1.1 billion existing discretionary funding for Local Authorities, the furlough scheme now extended to April and 100% government backed loans, extended until March.
Further information
- the one-off top-ups will be granted to closed businesses as follows:
- £4,000 for businesses with a rateable value of £15,000 or under
- £6,000 for businesses with a rateable value between £15,000 and £51,000
- £9,000 for businesses with a rateable value of over £51,000
- business support is a devolved policy and therefore the responsibility of the devolved administrations, which will receive additional funding as a result of these announcements in the usual manner:
- the Scottish Government will receive £375 million
- the Welsh Government will receive £227 million
- the Northern Ireland Executive will receive £127 million
- this will contribute to the funding which has already been guaranteed by the UK Government, to continue to provide the devolved administrations the certainty they need to plan for their COVID-19 response in the months ahead
- small businesses in the devolved administrations should also be able to benefit from other UK-wide measures in the government’s unprecedented package of support for business, including the various business lending schemes (where the repayment terms were made easier as part of the Winter Economy Plan), and the extension of the Self Employment Income Support Scheme

05 Jan 2021
Guidance on new stay at home regulations coming into effect on 5 January 2021.
Coronavirus (COVID-19): stay at home guidance - gov.scot (www.gov.scot)

23 Dec 2020
Dear MOT stakeholder,
Further to our communications regards England & Wales restrictions, I write today to provide assurance on the new Scotland Protection Level 4 restrictions.
The Scottish Government announced on 19 December that mainland Scotland will be moving into level 4 restrictions from 00:01 on 26 December.
Further to discussion and approval with Transport Scotland, we can confirm MOT garages can remain open across all protection levels 0-4 in Scotland.
DVSA

21 Dec 2020
Dear Member
I have reviewed the most recent announcement made on Saturday night the 19th of December by the First Minister, the Scottish Government having placed the Scottish mainland into level four restrictions as of the 26th of December and the impacts that this will have on our industry. In the absence of any substantive commentary from the Scottish Government at the time of writing, I have taken the decision to provide my best judgement on the application of the regulations based on our most recent correspondence received from the Scottish Government on the 11th of December. Therefore, until I am advised differently, I would advocate following the guidelines below:
Car Showrooms - should not be used for the retailing of vehicles, you are permitted to operate a “click and collect” service (or provide a delivery service) and you are permitted to operate an outside car sales area and to use the office or showroom space for the completion of documentation etc. You are not permitted to use any part of the sales area within the showroom other than for the purposes previously advised. It would be best to consider leaving showrooms unlit and with suitable signs in place to discourage any consumer entering the building from accessing display cars etc. You may operate your aftersales functions within the showroom such as service reception or parts counters.
In all cases the maximum attention must be made to the safety and wellbeing of your customers and staff and all the usual precautions and COVID safety measures such as physical distancing, hand sanitation and face coverings or physical barriers must be maintained.
Workshops, MOT, Parts departments, valeting and Bodyshop’s - as with the current regulations these are all seen as essential businesses categories and therefore are able to remain open with all the relevant safety precautions and restrictions undertaken at all times. To reiterate in all cases the maximum attention must be made to the safety and wellbeing of your customers and staff and all the usual precautions and COVID safety measures such as physical distancing, hand sanitation and face coverings or physical barriers must be maintained.
We will maintain a watching brief on this evolving situation and any further updates will be posted via our website as and when we become aware of the situation that is developing all the time.
Sandy Burgess FIMI
Chief Executive

15 Dec 2020
Update from DVSA:
Annual training and assessment for MOT testers is an important part of improving road and vehicle safety.
We know that over the last few months garages and testers have been busy.
When we spoke to some of you in September, the majority of sites said their business had been impacted by COVID-19.
Extending the deadline
We recognise the challenges you’ve faced this year, so we’re extending the deadline for the MOT annual assessment.
MOT testers will now need to complete their training and assessment by Friday 30 April 2021 to avoid being suspended from testing.
The training can be carried out individually or with a training provider and the result will be recorded automatically, via MTS.
Testers should do this in plenty of time before the deadline and not leave it until the last minute.
SMTA offer MOT training and assessment in conjunction with the IMI at favourable prices, please email info@smta.co.uk to book.

14 Dec 2020
The Brexit transition period ends in 17 days. If your business trades goods with Europe or you represent businesses who do, you’ll need to be prepared for changes that will come into effect from 1 January 2021.
We understand these are challenging times, but it is important to make sure that your business is ready for these new rules. At the time of writing, talks are ongoing about our future trading arrangements with Europe. These rules will not change or go away, and the steps that you need to take to prepare, are needed in any scenario before you can trade from 1 January.
If you’re new to customs processes it will help you to watch our series of short videos on HMRC’s YouTube channel which introduce importing and exporting:
- What you need to know to send goods out of the UK
- What you need to know to bring goods into the UK
- What are controlled goods?
We also have a Trader checklist to help you prepare for the end of the Brexit transition period.
In addition, we are running live webinars where you can hear the latest information and ask questions to help you prepare for these new rules:
Exporting: Actions you need to take to prepare for 1 January 2021
The webinar explains what actions you need to take to export goods from Great Britain to the EU and move goods between Great Britain and Northern Ireland. We’ll provide a run-through of the key export processes – staged border controls, zero-rated VAT, customs declaration, using an intermediary as well as licences, certificates and authorisations that you’ll need.
Please register to take part if you’re planning to export.
What are customs import declarations?
If you import goods, you’ll need to prepare for making customs import declarations on controlled goods from 1 January, and by the end of June on all goods. This webinar will help you to understand what they are in more detail. This includes what is needed for simplified declarations, supplementary declarations, making import declarations without authorisation and delayed import declarations.
Please register to take part if you’re planning to import.
We update our webinars constantly to provide you with the latest government guidance and information as it develops.

10 Dec 2020
HMRC Employer Bulletin (December 2020, Issue 87) includes a host of useful information including the extension to the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme, VAT deferral and VAT reverse charge measures for the construction industry, Virtual Christmas Parties and Brexit transition updates.
There’s also a timely reminder about how to report PAYE Real Time Information early due to Christmas.

09 Dec 2020
From 1 February 2021, it will become illegal to fit tyres aged over 10 years to:

08 Dec 2020
This new campaign looks to remind people of the five key behaviours that FACTS stand for, and how this should be part of our everyday lives to keep us all safe.
Download the FACTS poster for your garage here
The new FACTS campaign runs until the 20th December on TV, press, radio, outdoor and social channels. Please find attached the Stakeholder Toolkit, which includes details on all available assets including the new icons: Download all FACTS Campaign Assets here

08 Dec 2020
- they are going to be on paid leave
- you usually do less business over the festive period
Many businesses such as the motor trade experience dips in their sales over the festive/winter period but the usual drop in sales does not warrant employers to put their employees on furlough.
Courtesy www.lawgistics.co.uk

08 Dec 2020
UPDATE FROM HMRC:
Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS) claims for November, and actions you might need to take. You must submit any November claims, no later than 14 December.
CJRS: what you can claim and when
The UK Government will pay 80% of employees’ usual wages for the hours not worked, up to a cap of £2,500 per month. The terms of the scheme will be reviewed in January.
There are now monthly deadlines for claims. Claims must be submitted within 14 calendar days after the month they relate to, unless this falls on a weekend in which case the deadline is the next weekday. We'll continue to send you reminder emails before the deadline each month.
As we approach the Christmas period, I appreciate your payroll dates may differ this month. Don’t forget you can claim before, during or after you process your payroll as long as your claim is submitted by the deadline.
What you need to do now
- Check if you’re eligible, and work out how much you can claim using our CJRS calculator and examples, by searching 'Job Retention Scheme' on GOV.UK.
- Submit any claims for November, no later than 14 December.
- Keep any records that support the amount of CJRS grant you claim, in case HMRC needs to check them.
Frequently asked questions about CJRS
You can find everything you need to know about CJRS on GOV.UK by searching 'Job Retention Scheme', but here are some answers to the most frequently asked questions.
Can I claim CJRS now if I haven’t previously?
You and your employees do not need to have benefited from the scheme before to make a claim. If you’re applying for the first time, you’ll need:
- a Government Gateway (GG) ID and password – if you don’t already have a GG account, you can apply for one on GOV.UK by searching for 'HMRC services: sign in or register'
- to be enrolled for PAYE online
- the following information for each furloughed employee you’ll be claiming for:
- name
- National Insurance number
- claim period and amount
- PAYE/employee number.
If you have less than 100 furloughed staff, you’ll need to input this information directly into the system for each employee. If you have more than this, you’ll need to upload a file with this information. The easiest way to ensure your file is in the right format is to use our template – to find it, search ‘download a template if you're claiming for 100 or more employees’ on GOV.UK.
Where can I get further support?
Thousands of people have joined and benefited from our live webinars which now offer more support on changes to CJRS, and how they affect you. To book online, or to view updated guidance, go to GOV.UK and search 'help and support if your business is affected by coronavirus'.
There is also a helpful step-by-step guide on GOV.UK, summarising the latest information on CJRS and the steps you need to take to make a claim – you can find this by searching 'step by step guide'.
Our phone lines and webchat remain very busy, so the quickest way to find the support you need is on GOV.UK. This will leave our phone lines and webchat service open for those who need them most.
Can I use CJRS to pay for holiday leave?
Your employees can only be placed on furlough if you cannot maintain your workforce because your business has been affected by coronavirus, and not just because they are on paid leave. This also applies during any peak holiday periods in late December and early January. If your employee is flexibly furloughed, any time taken as holiday should be counted as furloughed hours rather than working hours.
If a furloughed employee takes holiday, you should pay them their normal rate of pay in line with the Working Time Regulations. For more information search 'Check if you can claim for your employees' wages' on GOV.UK.
What about notice periods?
For claim periods from 1 December, you cannot claim CJRS grants for any days that your employee is serving a contractual or statutory notice period, including notice of retirement or resignation.
Can I re-employ someone and furlough them?
If your employees were on your payroll on 23 September 2020 (notified to HMRC on an RTI submission on or before 23 September) and were made redundant or stopped working for you afterwards, they can qualify for the scheme if you re-employ them and then place them on furlough.
What if I’ve claimed too much in error?
If you have claimed too much CJRS grant and have not already repaid it, you must notify us and repay the money by the latest of whichever date applies below:
- 90 days from receiving the CJRS money you’re not entitled to
- 90 days from the point circumstances changed so that you were no longer entitled to keep the CJRS grant.
If you do not do this, you may have to pay interest and a penalty as well as repaying the excess CJRS grant. For more information on interest search 'Interest rates for late and early payments' on GOV.UK.
You can let us know as part of your next online claim without needing to call us. If you claimed too much but do not plan to submit further claims, you can let us know and make a repayment online through our card payment service or by bank transfer – search 'Pay Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme grants back' on GOV.UK.
What if I haven’t claimed enough?
If you made a mistake in your claim that means you received too little money, you’ll need to amend it within 28 calendar days after the month the claim relates to – unless this falls on a weekend or bank holiday, in which case the deadline is the next weekday. The deadline to amend claims for employees furloughed in November is Tuesday 29 December.
To find out how to amend your claim, search 'Get help with the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme' on GOV.UK.
What information on my claim will you publish?
From February, we will publish the names, an indication of the value of claims and Company Registration Numbers (for those who have one) of employers who make CJRS claims for periods from December onwards. The published value of your claim will be shown within a banded range – to find a list of these, search 'Check if you can claim for your employees' wages' on GOV.UK.
Details of CJRS claims will then be published monthly as part of HMRC’s commitment to transparency and to deter fraudulent claims.
Your employees will also be able to check if you have made a CJRS claim on their behalf through their online Personal Tax Account from February. To set up a Personal Tax Account go to GOV.UK and search 'Personal Tax Account: sign in or set up'.

07 Dec 2020
The Government has just announced the increased National Living Wage and National Minimum Wage rates which will come into force from April 2021.
Of particular note is that workers who are 23 or older will be entitled to receive the National Living Wage which will increase by 2.2% from £8.72 to £8.91 per hour as a minimum.
The National Minimum Wage bandings have been amended in light of the fact that those aged 23 or older are now to be entitled to the National Living Wage. The adjusted bandings (the top banding now being for those aged 21 or 22) will increase as follows:
- For those aged 21 or 22, from £8.20 to £8.36 per hour
- For those aged 18, 19 or 20, from £6.45 to £6.56 per hour
- For those aged 16 or 17, from £4.55 to £4.62 per hour
- For apprentices*, from £4.15 to £4.30 per hour
*Apprentices are entitled to receive the apprentice rate if they are either aged under 19 or aged 19 or over and in the first year of their apprenticeship.
More information regarding the increase in rates can be accessed here.
Courtesy www.justemploymentlaw.co.uk

01 Dec 2020
Creating opportunities for every young person in Scotland.
First Minister Nicola Sturgeon has announced two new incentives to increase apprenticeships and create opportunities for young people.
Recognising the challenging circumstances for employers as a result of coronavirus (COVID-19), and the impact on opportunities for young people, more businesses will be able to access financial support to help them take on young people through the new £15 million Apprenticeship Employer Grant.
Supporting the Scottish Government’s aim of maximising apprenticeship opportunities in the coming months, the grant will help increase the number of employers able to take on an apprentice or upskill an existing staff member.
The grant will provide:
- £5,000 for employers taking on or upskilling a 16 to 24-year old apprentice, and for those aged up to 29 years who are disabled, care leavers and Minority Ethnic
- £3,500 for employers taking on or upskilling an apprentice aged 25 plus
Young people will have the chance to train and get qualifications thanks to another new initiative, also launched today in response to the pandemic.
Part of the £60 million Young Person’s Guarantee, Pathway Apprenticeships will provide a new route into the workplace.
Created for school-leavers up to 18-years-old who might be facing fewer options due to the economic impact of COVID-19, around 1,200 opportunities will be available to young people in the first phase.
These new initiatives are in addition to support for apprentices who have been made redundant as a result of the pandemic through the Scottish Government’s £10 million Adopt an Apprentice scheme.
The First Minister said: “This pandemic has hit us hard – especially our young people who are facing fewer opportunities. We must help this generation who have been caught so cruelly in the eye of the COVID-19 storm.
“To do that we’ve established the £60 million Young Person’s Guarantee. It aims to give everyone aged 16-24 the opportunity of work, education or training. As part of that, our Pathway Apprenticeships programme will provide work-based training which will start by helping 1,200 young people gain key skills in sectors like construction, business, IT, engineering and early years education.
“We will also invest £15 million to help more employers take on an apprentice. Businesses want to give young people opportunities, but for many the impact of the pandemic will make the costs hard to meet. So we’ll pay employers up to £5,000 for every new modern apprentice they take on.
“These are the kind of measures we are taking, working alongside business and trade unions, as part of a national mission to create jobs as we recover from COVID-19. It is essential that young people, who will make up our future workforce, have the opportunity through apprenticeships to build their confidence, gain industry insight and develop valuable skills that employers require.”
Chair of Skills Development Scotland Frank Mitchell said: “Scottish Government’s support underlines the commitment to apprenticeships and their crucial role in economic recovery. “Additional funding for employers to recruit apprentices means sustaining vital opportunities for people to work, learn and earn, while ensuring businesses have the critical skills they need.
“Pathway Apprenticeships will support the future employment prospects of Scotland’s young people and offset the rising levels of youth unemployment caused by the economic impact of COVID-19.”
Background:
£10 million for apprentices was announced by Economy Secretary Fiona Hyslop in August. This included Adopt and Apprentice.
The £15 million Apprenticeship Employer Grant funding will be available for eligible employers where the apprenticeship start date was on or after 1st December 2020.
Funding will be available for starts until 25th March 2020 or until funding levels are exceeded, whichever comes first.
The application process for the Apprenticeship Employer Grant will open from the beginning of January.
Pathways Apprenticeships will offer 26 weeks of training with a £100 weekly allowance. This can be extended for participants who are disabled or care experienced.
In response to the impact the pandemic has had on all aspects of the economy, education and society, with young people being disproportionally affected, Skills Development Scotland has launched a national campaign encouraging employers to retain and recruit apprentices.
The campaign aims to demonstrate that apprenticeships are a proven way for employers to develop talent and gain real business benefits and can be part of the solution to provide employers with the skills they need to adapt, sustain and strengthen their business.

30 Nov 2020
Join Business Gateway for a Q&A on Scotland’s plans to rebuild a sustainable & wellbeing economy with enhanced digital capability.
Essential Info
9th December 2020
13:15 - 14:00
Aberdeenshire, Angus, Argyll & Bute, Ayrshire, Clackmannanshire, Dumfries & Galloway, Dundee, East Dunbartonshire, East Lothian, East Renfrewshire, Edinburgh, Falkirk, Fife, Glasgow, Highland, Inverclyde, Lanarkshire, Midlothian, Moray, National, Orkney, Perth & Kinross, Renfrewshire, Scottish Borders, Shetland, Stirling, West Dunbartonshire, West Lothian
Webinar
Digital Marketing, Business Development, Starting Up, COVID-19.
BOOK HERE

26 Nov 2020
- 197,374 UK engines built in October as output declines by -20.1%.
- Production for domestic and overseas markets falls -25.2% and -16.4% respectively.
- Year-to-date output remains down -30.1% as sector faces triple whammy of coronavirus, Brexit and 2030 end of sale date.
Mike Hawes, SMMT Chief Executive, said, “Another month of decline in UK engine production is extremely worrying. Manufacturers, who have already spent significant sums on responding to the pandemic and preparing for Brexit, must now contend with an end of sale date for internal combustion engines in under a decade. We must ensure that in the transition to electrification our skilled engine making workforce is not left behind. That’s why we need to see a new and comprehensive industrial strategy introduced in 2021, starting with the delivery of the Automotive Transformation Fund, to ensure the UK remains a competitive place to produce ultra-low and zero emission cars and powertrains.”
Courtesy SMMT, read the full article here

26 Nov 2020
- UK commercial vehicle production falls by -25.6% as 6,761 units leave factory gates in October.
- Production both for overseas and domestic markets in double digit decline as dual impact of Covid-19 and risk of ‘no deal’ Brexit bring down operator confidence.
- Shortfall of 11,256 commercial vehicles in first 10 months pulls year-to-date performance down -18.1%.
Thursday 26 November 2020 UK commercial vehicle (CV) production decreased by -25.6% in October, with 6,761 units manufactured, according to figures released today by the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT). Output for both overseas and domestic markets declined, by -21.1% and -30.4% respectively, as worries over recovery post-pandemic were compounded by the looming threat of a ‘no deal’ Brexit.
Factories turned out 2,326 fewer buses, coaches, vans, trucks and taxis than in the same month in 2019, as output for the domestic market fell for the first time since May, in spite of the wider CV and logistics sectors working double-time to keep the country moving throughout the pandemic. The number of units manufactured for export also decreased -21.1%, making up 54.5% of total production in the month.
Performance in the year to date remains down, falling by -18.1% overall, with a shortfall of 11,256 units in the first 10 months of the year. All told, just over 50,000 new commercial vehicles have been made in Britain this year.
Meanwhile October saw only 76 buses built in Britain, down -34.5%. The impact of social distancing continued to affect operator confidence, with bus production now down -52.9% in the year to date. This week's government pledge to deliver the first 800 new zero emission buses by the end of this financial year, as part of the Prime Minister’s commitment in early 2020 to fund 4,000 of these vehicles, should offer some relief for the struggling bus manufacturing sector.
Read the full article from SMMT here

25 Nov 2020
Update from HMRC:
The CJRS has been extended to 31 March 2021 for all parts of the UK. From 1 November, the UK Government will pay 80% of employees’ usual wages for the hours not worked, up to a cap of £2,500 per month. The government will review the terms of the scheme in January.
You and your employees do not need to have benefited from the scheme before to claim for periods from 1 November.
What you need to do now
- Submit any claims for periods up to 31 October on or before 30 November – they will not be accepted after this date. Claims are subject to eligibility and the rules in force at the time.
- Submit any claims for November, no later than 14 December. You can claim before, during or after you process your payroll as long as your claim is submitted by the deadline.
- Keep any records that support the amount of CJRS grant you claim, in case HMRC needs to check them. You can view, print or download copies of your previously submitted claims by logging onto your CJRS service on GOV.UK.
For claim periods from 1 December, you cannot claim CJRS grants for any days that your employee is serving a contractual or statutory notice period, including notice of retirement or resignation.
You can check if you’re eligible, and work out how much you can claim using our CJRS calculator and examples, by searching 'Job Retention Scheme' on GOV.UK.
Claims deadlines
There are now monthly deadlines for claims. Claims for periods starting on or after 1 November must be submitted within 14 calendar days after the month they relate to, unless this falls on a weekend in which case the deadline is the next weekday. Your deadline to make claims for employees furloughed in November is Monday 14 December.
Publishing employers’ information
HMRC will publish the names, an indication of the value of claims and Company Registration Numbers of employers who make CJRS claims for periods from December onwards. We'll write to you again with details of when this information will be published.
For claim periods from December, your employees will also be able to check if you have made a CJRS claim on their behalf through their online Personal Tax Account. To set up a Personal Tax Account go to GOV.UK and search 'Personal Tax Account: sign in or set up'.

24 Nov 2020
SMMT News Release:
- UK Automotive warns of Brexit tariff damage as new figures reveal ‘no deal’ would cut vehicle production by two million over next five years.
- WTO tariffs would strike £55.4bn blow to UK sector by 2025 with annual production falling below one million units consistently.
- Brexit deal must work for automotive to sustain competitiveness, help drive green recovery and jobs and keep the UK at forefront of global decarbonisation agenda.
- UK sector comes together at special online event as SMMT calls on government to keep car showrooms open, agree a Brexit deal and ‘build back together’ after coronavirus crisis
Tuesday 24 November, 2020 As Brexit talks enter the final stretch, the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT) today made a last call for negotiators on both sides to keep the health of automotive at the heart of discussions and stretch every sinew to get a deal in place by Christmas that avoids tariffs, or risk damaging one of Europe’s most valuable manufacturing industries.
The entire European sector, including the UK, has already lost €100 billion to the pandemic and has repeatedly called on EU and UK leaders to ensure the sector will not face further damage from the imposition of tariffs from 1 January 2021, which would deliver another €110 billion blow to manufacturers on both sides of the Channel.
For the UK industry alone, new figures reveal that production losses could cost as much as £55.4 billion over the next five years if the sector was forced to trade on WTO conditions long-term.2 Even with a so-called ‘bare-bones’ trade deal agreed, the cost to industry would be some £14.1 billion,2 reinforcing how, for the automotive sector, Brexit has always been an exercise in damage limitation. With scant time left for businesses to prepare for new trading terms, the sooner a deal is done and detail communicated, the less harmful it will be for the sector and its workers.
Addressing an audience of industry executives, politicians and global media at SMMT 2020 Update Live, an online event held on the day the 104th SMMT Annual Dinner would have taken place, SMMT President and Executive Chairman HORIBA MIRA Dr George Gillespie OBE, said, “We need a future trading relationship that works for automotive. We’ve already spent nigh on a billion pounds preparing for the unknown of Brexit and lost twenty-eight times that to Covid.3 Let us not also be left counting the cost of tariffs, especially not by accident.”
Dr Gillespie continued, “Industry can deliver the jobs growth we need and help rebuild a devasted economy, but government must work with us to create the environment for this success. That starts with a favourable Brexit deal and a bold strategy to help transform automotive production in the UK, attract new investment, upskill our workforce and build world-leading battery capability to future-proof our manufacturing. When Covid lifts, we need to be ready; ready to support government to engineer an economic – and green – recovery.”
As well as affecting livelihoods in all regions of the country, ‘no deal’ would have a severe impact on the sector’s ability to develop and manufacture the next generation of zero emission cars and vans, as well as holding back market uptake of these vehicles at a critical time with a new ICE end of sale date just nine years away.
SMMT Chief Executive, Mike Hawes, said, “The government’s plan for a green industrial revolution is an immense challenge – for automotive, the energy sector, consumers and for government itself. We are already on the way, transforming an industry built on the combustion engine to one built on electrification. But to complete the job in under a decade is no easy task. And with showrooms closed, choking factories of orders, the ability of the sector to invest further is severely constrained. Automotive is nothing if not determined, adaptable and resilient, yet, as the clock ticks ever closer to midnight on Brexit negotiations, the competitiveness and employment we need get back to growth – green growth – hangs in the balance.”
WTO tariffs would add an average £2,000 to the cost of British-built electric cars sold in the EU, making UK plants considerably less competitive and undermining Britain’s attractiveness as a destination for inward investment, at the precise moment when building domestic battery manufacturing capability via ‘gigafactories’ and an electrified supply chain is essential. Meanwhile, these tariffs would mean a £2,800 hike per EU-built vehicle for UK consumers, all but cancelling out the current £3,000 plug-in car grant.
UK Automotive is one of the country’s most valuable economic assets, supporting some 180,000 often high-skilled and high-paid manufacturing jobs in communities across every nation and region of the UK, including those regions hit hardest by the economic impact of the pandemic. The sector is worth some £78.9 billion, exporting more goods than any other UK industry and providing an annual £15.3 billion in added value every year to the UK economy, while investing £3.72 billion in R&D.
Courtesy www.smmt.co.uk

24 Nov 2020
The Scottish Government’s Covid Protection Levels campaign has been updated to reflect the new travel regulations for Levels 3 and 4 - these came into force on Friday 20th November at 6pm.
Download your Stakeholder Toolkit here .

19 Nov 2020
Cox Automotive International president Martin Forbes – the firm behind Manheim – says the company is still undecided about whether it will ever reopen auction halls.
The company has been operating purely online since the pandemic with 100 per cent of transactions taking place on its website.
Forbes says in an ‘ideal world’ they would never go back to physical auction halls, but he is conscious of making sure the company offers what customers want.
He added: ‘We see the benefits and efficiencies for our business of not having to run a car through a physical auction hall.
‘I personally think that if we have to go back to physical auction halls and not embrace some of this change, then we would let a good crisis go to waste.
‘What we have to do is keep getting better at running a digital proposition to make sure our customers, our buyers and our vendors are getting an even better experience through digital.
‘We’re still going through that and we will continue to work on that in 2021, 2022 and beyond.’
The Cox Automotive Market Insight Report for 2020 has been launched today. View it here.
Read the full article here at Car Dealer Magazine https://bit.ly/2IH1RdH

18 Nov 2020
Q: Which businesses can stay open in Level 4?
A: The businesses which must close at Level 4 are set out in law. Those that can remain open are:
· food retailers, including food markets, supermarkets, convenience stores and corner shops
· off-licences and licensed shops selling alcohol (including breweries)
· pharmacies (including non-dispensing pharmacies) and chemists
· newsagents
· homeware, building supplies and hardware stores
· petrol stations
· car repair and MOT services
· bicycle shops
· taxi or vehicle hire businesses
· banks, building societies, credit unions, short-term loan providers, savings clubs, cash points and undertakings which by way of business operate a currency exchange office, transmit money (or any representation of money) by any means or cash cheques which are made payable to customers
· post offices
· funeral directors
· laundrettes and dry cleaners
· dental services, opticians, audiology services, chiropody services, chiropractors, osteopaths and other medical or health services, including services relating to mental health
· veterinary surgeons and pet shops
· agricultural supplies shops and agricultural markets
· storage and distribution facilities, including delivery drop off or collection points, where the facilities are in the premises of a business included in this sub-paragraph
· car parks
· public toilets
· livestock markets or auctions
· garden centres, plant nurseries, outdoor markets, and outdoor car lots
Businesses which are allowed to stay open will be expected to follow all other legal requirements, rules and guidance.
Q: My business isn’t in the list above – do I have to close in Level 4?
A: Yes. For retailers which have been defined as non-essential – i.e. not on the list of essential businesses above - the legal position is that they will need to close in Level 4. Any decision to move an area into level 4 will only be made if absolutely necessary as a short, sharp intervention to address very high transmission rates. Most retail is permitted in levels 0-3, with mobile close contact being limited to levels 0-1. Mobile hairdressing only can operate in levels 2-3
Q: If I am in the non-essential category, can I still trade online? What about Click and Collect?
A: Yes – shops and retail businesses that close in Level 4 can continue to make deliveries or provide a collection service to fulfil orders received online, by phone, text or post.
Q: What is 'outdoor retail'?
Sales which happen in outdoor spaces, such as outdoor markets, livestock markets, farmers markets, car auction lots, garden centres and plant nurseries.
Q: Are there any restriction to shopping hours?
A: There are no current plans to restrict shopping hours.
Q: How have you engaged with business around this?
A: We have been engaging with retail sector representatives and business organisations to understand their concerns and will continue to do so.
Q: What are you closing in Level 4?
A: Level 4 is broadly similar to full lockdown where the priority will be to reduce movement as far as possible to address high transmission rates and this will necessitate closing non-essential retail. Essential retail will be able to remain open in Level 4. All retailers will be able to continue online shopping, click and collect services and outdoor retail will also be able to operate in all levels.
Q: How will shutting shops reduce the spread of the virus?
A: In moving to Level 4 we would expect to see very high or rapidly increasing incidence of the spread of COVID–19 and widespread community transmission which may pose a threat to the NHS. The priority in level 4 is to reduce movement of people so that we can reduce transmission of the virus. Shopping is an area which can attract a lot of people, many of whom travel to shops, including on public transport. By shutting non-essential shops, we limit the spaces where people are exposed to others in enclosed spaces for prolonged periods. Measures would be designed to be in place for a short period, to provide a short, sharp response to quickly suppress the virus. It is likely that this level would see the introduction of measures close to a return to full lockdown.
Q: Will people have to queue to get into a store?
A: Possibly, yes. Closing some parts of the high street can mean that customers will have a smaller number of stores to choose from, resulting in increasing queues / numbers. The need for businesses to maintain 2m distancing also means that fewer people can safely be inside a shop or store at any one time. Businesses will be expected to determine how many people can safely be accommodated at any one time and implement queuing and other measures to prevent overcrowding. Customers are expected to follow any measures that retailers put in place. The priority in Level 4 is to reduce movement of people so that we can reduce transmission of the virus.
Q: Will you support a campaign to get people to shop local/shop early?
A: We would encourage everyone to think about whether their journey to the shops is necessary and to walk or cycle to local stores, where that is possible. We are engaging with the Scottish Retail Consortium on how we can support this but need to take a balanced view on how to avoid the unintended consequences of potentially adding to the virus transmission rate through encouraging more people to shop at the same time.
Q: Will people be able to buy a new or used car?
A: Yes – car sales will be allowed, although businesses must put in place measures to operate safely, for workers and customers, including physical distancing and other measures in concluding transactions. Customers will be expected to adhere to these measures.
Q: Can a potential buyer take a car for a test drive before buying it?
A: Yes – but we would recommend that the same physical distancing, vehicle cleaning and ventilation measures set out in the driving lesson guidance before and after taking a test drive.
Strategic Framework and Levels
Q: Why has this approach been introduced?
A: Our ability to control the virus requires us to restrict economic activity as part of wider efforts to minimise transmission risks, and protect lives and the NHS. This approach will provide a more transparent and easily understood framework for managing outbreaks and allow us to respond appropriately and proportionately. It means those areas with low rates of infection do not need to be under the same protective measures designed to suppress the virus in areas with much higher rates.
Businesses will want to know in advance what may happen if there’s a risk of either a rise or drop in the infection rate in their area so that they can manage staffing, deliveries, services etc. Having a strategic framework helps them plan in advance for any changes - either up or down the levels.
Q: How will the Levels system operate?
This framework sets out on five levels of protection consisting of four levels above the Route Map Phase 3 baseline (or 'Level 0') as set out below:
Level 0 (baseline) and Level 1
We would expect to see low incidence of the virus with isolated clusters, and low community transmission. The Baseline and Level 1 are designed to be sustainable for longer periods.
All retail businesses and close contact services including mobile services will be able to operate in these levels.
Levels 2-3
We would expect to see increased incidence of the virus, with multiple clusters and increased community transmission. The measures would be intended to be in place for relatively short periods (2-4 weeks), and only for as long as required to get the virus down to a low, sustainable level.
Retail businesses will be able to operate in Levels 2 and 3, as will close contact services that are delivered from a salon, shop or other static site, such as a home treatment room.
Mobile hairdressing and barbering can also continue in Levels 2 and 3.
All other mobile close contact services will not be able to operate in Levels 2 or 3.
Level 4
We would expect to see very high or rapidly increasing incidence, and widespread community transmission which may pose a threat to the NHS to cope. It is likely that this level would see the introduction of measures close to a return to full lockdown. Measures would be designed to be in place for a short period, to provide a short, sharp response to quickly suppress the virus.
Essential retail will be able to remain open in Level 4.
Click and collect services for essential and non-essential retail and online retail can remain open. All other non-essential retail will be expected to close.
All close contact services – static or mobile – will be closed.
Q: Can I travel between areas in different Levels?
A: To suppress the spread of COVID-19 it is essential that, with limited exceptions, there is no travel to or from areas where higher numbers of people may be carrying the virus. If people do not abide by the guidance on travel and transport there is a risk that the virus will spread to areas where it is less common and we may have to return to national restrictions.
Q: How often will the levels change?
A: Local areas and the levels they are in will be reviewed weekly to decide whether levels should be maintained, increased, or reduced. However, while levels will be reviewed weekly, areas are likely to move between levels less frequently than that. Once set, levels are likely to be in place for two to four weeks at least, to give time for the effect of changes to be observed in data about the virus, and to ensure that the incidence and prevalence of the virus are responding to measures put in place to suppress it. The First Minister has stated that the outcome of the weekly review will be reported on a Tuesday with any changes proposed coming into effect on a Friday.
Q: What boundaries are being used to decide where the Levels are?
A: The Levels will be assigned to each local authority area. For very large geographic areas, such as the Highlands, it may be that the levels are established by Ward area.
Q: What evidence is being used to make a decision if Levels will change?
A: Decisions will be made on the basis of advice from local Directors of Public Health and Public Health Scotland, through the National Incident Management Team, and the assessment of our own senior advisors against the four harms. We will also engage with our local authority partners prior to making decisions and on the delivery bodies we rely on to implement and oversee the measures.
Q: What are the “Four Harms”?
A: These are the impacts of COVID-19 assessed over the following areas:
1. The virus causes direct and tragic harm to people's health.
2. The virus has a wider impact on our health and social care services in Scotland.
3. The restrictions which have been put in place affect our broader way of living and society.
4. The impact on our economy, with a damaging effect on poverty and inequality.
Q: Will there be clarity on customers' personal travel between local authorities on different Levels and what it means for Click and Collect etc?
A: To suppress the spread of COVID-19 it is essential that, with limited exceptions, there is no travel to or from areas where higher numbers of people may be carrying the virus.
If people don’t abide by the travel guidance set out here, there is a risk that the virus will spread to areas where it is less common and we may have to return to national restrictions.
Q: Are people in Level 4 areas allowed to travel to Level 3/2 to shop?
A: The recommendation is that people in a Level 4 area do not travel outside their local authority area unless for work or if it is absolutely necessary.
Q: Can distribution centres remain open to services online and Click and Collect shopping as well as deliveries?
A: Yes.
Q: Will deliveries of large items such as furniture or white goods still be permitted?
A: Yes. There’s more information on this in the general guidance for safer workplaces.
Q: Is the installation of goods such as washing machines permitted?
A: Yes – this is also covered in the general guidance for safer workplaces
Business support
Q: What support will there be for businesses that have to close?
A: Details of support for businesses facing closure or restrictions will be published shortly. Information on current support is available on the Find Business Support website or on the UK Government’s Work and Financial Support pages.
Close contact services - face coverings
Q: Do my clients/customers need to wear a face covering?
A: Yes, under Schedule 7 of the Health Protection (Coronavirus) (Restrictions and Requirements) (Local Levels) (Scotland) Regulations 2020 any person including staff and clients/customers must wear a face covering in a location used for the retail sale of goods or services – including shops and salons. Practitioners and clients/customers are encouraged to refer to current Scottish Government face-covering guidance for further information.
Q: As a business owner/third sector organisation do I need to enforce this law on my clients/customers?
A: Where face coverings are required, people responsible for relevant premises should take reasonable steps to promote compliance with the law.
If necessary, the police have enforcement powers including issuing fines of £60 (halving to £30 if paid within 28 days) if members of the public do not comply with this law.
Q: If staff wear a visor do I need a face covering too?
A: Face shields/visors do not constitute an adequate face covering for the purposes of meeting your obligation under Schedule 7 of the Health Protection (Coronavirus) (Restrictions and Requirements) (Local Levels) (Scotland) Regulations 2020 Face shields or visors may be used, but only if they are worn in addition to an adequate face covering, as the evidence shows that they do not provide adequate protection. However, if you are unable to wear a face covering due to an exemption, a face visor or face shield can be worn as it does provide a limited level of protection.
Q: Who is exempt from wearing a face covering in a retail setting e.g. a shop?
A: Those who are exempt from wearing a face covering. These include:
· a child who is under the age of 5
· a constable acting in the course of their duty
· an emergency responder (other than a constable) acting in their capacity as an emergency responder
Read the full list of exemptions
Q: Can services still be provided if the practitioner or customer/client is exempt from wearing a face-covering?
A: We have published guidance on the public use of face coverings and for the retail sector.
Organisations have a duty under the Equality Act 2010 to make reasonable adjustments for disabled persons. The Equality and Human Rights Commission website includes guidance on using a service: reasonable adjustments for disabled people and retailers’ legal responsibility to disabled customers, and you can contact the Commission for further advice.
Close contact services - physical distancing
Q: How does physical distancing impact close contact services?
A: Regulations allow for physical distancing of at least 2m “so far as reasonably practicable’. As close contact services cannot be provided from a 2m distance, these services can continue to take place (provided your business operates in a Level that allows you to open.)
Where possible, 2m should be maintained in order to reduce the contact between individuals on site, for example, clients/customers should be at least 2m from one another when on the premises.
Q: Do I need screens between treatment areas/chairs?
A: 2 metre physical distancing is the legal minimum physical distance between persons without a partition. If 2m cannot be guaranteed then screens should be used to ensure physical distancing is maintained.
Q: Can I use all the chairs in my barber’s shop/salon if they are spaced at 1m from one another?
A: It is recommended that chairs be spaced at distances of at least 2m from one another. Where this cannot be achieved it may be possible, with additional controls, to have chairs located at a reduced distance. Remember there must be at least 2m physical distancing between persons. If this cannot be guaranteed screens/barriers should be put in place.
Q: I’m delivering mobile close contact services – where can I do that?
A. Mobile close contact services can be delivered in a customer/clients home or in any other place where the client/customer may have requested the treatment, such as a community facility or a hotel. Practitioners should only see one client/customer at a time and ensure appropriate hygiene and physical distancing measures are taken to manage risks of working in an external environment. Practitioners can find more information on risk assessments when working in other people’s homes on the Healthy Working Lives website.
We have published guidance for delivering mobile close contact services and practitioners should refer to it for further information
Q: How do I increase the ventilation in my business?
A: Advice on ventilation is provided by HSE
Close contact services - Test and Protect
Q. Do I need to record customer details?
A. Yes – clients/customers details should be collected either through a booking system or manually on the day of the appointment.
The gathering of contact information in a secure and safe manner from clients/customers or visitors to premises, will assist NHS Scotland's Test and Protect service to identify and contact individuals who may have been exposed to the virus, and request them to take appropriate steps to prevent the potential onward spread of the virus. The data will also be helpful to the NHS and key local partners to manage and contain location-specific outbreaks.
Q. Do I have to use the Protect Scotland app?
A: Protect Scotland is not a requirement – however it is important that we all download and use the app to help stop the spread of coronavirus. We know the more of us that do, the more effective it will be. We encourage all businesses, staff, practitioners, and their customers to download the Protect Scotland app.
Q: How long do I need to keep client/customer details on file for Test and Protect / contact tracing purposes?
A: Client/customer details should be retained for 21 days. Where details are to be retained electronically a business needs to be registered with the Information Commissioner’s Office. The ICO has produced specific guidance on this for businesses.
Q: What details should I be keeping for clients/customers?
A: As a minimum you should be retaining the clients/customer’s name and contact number or email address along with the name of the individual who provided treatment
Where possible, it is recommended that you note the room/location or chair that the client/customer occupied during the treatment. The more specific information that you can record about a treatment, the greater the benefit in the event that Test and Protect need to trace individuals. This could also protect the continuity of your business/third sector organisations/practitioners by limiting the number of staff/people having to self-isolate.
Close contact services - appointments
Q: Can I allow clients/customers to use the toilet on the premises?
A: Toilets can continue to be used in a managed way and provided that hand contact surfaces are cleaned between uses. It is also recommended that, where possible, the frequency at which mechanical ventilation operates within toilet facilities be increased. It is important to remember that some clients/customers may require to use the facilities for medical reasons.
Q: Can I offer clients/customers a cup of tea whilst on the premises?
A. No drinks should be offered to clients/customers when in the salon. Clients/customers may bring their own drinks with them if needed and may temporarily remove a face covering to drink from their own container, maintaining a 2 distance from others where possible.
Q: Can I still use the waiting room as normal for clients/customers that turn up early?
A: It is not recommended that the waiting room be used unless it is possible for clients/customers to maintain the required distance. It is strongly recommended that clients/customers be encouraged to arrive at the time of their appointment and no earlier. Where an early arrival occurs, clients/customers should be asked to wait in their car or outside if it is not possible for them to maintain the required distance within the premises.
Where a waiting room is used procedures will require to be in place for the regular cleaning of hand contact surfaces such as arms of chairs, tables etc.
For close contact services operating in Level 3, additional protective measures to further inhibit the virus and enhance the safety of practitioners and customers/clients should be considered. Types of additional protective measures can include eliminating the waiting area outright.
Q: Do I have to remove magazines from the waiting room?
A: It is recommended that all unnecessary hand contact surfaces be removed from the premises and that clients/customers be advised to bring their own reading materials with them and take them with them when they leave.
Close contact services - treatments (including the High Risk Zone)
Q: What is the ‘high risk zone’?
A: The ‘high risk zone’ is the term used to describe the face, mainly the mouth and nose.
Q: What are acceptable control measures to allow treatments to be carried out in the high risk zone?
A: Considerations could include; minimising the time being spent working on the high-risk zone and implementing additional control measures (working from the side of the face etc.) or procedures to mitigate the increased risk. Treatments should not be performed that require the client’s/customer’s face covering to be removed.
Where additional controls cannot be implemented, treatments should not be offered.
It should be noted that if, at a later date, the client/customer is identified as a case who was infectious at the time of treatment, the individual performing the treatment will be considered a close contact and required to self-isolate regardless of the control measures implemented.
Q: In relation to treatments involving the face (high risk zone) what is the definition of “prolonged period”?
A: Health Protection Scotland has produced contact tracing guidance that contains information on close contact in non-healthcare settings. This suggests that ‘prolonged periods’ could be:
· no amount of time: if face-to-face contact is at 1 metre or less; (i.e. in effect this should not be permitted)
· 1 minute: if contact is 1 metre or less, but does not involve face-to-face contact
or
· 15 minutes: if contact is between 1 and 2 metres, whether or not contact is face-to-face
The limitation on the provision of any treatment is the ability to provide it from the side or behind the head. If you can provide the treatment from the side or from behind the head you should reduce the time in the high risk zone as much as possible. Treatments should not be provided in the area covered by a face covering – even if the client is exempt from wearing a face covering and that area is exposed.

18 Nov 2020
- UK climate plan: what do the terms mean?
- Why the UK's carbon-free future will need rules
- Extra £40m pledged for green spaces in England
- Shift to electric cars 'requires Herculean effort'
Read the full article here at BBC https://www.bbc.co.uk/news/science-environment-54981425

17 Nov 2020
Courtesy www.justemploymentlaw.co.uk

11 Nov 2020
The number of public electric vehicle charging points in the UK increased by 18% in 2020, according to the latest data from the Department for Transport (DfT).
The Electric Vehicle Charging Device statistics for October 2020 also shows a 7% increase in available chargers in Q3 2020 alone.
Of the 19,487 public chargers now available in the UK, 3,530 are rapid chargers.
London has the highest level of charging device provision per 100,000 of population but is slightly below average in terms of rapid charging device provision.
Scotland is above average in total devices per 100,000 and has the highest level of rapid device provision.
Read the full article at www.smarttransport.org.uk https://bit.ly/3kmlq7N

11 Nov 2020
Update from HMRC:
Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS) guidance is now available on GOV.UK. To check if you’re eligible and to get ready to claim from this week, go to GOV.UK and search 'Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme'.
You’ll be able to apply for CJRS online from Wednesday 11 November – for periods from 1 November. You will need to submit any claims for November by 14 December.
What’s new in the support available
CJRS has been extended to 31 March 2021 for all parts of the UK. From 1 November, the UK Government will pay 80% of employees’ usual wages for the hours not worked, up to a cap of £2,500 per month. This will be reviewed in January.You and your employees do not need to have benefited from the scheme before to claim for periods from 1 November. Go to GOV.UK for the full eligibility criteria.
HMRC intends to publish details of employers who use the scheme for claim periods from December, and employees will be able to find out if their employer has claimed for them under the scheme.
There are now monthly deadlines for claims. Claims for periods starting on/after 1 November must be submitted within 14 calendar days after the month they relate to, unless this falls on a weekend in which case the deadline is the next weekday. For further details go to GOV.UK and search 'Claim for wages through the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme'.
The Job Retention Bonus will no longer be paid in February 2021 and an alternative retention incentive will be put in place at the appropriate time.
The launch of the Job Support Scheme has also been postponed.
What you need to do now
Submit any claims for periods up to 31 October on or before 30 November. Claims for periods up to 31 October will not be accepted after 30 November. Claims are subject to eligibility and the rules in force at the time. Search 'Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme' on GOV.UK for full eligibility criteria.
What you need to do for your claims – for periods from 1 November
Read the new guidance – go to GOV.UK and search 'Extension to the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme' – to check if you and your employees are eligible.Agree working hours with any employees you wish to furlough for November and agree any changes to their employment contract.
Work out how much you can claim for your employees using our CJRS calculator and examples. Search for 'Calculate how much you can claim using the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme' on GOV.UK.
Submit any claims for periods from 1 November no later than 14 December.
You will need to keep any records that support the amount of CJRS grant you claim, in case HMRC needs to check them. You can view, print or download copies of your previously submitted claims by logging onto your CJRS service on GOV.UK.

10 Nov 2020
Visit www.smmt.co.uk for more information

10 Nov 2020
- UK auto industry issues last plea for UK-EU negotiators to agree a zero-tariff trade deal as talks enter the final stretch.
- New SMMT survey reveals at least £735 million cost to industry of preparing for Brexit so far, with more than £235 million spent in 2020 alone.
- Sector doing everything in its control to prepare for the end of transition period customs and border arrangements, but lack of clarity on post-December trading still hampering efforts.
- A disastrous ‘no deal’ outcome, or failure to achieve workable deal for auto, would mean £47 billion hit to UK sector over next five years – on top of ongoing coronavirus crisis costs.
- A temporary grace period for exporters of at least one year to obtain supplier declarations.
- Clarity on the format of the upcoming origin declarations and the necessary supporting documents and IT processes.
- Certainty on preferential origin formalities for export to the UK’s other FTA trading partners.
- Guidance on valuation and origin of used products, or ‘cores’, imported into the UK for remanufacturing purposes.
- Detail on the Permission to Progress (P2P) process and Goods Vehicle Movement Service (GVMS) to mitigate the risks to Just-in-Time manufacturing. If there is substantial time between a company submitting a customs declaration and receiving a P2P there is a risk the manufacturing site becomes a lorry park and production gets significantly disrupted.
- Draft legislation on how UK government will handle returnables/stillages/empty packaging that was committed to back in April 2020.
- Support in connecting with third party customs intermediaries.
- Extend access to the £84 million customs funding to all traders to boost their customs capacity and preparedness.
- Publish a full list of ports and which operating model they will use as a matter of urgency.
- Significantly more operational level information from government on the workings of the Northern Ireland Protocol.

09 Nov 2020
Following decisions by the UK Government the UK has now left the EU.
• EU citizens and their families will have to apply to the UK Government’s EU Settlement Scheme by 30 June 2021 in order to continue living, working and studying in the UK after that date.
• The Scottish Government launched the Stay in Scotland campaign in April 2019 to raise awareness of the need for EU citizens to apply to the UK Government’s EU Settlement Scheme, and to provide the necessary support to allow people to make their application.
• EU citizens who have been in the UK for five continuous years will be able to apply for settled status. EU citizens who have been in the UK less than five years can apply for presettled status. After five years continuous residency they can then apply for settled status. For further information please visit: www.mygov.scot/stayinscotland
To get the word out to all EU citizens living in Scotland you can download a Stay in Scotland Toolkit with a range of materials:

03 Nov 2020
DVLA Update:
Throughout the month of November reminder letters are being issued to those customers who need to renew their ‘Trade Licence plates’ which are expiring in December 2020. In previous years DVLA have only processed these applications in the month of December, this year they are inviting customers to send their renewal applications in early by using the online renewal form (VTL318). See the step by step guide (see below for link) for further information. They will start processing these applications once they are received.
In addition they have introduced some additional temporary changes to help customers renew their Trade Licence plates during these difficult times. These changes include:
· the introduction of GOV.UK Notify to confirm receipt of the renewal application– when customers provide a mobile number on their application form, we will send them a text message to confirm receipt of their application.
· temporary removal of the motor insurance check – customers will not need to provide documents to evidence they have valid motor insurance for this December 2020 renewal period.
Click here for step-by-step best practice guide to help applicants renew their trade plates.

03 Nov 2020
DVSA services in England
From Thursday 5 November, the Government is introducing new national restrictions in England to reduce the spread of coronavirus.
Vehicle testing
The national restrictions do not affect our heavy vehicle testing service and ATFs can remain open.
We can continue to provide the vehicle standards assessors needed to test heavy goods vehicles (HGVs) and public service vehicles (PSVs) safely.
You should only book your vehicle or trailer in for its test close to its MOT due date. This will make sure vehicles and trailers which legally need a test can get one.
You should continue to manage the regular maintenance and inspection schedule for your vehicles and trailers. This is a legal requirement under your operator’s licence.
Vocational theory tests
Vocational theory tests will be affected during the national restrictions in England.
All theory tests will be suspended from Thursday 5 November and restart on Wednesday 2 December 2020.
We are emailing everyone with a test booked in England to let them know their test has been put on hold and they will need to reschedule it at https://www.gov.uk/change-theory-test
Driver CPC courses can continue during these dates if they are delivered online. All face to face CPC courses will be suspended until Wednesday 2 December.
Enforcement Activity
We will continue our enforcement work to protect you from unsafe drivers and vehicles on our roads.
We’ll also continue to work remotely to support drivers and operators to follow guidance and legislation and, where appropriate, improve their driver and vehicle standards.

03 Nov 2020
Update from HMRC:
In light of the increased restrictions needed to curb the coronavirus pandemic, the UK government is introducing additional economic measures to support you and your employees.
Latest changes that may impact you
The Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS), which was due to end on 31 October, will now be extended, with the UK government paying 80% of wages for the hours furloughed employees do not work, up to a cap of £2,500 for periods from 1 November.
You will need to pay all employer National Insurance Contributions (NICs) and pension contributions. You can choose to top up your furloughed employees’ wages beyond the 80% paid by the UK government for hours not worked, but you are not required to do so.
There will be no gap in support between the previously announced end date of CJRS and this extension.
For more information, go to GOV.UK and search 'furlough scheme extended'.
How will it work?
You will have flexibility to ask your employees to work on a part-time basis and furlough them for the rest of their usual working hours or furlough them full-time. You will have to cover their wages for any hours they work as well as all employer National Insurance and employer pension contributions.
You will be able to claim either shortly before, during or after running your payroll. There will be a short period initially when the online claims service will be closed while we update the system, and you will be able to claim in arrears for that period.
Further details will be provided in the next few days. Please do not call us for more information in the meantime – we will let you know via email as soon as this is available.
How to check if your employees are eligible
You can claim for employees who were on your PAYE payroll on 30 October 2020. You must have made a PAYE Real Time Information (RTI) submission to HMRC between 20 March 2020 and 30 October 2020, notifying a payment of earnings for that employee.
If employees were on your payroll on 23 September 2020 (i.e. notified to HMRC on an RTI submission on or before 23 September) and were made redundant or stopped working for you afterwards, they can also qualify for the scheme if you re-employ them.
Neither you nor your employee needs to have previously used the CJRS. Further details on eligibility will be provided in the next few days.
What you need to do now
- Check if your employees are eligible for the scheme, based on the information above.
- Agree working hours with your employees, so they know if they are furloughed fully or part-time during November.
- Keep the records that support the amount of CJRS grant you claim, in case HMRC need to check it. You can view, print or download copies of your previously submitted claims by logging onto your CJRS service on GOV.UK.

02 Nov 2020
The government decided to extend the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (furlough scheme) until December and postponed the start of the Job Support Scheme (JSS), which had been due to come into effect on 1 November. The JSS is now expected to come into force in early December but as experience has shown us, this could very well be subject to further change.
The extension to the furlough scheme applies to all four nations of the UK with immediate effect.
For the month of November, employers can furlough their employees on the same terms as applied in August this year – the government will pay 80% of the employee’s wages up to a cap of £2,500 per month. The employer does not require to contribute anything towards the 80% of wages, but will have to pay employer’s National Insurance contributions and an employer’s pension contribution at minimum auto-enrolment levels on the sums paid to the employee. These will not be reimbursed.
It will be possible to furlough employees who have never been furloughed before, as long as the employer has made a Real Time Information (RTI) submission notifying a PAYE payment for that employee to HMRC on or before 30 October 2020.
It will also remain possible to have employees on flexible furlough throughout the month of November, where an employee works some of their contracted hours (and is paid in full by the employer for these hours) and is on furlough for the remainder of their contracted hours.
You can read the government announcement here:
https://www.gov.uk/government/news/furlough-scheme-extended-and-further-economic-support-announced
Article courtesy Just Employment Law www.justemploymentlaw.co.uk

02 Nov 2020
THIS SCHEME HAS BEEN POSTPONED, SEE ARTICLE ABOVE!
Job Support Scheme template letter -Courtesy from Just Employment LawIn order to claim reimbursement under JSS Open, a short-time working agreement should be entered into with an employee. Importantly, the published guidance on the new scheme says that there must be a written agreement between the employer and the employee to this effect.The JSS Open letter that can be used as a short-time working agreement. You will require to tailor the agreement prior to sending to ensure it reflects your agreement with staff. Guidance on how to complete this letter can be found here.The furlough scheme ended on 31 October and, immediately following this, on 1 November, the Job Support Scheme (JSS) will be implemented. Eligible employers can claim for reimbursement of eligible employees’ wages under the JSS even if an employee has not previously been furloughed.Just Employment Law have prepared the attached documentation based on the information available from the government thus far.

02 Nov 2020
Update from DVSA:
The Scottish Government has confirmed that from Monday 2 November 2020, by law, you and your pupils must wear a face covering during driving lessons.
This does not include motorcycle or tractor lessons.
If you do not wear a face covering, you must have a good reason, for example:
- you have a physical or mental illness, impairment or disability
- wearing it would cause you severe distress
- you and the person you are teaching live in the same household
Your pupils will need to let you know before their lesson if they cannot wear a face covering.
You can be fined £60 if you do not wear a face covering during a driving lesson in Scotland. This will be reduced to £30 if you pay within 28 days.
Face coverings: practical tests
Your pupils must bring and wear a face covering for their practical test, unless they have a good reason not to. Good reasons are things like:
- having a physical or mental illness or impairment, or a disability
- wearing it would cause them severe distress
If they refuse to wear a face covering they will not be able to take their test.
If they do have a good reason they need to tell us when they book their test.
Face coverings: theory tests
Your pupils must bring and wear a face covering for their theory test, unless they have a good reason not to. Good reasons are things like:
- having a physical or mental illness or impairment, or a disability
- wearing it would cause them severe distress
They need to say if they have a good reason not to wear a face covering when they book their test.
If they already have a theory test booked and have a good reason not to wear a face covering they need to call Pearson VUE on 0300 200 1122.

28 Oct 2020
We are mindful that once again our sector has been overlooked and whilst it is not clear that we have been excluded we felt it best to at least make our membership aware of possible funds.

26 Oct 2020
Update from HMRC:
We’re writing to let you know that we have published further information on the Job Support Scheme – including how you can check if you’re eligible and when you can make your first claim. You can find this on GOV.UK by searching 'Job Support Scheme'.
Job Support Scheme
The Job Support Scheme (JSS) will open on 1 November and run for six months, until 30 April 2021. The government has said it will review the terms of the scheme in January 2021. There are two variations to JSS – JSS Open and JSS Closed.
The UK government announced yesterday it will significantly increase the generosity and reach of its winter support schemes to ensure livelihoods and jobs across the UK continue to be protected in the difficult months to come, supporting jobs and helping to contain the virus.
In recognition of the challenging times ahead, the Chancellor said he would be increasing support through the existing Job Support and self-employed schemes.
JSS Open will provide support to businesses that are open where employees are working shorter hours due to reduced demand. Your employees will need to work at least 20% of their usual hours. You will continue to pay employees for the hours they work, and the UK government will pay a contribution of 61.67% of the usual pay for hours not worked, up to a maximum of £1,541.75 per month. You will pay 5% of the usual pay for hours not worked, up to a maximum of £125 per month, and can top this up further if you choose. This means employees should receive at least two thirds of their usual pay for hours not worked.
The caps are reduced according to the proportion of hours not worked. Further guidance on this will be available on GOV.UK shortly.
You will need to cover all employer National Insurance and pension contributions.
JSS Closed will provide support to businesses whose premises are legally required to close as a direct result of coronavirus restrictions set by one of the four governments of the UK. This includes premises restricted to delivery or collection-only services from their premises, and those restricted to providing food and/or drinks outdoors.
For JSS Closed, the UK government will fund two thirds of employees' usual wages for time not worked, up to a maximum of £2,083.33 per month. You will not be required to contribute, but you can top up the government’s contribution if you choose to. You will still need to cover all employer National Insurance and pension contributions.
You’ll be able to make your first JSS claim in arrears from 8 December, for pay periods ending and paid in November. We’ll let you know more about how to make a claim by the end of this month.
Your employees will be able to check if you have made a Job Support Scheme claim on their behalf through their online Personal Tax Account. Employees can set up a Personal Tax Account on GOV.UK, by searching 'Personal Tax Account: sign in or set up'.
Job Retention Bonus (JRB)
You’ll be able to claim a one-off payment of £1,000 for every eligible employee you furloughed and claimed for through the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS), kept continuously employed until at least 31 January 2021 and who meets the other eligibility criteria. You do not have to pay this money to your employee.
You will be able to claim the bonus between 15 February and 31 March. To do this you must have submitted PAYE information for the period up to 5 February 2021 on time.
Further information on eligibility and when you can claim can be found on GOV.UK by searching 'Job Retention Bonus Guidance' and further guidance on the claim process will be published by the end of January 2021.
Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme – closes on 31 October
Please note that this scheme closes on 31 October and you will need to make any final claims on or before 30 November. You will not be able to submit or add to any claims after 30 November.
From 1 October, the UK government has paid employers 60% of usual wages up to a cap of £1,875 per month for the hours furloughed employees do not work.
You continue to pay your furloughed employees at least 80% of their usual wages for the hours they do not work, up to a cap of £2,500 per month. You need to fund the difference between this and the CJRS grant yourself.
The caps are proportional to the hours not worked. For example, if your employee is furloughed for half their usual hours in October, you are entitled to claim 60% of their usual wages for the hours they do not work, up to £937.50 (half of £1,875 cap). You must still pay your employee at least 80% of their usual wages for the hours they don’t work, so for someone only working half their usual hours you’d need to pay them up to £1,250 (half of £2,500 cap), funding the remaining portion yourself. For help with calculations, search 'Calculate how much you can claim using the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme' on GOV.UK.
You’ll also continue to pay employer National Insurance and pension contributions from your own funds.
You must keep the records that support the amount of CJRS grant you have claimed in case HMRC needs to check it. You can now view, print or download copies of your previously submitted claims by logging onto your CJRS service on GOV.UK.
Claimed too much in error?
It’s important that you check each claim is accurate before submitting it, and we would also recommend checking previous claims and repaying any amount over-claimed, so you will not have to pay interest and penalties if we subsequently discover you have claimed too much.
If you have claimed too much CJRS grant and have not already repaid it, you must notify us and repay the money by the latest of whichever date applies below:
- 90 days from receiving the CJRS money you’re not entitled to
- 90 days from the point circumstances changed so that you were no longer entitled to keep the CJRS grant.
If you do not do this, you may have to pay interest and a penalty as well as repaying the excess CJRS grant. For more information on interest search 'Interest rates for late and early payments' on GOV.UK.
How to let us know if you have claimed too much
You can let us know as part of your next online claim without needing to call us. If you claimed too much but do not plan to submit further claims, you can let us know and make a repayment online through our card payment service or by bank transfer – go to 'Pay Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme grants back' on GOV.UK.
Further support
Guidance and live webinars offering you more support on changes to CJRS, JSS and JRB, and how they impact you, are available to book online – go to GOV.UK and search 'help and support if your business is affected by coronavirus'.
Our phone lines and webchat remain very busy, so the quickest way to find the support you need is on GOV.UK. This will leave our phone lines and webchat service open for those who need them most.

26 Oct 2020
Update from Business Gateway:
Join us on Tuesday 27th October at 11am to look at the potential Coronavirus Strategic Framework from The Scottish Government, the learnings from the current restrictions on businesses and how you can prepare for future restrictions. With panelists from Business Gateway, VisitScotland, Federation of Small Businesses and the Society of Chief Environmental Health Officers of Scotland.
You can book using this link https://bit.ly/31IDQcc
Plus they have information on the latest guidance, advice & support available to businesses in Scotland. Including their Coronavirus Support Hub which is available 24/7. Visit the Business Gateway Coronavirus Hub here

26 Oct 2020
- New calculations reveal ‘no deal’ tariff threat to Britain’s green recovery, with £2,800 average price uplift on EU-built EV effectively cancelling out UK’s plug-in car grant.
- Shock of higher cost risks reducing increased BEV demand next year by at least 20%, hampering UK’s efforts to reach ambitious emissions reduction targets.
- Tariffs would also add £2,000 to cost of British-built battery electric cars sold in Europe, damaging international competitiveness as UK strives to become a global leader in electromobility.
- Automotive sector repeats call for swift conclusion of an ambitious UK-EU FTA to protect jobs and drive a sustainable recovery across every region.
The Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT) has again urged both sides to re-engage with vigour in the Brexit negotiation process, honouring the commitment to get a good deal done, as new calculations illustrate the high stakes of ‘no deal’, not only for the automotive sector but for hopes of a green recovery from the coronavirus crisis.
‘No deal’ would be the worst possible outcome for UK Automotive, for car buyers and for the country’s ambitions to become a world leader in transport decarbonisation. The immediate imposition of blanket tariffs under World Trade Organisation (WTO) rules would add billions to the cost of trade and, crucially, to the cost of building and buying electric vehicles.
The 10% ‘no deal’ WTO tariff would add at least £4.5 billion to the annual cost of fully assembled cars traded between the UK and the EU, with an average hike of £1,900 per EU-built vehicle sold in the UK.1 However, new analysis shows that for fully electric cars fitted with expensive battery technology, the cost increase is even higher, at £2,800, effectively making the £3,000 plug-in car grant for these vehicles null and void.2
Moreover, this tariff would also add some £2,000 on to the average cost of UK-built battery electric cars (BEV) exported to the EU, making our own products less competitive and the UK far less attractive as a manufacturing investment destination.3 This would further hamper the UK’s ambition to be a global leader in zero emission vehicle development, production and deployment, severely damaging industrial competitiveness.
The UK and EU automotive industries are deeply integrated, with around two thirds of all battery electric cars on sale in the UK built in European factories.4 New tariffs would hold back the evolution of the electric car from a niche technology to one with mass affordability. UK car buyers are currently on track to register some 78,000 BEVs this year, with further growth expected in 2021. However, SMMT estimates that the price shock caused by these tariff increases could reduce the increased demand for BEVs next year by at least 20%, even before the impact of potential, border delays, supply chain disruption and currency fluctuations are taken into account, hindering efforts to accelerate uptake and decarbonisation.
You can read the full article here on SMMT's website: https://bit.ly/35y4uWz

21 Oct 2020
From HMRC:
Wages can be complex and different elements of pay affect the National Minimum Wage differently.
Misunderstanding of what can be included in minimum wage calculations is a common cause of underpayment – even amongst employers who think they are paying minimum wage rates or above.
HMRC is offering two live webinars covering elements of pay that cause the most confusion to employers on 27th October or 29th October.

15 Oct 2020
From HMRC: Employer Bulletin (October 2020, Issue 86) includes all of the latest COVID-19 updates to help you continue to meet your payroll obligations to HMRC, including recent government announcements of additional support for businesses and employees.
We’ve included the latest update on both the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme and the Job Retention Bonus, the new Job Support Scheme, support for home working, updates on the UK Transition, and changes to Off-Payroll Working rules.
To avoid delay, we recommend use of our online services should you need to contact or send us information.

14 Oct 2020
Update from HMRC:
We’re writing to provide you with further information on the support schemes available to help you through the COVID-19 pandemic:
- Job Support Scheme
- Expansion of Job Support Scheme
- Job Retention Bonus
- Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme
- VAT Deferral New Payment Scheme.
Job Support Scheme
The government recently announced the Job Support Scheme (JSS) to protect jobs where businesses remain open but are facing lower demand over the winter months due to COVID-19.
Under JSS the government will contribute towards the wages of your employees if they are working fewer than normal hours due to decreased demand. You will continue to pay the wages for the hours your staff work. Employees must work at least 33% of their usual hours. For the hours not worked, you and the government will pay a third each of their usual wages (the government contribution is capped at £697.92 per month).
Expansion of Job Support Scheme
The government today (9 October) announced an expansion of the JSS, to provide temporary support to businesses whose premises have been legally required to close as a direct result of coronavirus restrictions.
Under this expansion, affected businesses will receive grants towards the wages of employees who have been instructed to and cease work. This will cover businesses that, as a result of restrictions set by one or more of the four governments of the UK, are legally required to close their premises, or to provide only delivery and collection services from their premises.
The government will pay two thirds of employees’ usual wages, up to a maximum of £2,100 per month. You will not be required to contribute towards wages, but do need to cover employer National Insurance and pension contributions.
You can apply for the JSS including the new expansion even if you haven’t previously used the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS). JSS is available for six months, from 1 November, with payment of grants in arrears from early December. The scheme will be reviewed in January.
Search 'Job Support Scheme expanded to firms required to close due to Covid Restrictions’ and ‘Job Support Scheme factsheet’ on GOV.UK for more details. Further information will be published in the coming weeks.
Job Retention Bonus – guidance now live
Further guidance for the Job Retention Bonus is now available. It includes information about how you can check if your employees are eligible and when you can claim the bonus.
You’ll be able to claim a one-off payment of £1,000 for every eligible employee you furloughed and claimed for through the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS) and kept continuously employed until at least 31 January 2021. You do not have to pay this money to your employee.
To be eligible, employees must earn at least £1,560 between 6 November 2020 and 5 February 2021 and have received earnings in the November, December and January tax months. Employees must also not be serving a contractual or statutory notice period for you on 31 January 2021.
You will be able to claim the bonus from 15 February until 31 March, once you have submitted PAYE information for the period up to 5 February 2021. We’ll let you know how you can make a claim when further guidance is published by the end of January.
You can still claim the Job Retention Bonus if you make a claim for the same employees through the Job Support Scheme, as long as you meet the eligibility criteria for both.
Further information can be found on GOV.UK by searching ‘Job Retention Bonus Guidance’.
What you need to do now
If you intend to claim the Job Retention Bonus, you must:
- keep your PAYE submissions up-to-date and on time, with Real Time Information (RTI) reporting for all employees, including reporting the leaving date for any employees that stop working for you in the month they leave or the next Full Payment Submission
- use the irregular payment pattern indicator in RTI for any employees not paid regularly
- provide any employee data for past CJRS claims that HMRC has requested
- make sure all your CJRS claims have been accurately submitted and you have told us about any changes needed (for example if you’ve received too much or too little).
Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme – changes from 1 October
From 1 October, HMRC will pay 60% of usual wages up to a cap of £1,875 per month for the hours furloughed employees do not work.
You will continue to pay your furloughed employees at least 80% of their usual wages for the hours they do not work, up to a cap of £2,500 per month. You will need to fund the difference between this and the CJRS grant yourself.
The caps are proportional to the hours not worked. For example, if your employee is furloughed for half their usual hours in October, you are entitled to claim 60% of their usual wages for the hours they do not work, up to £937.50 (half of £1,875 cap). You must still pay your employee at least 80% of their usual wages for the hours they don’t work, so for someone only working half their usual hours you’d need to pay them up to £1,250 (half of £2,500 cap), funding the remaining portion yourself. For help with calculations, search ‘Calculate how much you can claim using the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme’ on GOV.UK.
You’ll also continue to pay your furloughed employees’ National Insurance and pension contributions from your own funds.
The scheme closes on 31 October and you will need to make any final claims on or before 30 November. You will not be able to submit or add to any claims after 30 November.
Claimed too much in error?
It’s important that you continue to check each claim is accurate before submitting it, and we would also recommend checking previous claims so you can avoid any penalties for claiming too much.
If you have claimed too much CJRS grant and have not repaid it, you must notify us and repay the money by the latest of whichever date applies below:
- 90 days from receiving the CJRS money you’re not entitled to
- 90 days from the point circumstances changed so that you were no longer entitled to keep the CJRS grant
- 20 October 2020, if on or before 22 July you received CJRS money you were not entitled to, or if your circumstances changed.
If you do not do this, you may have to pay interest and a penalty as well as repaying the excess CJRS grant. For more information on interest search 'Interest rates for late and early payments' on GOV.UK.
How to let us know if you have claimed too much
You can let us know as part of your next online claim without needing to call us. If you claimed too much but do not plan to submit further claims, you can let us know and make a repayment online through the new card payment service – go to 'Pay Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme grants back' on GOV.UK.
Further support
Guidance and live webinars offering you more support on changes to CJRS and how they impact you are available to book online – go to GOV.UK and search 'help and support if your business is affected by coronavirus'.
Our phone lines and webchat remain very busy, so the quickest way to find the support you need is on GOV.UK. This will leave our phone lines and webchat service open for those who need them most.
VAT Deferral New Payment Scheme
If you deferred VAT payments that were due between 20 March and 30 June 2020, then these payments need to be made to HMRC by 31 March 2021. You can use the VAT Deferral New Payment Scheme to spread these payments over equal instalments up to 31 March 2022. Alternatively, you can make payments as normal by 31 March 2021, or make Time To Pay arrangements with HMRC if you need more tailored support.
More information on the VAT Deferral New Payment Scheme will be available on GOV.UK in the coming months.

14 Oct 2020
Update from HMRC:
Changes to the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme from 1 October mean that employers will need to fund 20% of furloughed employees’ usual wages for the hours they do not work and continue to pay their National Insurance and pension contributions.
The scheme closes on 31 October and you will need to make any final claims on or before 30 November.
Make sure you have the latest information by joining the live webinar:
Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme
We’ll provide an overview of the scheme, including flexible furloughing, examples of how to work out the amount you can claim and the changes for October.
You’ll hear the latest information on the Job Retention Bonus, including how to check if your employees are eligible, when you can claim and what you need to do now to prepare.
We'll also give a short introduction to the Job Support Scheme (JSS) and its recently-announced expansion. The expansion will provide temporary support to businesses whose premises have been legally required to close as a direct result of coronavirus restrictions. Future webinars will contain more information on JSS once it becomes available.
If you haven’t been able to join our popular webinar about the Coronavirus (COVID-19) Statutory Sick Pay Rebate Scheme, there are still some places available. Get the latest information on:
- who can claim
- who you can claim for
- how to make a claim
- what you may be entitled to, and more.
You can ask questions during all our live webinars using the on-screen text box.
Our webinars are constantly updated to provide the latest government guidance on changes as they develop.

13 Oct 2020
The Department for Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy (BEIS) will aim to help automotive and retail businesses to prepare for Brexit as part of a series of webinars taking place this month.
The UK is leaving the EU single market and customs union at the end of the Brexit transition period on December 31 and BEIS wants to ensure that businesses are ready for the changes it will bring.
Its series of webinars on the various changes that can be expected by various sectors get underway today (October 13), with automotive and retail set to be addressed online tomorrow.
A statement issued by BEIS said that the webinars’ content will “explain what the changes will mean and the actions businesses must take to avoid interruption and enjoy the opportunities the UK’s new relationship with the EU will bring”.
It added: “The webinars will guide businesses through the changes, which include how to import and export goods, the process for hiring people from the EU, and how to provide services in EU markets.”
Business sectors being covered by these webinars are:
- Services and Investment, October 13
- Retail, October 14
- Automotive, October 14
- Metals and Materials, October 20
- Electronics and Machinery, October 21
- Consumer Goods, October 22
- Life Sciences, October 27
- Construction, October 28
- Aerospace, October 29
Anyone wishing to actively participate in the webinars can register now at bit.ly/UKTwebinar.
The webinars will be recorded and made available on this link for those businesses unable to attend, however.
BEIS said: “Thousands of businesses have attended previous EU Exit seminars and events that BEIS has run over the past two years.
“Feedback shows participants found the information useful, especially for clarifying areas they were already thinking about and raising awareness of actions not already on their radars.
“A digital roadshow held in 2019 was found useful by over three-quarters of those who attended.”

12 Oct 2020
The Chancellor has announced [9 October] that the UK Government’s Job Support Scheme will be expanded to support businesses required to close their doors as a result of coronavirus restrictions.
Welcoming the move, Alister Jack said:
The extension of the Chancellor’s Job Support Scheme is welcome news for businesses across Scotland, providing a vital safety net for companies which are asked to close temporarily.
From the very start of the pandemic, the UK Government has focussed on stopping the spread of coronavirus and keeping people safe, while also doing everything we can to protect the economy.
The unprecedented package of measures we have put in place to support all parts of the country shows the clear benefits for Scotland being part of a strong United Kingdom.
Full details of the announcement are here.

08 Oct 2020
SMTA received a letter from the Scottish Government regarding face masks, see extract below. You can read the full letter here
When Scotland entered Phase Three of its lockdown easing plan it was announced that retail, along with the hospitality and public transport sectors, will be exempt from the two-metre rule. Retailers were given the option to reduce the physical distancing rule to one metre, as long as they put necessary mitigations in place from 15 July.
Additionally, from 10 July face coverings became mandatory in shops, except where an exemption applies (as defined in the regulations). Staff are also required to wear a face covering unless they are physically separated from customers, by means of, for example, partition screens. They also do not require a face covering if they maintain a two-metre distance from customers or members of the public. In any of these circumstances where staff do not require a face covering, they are still mandatory for customers.

07 Oct 2020
The main aim of the CECRA annual General Meeting is to inform you on CECRA’s main achievements, state of affairs and on the most relevant political developments going on at EU level and their potential implications for dealers and repairers. They also use this opportunity to present the main trends and the possible scenarios within the automotive landscape.

06 Oct 2020
Update from Health & Safety Executive -
As businesses re-open and workers return to the workplace, employers are having to adapt their working environments to manage the risk posed by coronavirus.
To minimise the risk of infection in the workplace, HSE is carrying out spot checks and inspections on businesses to ensure they are COVID-secure. We are doing this by calling and visiting premises to speak to duty-holders to check the measures they’ve put in place are in line with the current guidance.
We are doing spot checks and inspections on all types of businesses, in all areas. During the checks we provide advice and guidance to manage risk and protect workers, customers and visitors. Where businesses are not managing this, we will take immediate action in one of the following ways:
- providing specific advice
- issuing enforcement notices
- stopping certain work practices until they are made safe
- prosecution where a business fails to comply
Being COVID-secure means being adaptable to the current guidelines, and HSE’s inspection approach will adapt as workplaces in different sectors manage the coronavirus risks that apply to them. Most employers want to do the right thing, and HSE is here to help and provide advice.
We are also working closely with local authorities assisting them in their targeting of premises in the sectors they regulate such as hospitality and retail.
If you receive a call from us, you must participate in the spot check as you have a duty under health and safety law to engage with us. Please note that the call will currently come up as an unknown number.
You can find more HSE advice on making your workplace COVID-secure.
For more info visit the full article on their website here

01 Oct 2020
New car market – UK from Cox Automotive - Read the full analysis here
Registrations currently down -39.7% YTD and the SMMT forecast -30% down by the end of 2020
- Lost 600k registrations during COVID-19 lockdown and YTD
- Production constraints for OEMs due to lost efficiencies and supply chain issues
- SMMT reduce the 2020 full-year outlook to -30%, representing more than £20 billion of lost sales
- Rental experience new consumer behaviours and vehicle usage
- Order take healthy across the network, but concerns remain regarding supply
- OEMs focus on maximising 2020 recovery ahead of the threat of tariffs

30 Sep 2020
CECRA joined a roundtable organized by the European Commission with the participation of Commissioner Breton, in charge of Industry and digitalization and Commissioner Schmit, in charge of Jobs and Social rights.
The aim of the meeting was to share industry and institutions views on the future of the automotive sector in Europe during and after the COVID19 crisis, to find a common ground to set up a revived collaboration, which is deeply needed and urgent.
Both Commissioners recognized the central and primary role of the automotive sector for the whole European economy. The focus of the discussion was the need of reskilling for all workers of the sector: support their reskilling is the only way to make the automotive sector transition work and to avoid harmful job losses.
Challenges are known and unanimously recognized: electrification, digitalization and COVID19.
Many participants underlined the need of cooperation between public authorities and value chain actors to create highly efficient and up to date training centers. Some participants suggested to start with pilot projects at regional level, not only with universities, but also engaging schools. A Pan European action will be beneficial for the whole sector, aiming to create clarity and coordination between Member States. Commissioners are aware of the urgency need to support both corporate and SMEs.
The European Commission’s initiative “Pact for skills” will be launched on Nov 10 2020.
For CECRA, it is fundamental to constantly monitor this topic at European level: we envisage a huge increase of EV and AV products in the near future and dealers and repairers must be ready to manage and work with these products. The technology is new and the training is an absolute necessity for all workers, but it is costly; the Recovery Plan can fund reskilling actions supporting the transition of businesses, reducing the risk of discrepancies between supply and demand in the automotive sector. At the same time, new business models will emerge and CECRA must monitor solutions that support the benefit for all actors of the European Automotive value chain.

30 Sep 2020
Article courtesy SMMT

28 Sep 2020
From Just Employment Law www.justemploymentlaw.co.uk
As noted in a previous news item the Job Support Scheme will be introduced from 1 November 2020 for a six month period until April 2021. The aim of the Scheme is to protect viable jobs in businesses which, due to coronavirus, are anticipating lower demand over the winter.
In order to benefit from the Scheme, employees must work at least one third (33%) of their normal hours for the first three months of the Scheme and be paid for those hours by their employer. The Government shall review this minimum hours requirement after three months of the Scheme.
For the hours not worked by employees, the Government and the employer will then pay a third each of the employee’s usual wage. The Government’s contribution will be capped at a maximum of £697.92 per month. As a result, employees who are back at work on reduced hours, will receive a minimum of 77% of their normal pay (where the Government cap does not apply), subject to their agreement.
The Scheme will be available to all businesses throughout the UK, including those who have not taken advantage of the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme subject to them having a UK bank account and a UK PAYE scheme. That said, large businesses will have to meet a financial assessment test before being able to benefit from the Scheme. Employers can benefit from both the Job Support Scheme and Job Retention Bonus if they meet the eligibility requirements.
In order to be eligible for the Scheme, employees must have been on the employer’s PAYE payroll and a Real Time Information submission notifying payment to that employee to HMRC must have been made on or before 23 September 2020. Employees do not have to have the same working pattern each month but each short time working arrangement must cover a minimum period of seven days. In addition, employees will be able to rotate on and off the Scheme. During any period where an employer is claiming a grant for an employee, the employee cannot be made redundant or put on notice of redundancy.
Grant payments from the Government will be made in arrears each month to reimburse the employer for the Government’s contribution. It has been confirmed that employers will be required to pay class 1 employer NICs and pension contributions.
The Treasury have released a factsheet with further information about the Scheme which can be accessed here.

28 Sep 2020
Update from HMRC
A new Job Support Scheme will be introduced from 1 November to protect jobs where businesses are facing lower demand over the winter months due to coronavirus (COVID-19).
Under the scheme, which will run for six months, the government will contribute towards the wages of employees who are working fewer than normal hours due to decreased demand.
You will continue to pay the wages for the hours your staff work. For the hours not worked, you and the government will each pay one third of their usual wages (capped at £697.92 per month). You will need to meet your share of the pay for unworked hours and all your National Insurance contributions and statutory pension contributions, from your own funds. This means that employees will receive at least two thirds of their usual wages for the hours not worked.
To be eligible, employees must:
- be registered on your PAYE payroll on or before 23 September 2020. This means a Real Time Information (RTI) submission notifying payment in respect of that employee must have been made to HMRC on or before 23 September 2020
- work at least 33% of their usual hours. The government will consider whether to increase this minimum hours threshold after the first three months of the scheme.
Further eligibility criteria is available on GOV.UK by searching 'Job Support Scheme factsheet'.
The Job Support Scheme will be open to employers across the UK even if you have not previously applied under the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS) which closes on 31 October.
The Job Support Scheme will start from 1 November and you will be able to claim in December. Grants will be paid on a monthly basis.
The scheme will operate in addition to the Job Retention Bonus. You and your employees can benefit from both schemes in order to help protect viable jobs.
For information on what is covered by the grant, which employers and employees are eligible, and how to claim, search 'Job Support Scheme factsheet' on GOV.UK.
Extension to the reduced rate of VAT for Hospitality and Tourism
The government has extended the temporary reduced rate of VAT (5%) to tourist attractions and goods and services supplied by the hospitality sector. This relief came into effect on 15 July 2020 and will now end on 31 March 2021 across the UK.
VAT Deferral New Payment Scheme
If you deferred payments that were due between 20 March and 30 June 2020, then these payments need to be made to HMRC by 31 March 2021. You can use the New Payment Scheme to spread these payments over equal instalments up to 31 March 2022. Alternatively, you can make payments as normal by 31 March 2021 or make Time To Pay arrangements with HMRC if you need more tailored support.
New Self Assessment Self-Serve Time To Pay Scheme
If you deferred paying your July 2020 Payment on Account, you will need to pay the deferred amount, in addition to any balancing payment and first 2020/21 Payment on Account, by 31 January 2021. This may be a larger payment than you usually pay in January.
If you're unable to pay your Self-Assessment (SA) bill in full by 31 January 2021, you can set up a Time to Pay payment plan of up to 12 months online without speaking to us. If you have SA tax debts of up to £30,000, you'll able to access this Time to Pay facility through GOV.UK and will get automatic and immediate approval. If your SA debts are over £30,000, or you need longer than 12 months to repay your debt in full, you will still be able to use our Time to Pay arrangement by calling HMRC.
Other business support schemes:
Changes to CJRS – what you need to do from 1 October
From 1 October, HMRC will pay 60% of usual wages up to a cap of £1,875 per month for the hours furloughed employees do not work.
You will continue to pay your furloughed employees at least 80% of their usual wages for the hours they do not work, up to a cap of £2,500 per month. You will need to fund the difference between this and the CJRS grant yourself.
The caps are proportional to the hours not worked. For example, if your employee is furloughed for half their usual hours in October, you are entitled to claim 60% of their usual wages for the hours they do not work, up to £937.50 (half of £1,875 cap). You must still pay your employee at least 80% of their usual wages for the hours they don’t work, so for someone only working half their usual hours you’d need to pay them up to £1,250 (half of £2,500 cap), funding the remaining portion yourself. For help with calculations, search ‘Calculate how much you can claim using the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme’ on GOV.UK.
You’ll also continue to pay your furloughed employees' National Insurance and pension contributions from your own funds.

24 Sep 2020
A new Jobs Support Scheme will be launched for employees working at least a third of their normal hours, who are being paid for that as normal. The government and employers will jointly increase their wages to cover two-thirds of their lost pay and the employee will keep their job
All small and medium-sized businesses are eligible, but larger businesses must show their turnover has fallen during the crisis. Employers can use it even if they have not previous used the furlough scheme it replaces
It will run for six months from November
The existing grant for self-employed people is being extended on similar terms to the Jobs Support Scheme
A “pay as you grow” scheme was announced for businesses, allowing them to extend their bounce back loans from six to 10 years, reducing their payments
Businesses can also move to interest-only payments or suspend repayments for six months if they are "in real trouble". Credit ratings will be unaffected
The government guarantee on Coronavirus Business Interruption Loans will be extended to 10 years and a new successor loan guarantee programme will be announced in January
The temporary reduction of VAT from 20% to 5% for some sectors will remain in place until 31 March 2021
Courtesy www.bbc.co.uk

24 Sep 2020
How the scheme works
You can use the Kickstart Scheme to create new 6-month job placements for young people who are currently on Universal Credit and at risk of long-term unemployment.
The job placements should support the participants to develop the skills and experience they need to find work after completing the scheme.
The Kickstart Scheme is available in England, Scotland and Wales.
What funding is available
Funding is available for:
- 100% of the relevant National Minimum Wage for 25 hours a week
- associated employer National Insurance contributions
- employer minimum automatic enrolment contributions
There is also £1500 per job placement available for setup costs, support and training.
If you are applying on behalf of a group of employers, you can get £300 of funding for each job placement to support with the associated administrative costs of bringing together these employers.
How to get the funding
Funding is available following a successful application process. Applications must be for a minimum of 30 job placements. If you are unable to offer this many job placements, you can find someone to apply on behalf of a group of employers to reach the minimum number.
Find out how you can represent a group of employers.
Who can apply for funding
Any organisation, regardless of size, can apply for funding.
The job placements created with Kickstart funding must be new jobs. They must not:
- replace existing or planned vacancies
- cause existing employees or contractors to lose or reduce their employment
The roles you are applying for must be:
- a minimum of 25 hours per week, for 6 months
- paid at least the National Minimum Wage for their age group
- should not require people to undertake extensive training before they begin the job placement
Each application should include how you will help the participants to develop their skills and experience, including:
- support to look for long-term work, including career advice and setting goals
- support with CV and interview preparations
- supporting the participant with basic skills, such as attendance, timekeeping and teamwork
Once a job placement is created, it can be taken up by a second person once the first successful applicant has completed their 6-month term.
How to apply
If you’re creating fewer than 30 job placements
If your organisation is creating fewer than 30 job placements, you cannot apply directly. You must find someone to apply on your behalf.
Other organisations could include:
- similar employers
- local authorities
- trade bodies
- registered charities
Find out more about becoming a representative for a group of employers.
You can contact your local or national Kickstart Scheme employer contact for help finding a someone who can support your involvement in the Kickstart Scheme.
Other help you can get
Kickstart is not an apprenticeship, but participants may move on to an apprenticeship at any time during, or after their job placement.

23 Sep 2020
SMTA's Chief Executive, Sandy Burgess has written to every cabinet secretary within the Scottish Government requsting urgent clarification on face coverings for the motor trade and when using demonstration vehicles. An update will follow.

17 Sep 2020
The Government is working on a hydrogen strategy, to be published next year, which will “deliver a world leading hydrogen market”, a top civil servant has said.
During an Environmental Audit Committee session yesterday (September 10), Business Secretary Alok Sharma confirmed that the forthcoming energy white paper will include plans for hydrogen and that will be followed by a detailed strategy early next year – ahead of the UK hosting the 26th UN Climate Change Conference (COP 26) in Glasgow in November.
Julian Critchlow, Director General for Energy Transformation and Clean Growth at the Department for Business Energy and Industrial Strategy (BEIS), said that the strategy will bring together the supply and demand side, and answered criticism that the UK is lagging behind other countries, such as Germany, Japan and Australia, in hydrogen development.
He said: “Far from being behind we believe that we’re actually putting the detailed and specific policy levers in place to be able to deliver a world leading hydrogen market.”
However, for the UK to achieve its goal of net zero greenhouse gas emissions by 2050 it will need to achieve hydrogen capacity of about 270 terawatt-hours, up from 27-terawatt-hours today.
Hydrogen to have ‘big role’ in decarbonising transport
Critchlow said that from a transport point of view, the Government sees hydrogen “having a big role”, especially for heavier vehicles.
He highlighted the £23 million programme with OLEV, which is looking at funding vehicles and refuelling stations, and the ultra-low emission bus scheme for hydrogen buses, along with the Prime Minister’s commitment for 4,000 new zero emission buses.
Business leaders have been campaigning for the Government to clarify its future hydrogen strategy and believe more needs to be done.
Jonny Goldstone, MD of Green Tomato Cars, one of the businesses backing the Hydrogen Strategy Now campaign, said that businesses need confidence in the development of the infrastructure.
Currently there are six hydrogen refuelling stations across the South East, with only one of those located in East London.
Goldstone, who has hydrogen, electric and hybrid vehicle in his 250-strong company-owned fleet, said: “We want London to lose its reputation as the ‘Big Smoke’.
“Our hydrogen vehicles emit zero CO2 emissions, whereas other vehicles are pumping out high volumes of carbon emissions every day. A widespread take-up of zero-emission hydrogen and battery electric vehicles is essential to improving air quality across the capital.
“We have 50 hydrogen cars and we’re looking to expand that number. But we want to have the confidence that the infrastructure will be there to allow us to operate consistently and efficiently for our drivers and customers.
“The refuelling network needs to expand to enable demand for hydrogen vehicles to increase, which in turn will lead to manufacturers producing more and greater customer uptake.”
Article courtesy www.smarttransport.org.uk

14 Sep 2020
Monday 14 September, 2020 With just 15 weeks before the Brexit transition period expires, European automotive industry leaders have today joined forces to call for the EU and UK to secure an ambitious free trade agreement (FTA) without further delay. Negotiators on both sides must now pull out all the stops to avoid 'no deal' at the end of the transition, which according to new calculations would cost the pan-European automotive sector some €110 billion in lost trade over the next five years,1 putting jobs at risk in a sector that supports 14.6 million livelihoods, representing one in 15 of EU and UK jobs.2
The lead organisations representing vehicle and parts makers across the EU, the European Automobile Manufacturers Association (ACEA) and the European Association of Automotive Suppliers (CLEPA), along with 21 national associations, including the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT), German Association of the Automotive Industry (VDA), Comité des Constructeurs Français d'Automobiles (CCFA) and La Plateforme automobile (PFA), are today warning that the sector could face severe repercussions. Indeed, economies and jobs on both sides of the channel are at risk of a second devastating hit in the shape of no deal coming on top of around €100 billion worth of production lost so far this year due to the coronavirus crisis.3
Without a deal in place by 31 December, both sides would be forced to trade under so-called World Trade Organisation (WTO) non-preferential rules, including a 10% tariff on cars and up to 22% on vans and trucks.4 Such tariffs – far higher than the small margins of most manufacturers – would almost certainly need to be passed on to consumers, making vehicles more expensive, reducing choice, and impacting demand. Furthermore, automotive suppliers and their products will be hit by tariffs. This will make production more expensive or will lead to more imports of parts from other competitive countries.
Before the coronavirus crisis hit, EU and UK production of motor vehicles was running at 18.5 million units a year.5 This year some 3.6 million units have already been lost across the sector due to the pandemic.6 New calculations suggest that, for cars and vans alone, a reduction in demand resulting from a 10% WTO tariff could wipe some three million units from EU and UK factory output over the next five years, with losses worth €52.8 billion to UK plants and €57.7 billion to those based across the EU.7 Suppliers would also suffer from these changes.
This combined loss in trade value would seriously harm revenues for a sector that is one of Europe's most valuable assets, employing millions of people and generating shared prosperity for all, with a combined trade surplus of €74 billion with the rest of the world in 2019. Collectively, the EU27 and UK automotive sector is responsible for 20% of global motor vehicle production and spends some €60.8 billion on innovation per year, making it Europe's largest R&D investor.8
Achieving an ambitious EU-UK FTA with automotive-specific provisions is critical to the European automotive industry's future success. Any deal should include zero tariffs and quotas, appropriate rules of origin for both internal combustion engine and alternatively fuelled vehicles, plus components and powertrains, and a framework to avoid regulatory divergence.
Crucially, businesses need detailed information about the agreed trading conditions they will face from 1 January 2021 to make final preparations. This, combined with targeted support and an appropriate a phase-in period that allows for greater use of foreign materials for a limited period of time, will ensure businesses are able to cope with the end of the transition period.
Eric-Mark Huitema, ACEA Director General, said: "The stakes are high for the EU auto industry – we absolutely must have an ambitious EU-UK trade agreement in place by January. Otherwise our sector – already reeling from the COVID crisis – will be hit hard by a double whammy."
Sigrid de Vries, CLEPA Secretary General, said: "A 'no deal' Brexit would disrupt the integrated automotive supply chain and hit industry at a critical moment. The impact will be felt far beyond the bilateral trade streams alone, translating into a loss of jobs and investment capacity. The automotive sector is the EU's largest private R&D investor with €60 billion invested each year. We need a deal that maintains the sector's global competitiveness."
Mike Hawes, SMMT Chief Executive, said, "These figures paint a bleak picture of the devastation that would follow a 'no deal' Brexit. The shock of tariffs and other trade barriers would compound the damage already dealt by a global pandemic and recession, putting businesses and livelihoods at risk. Our industries are deeply integrated so we urge all parties to recognise the needs of this vital provider of jobs and economic prosperity, and pull out every single stop to secure an ambitious free trade deal now, before it is too late."
Hildegard Müller, President of VDA, said: "The automotive industry needs stable and reliable framework conditions. It would be to the great disadvantage of both sides if the UK withdrawal were to end with the application of tariffs in mutual trade. This would jeopardise closely linked value chains and possibly make them unprofitable. Our member companies have more than 100 production sites in the United Kingdom. We hope that the EU and the UK will continue their close partnership - with a comprehensive free trade agreement."
Thierry COGNET, President of CCFA, said, "A 'no deal' situation on 1 January 2021 would be particularly challenging for manufacturers. What we need from negotiators, in an economic context already very affected by the COVID crisis, is a substantial deal protecting us from tariffs, quotas and regulatory divergence."
The 23 Automotive Association signatories include:- ACAROM – Romanian Association of Automobile Builders acarom.ro
- ACEA – European Automobile Manufacturers Association acea.be
- ACS – Automotive Cluster of Slovenia acs-giz.si/en
- AFIA – Portuguese Manufacturers Association for the Automotive Industry afia.pt
- AIA – Czech Automotive Industry Association autosap.cz
- ANFIA – Italian Association of the Automobile Industry anfia.it
- AUTIG – Danish Automotive Trade & Industry Federation autig.dk
- BIL SWEDEN – Swedish Association of Automobile Manufacturers and Importers bilsweden.se
- CCFA – Committee of French Automobile Manufacturers ccfa.fr
- CLEPA – European Association of Automotive Suppliers clepa.eu
- FEBIAC – Belgian Federation of Automobile and Motorcycle Industries febiac.be
- FKG – Scandinavian Automotive Supplier Association fkg.se
- FFOE – Austrian Association of the Automotive Industry fahrzeugindustrie.at
- ILEA – Luxembourg Automotive Suppliers Association ilea.lu/
- MGE – Hungarian Vehicle Importers Association mge.hu
- PFA – French Association of the Automotive Industry pfa-auto.fr/
- RAI – Dutch Association for Mobility Industry raivereniging.nl
- SDCM – Polish Association of Automotive Parts Distributors and Producers sdcm.pl
- SERNAUTO – Spanish Association of Automotive Suppliers sernauto.es
- SIMI - Society of the Irish Motor Industry simi.ie/en
- SMMT – Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders smmt.co.uk
- VDA – German Association of the Automotive Industry vda.de
- ZAP – Automotive Industry Association of the Slovak Republic zapsr.sk
Press Release courtesy SMMT

07 Sep 2020
Brussels, 04/09/2020
While lockdown measures are lifted in Europe, the pandemic is still affecting our daily lives, our health, and our economy but also our industry. Indeed, according to ACEA, in June 2020, registrations of new passenger cars in the EU encountered a drop of 22.3% compared to the same month last year.
The lifting of lockdown measures and dealerships/workshops re opening their doors does not seem to be followed by consumer demand,
All EU markets continue to post significant declines. Looking at the first half of the year, among the four major EU markets, Spain saw the biggest decline (-50.9%) so far this year, followed by Italy (-46.1%), and Germany (-34.5%).
While the French market, thanks to the new incentives to stimulate sales of low-emission vehicles that were introduced by the French government at the beginning of June, has known an improvement this summer, the results of the first eight months of 2020 show, at this stage, a decline of almost 32% of the French passenger car market. A similar drop has been registered for the commercial and industrial market.
ACEA is forecasting a drop of 25% for passenger car registration for 2020.
The coming months will be decisive, the COVID-19 crisis is also impacting our habits of consumption and our behavior in a general way. Hence, presenting an opportunity for main actors to mobilize and become actors of new mobility and new services.
“We believe that political and economic support, both at EU and national levels are needed in order to ensure that our sector can survive and recover – thereby protecting jobs, services to the consumers and future investments” stated CECRA’s president Jean-Charles Herrenschmidt

02 Sep 2020
Thomson Cooper Accountants have shared their business survey results with us on 'How is the pandemic affecting local businesses?'
You can view their survey results here.
For more information please visit their website www.thomsoncooper.com/news/covid-19-business-support-hub

02 Sep 2020
Update from HMRC:
From 1 September HMRC will now pay 70% of usual wages up to a cap of £2,187.50 per month for the hours furloughed employees do not work.
What you need to do now
- Continue to pay your furloughed employees at least 80% of their usual wages for the hours they do not work, up to a cap of £2,500 per month. You will need to fund the difference between this and the CJRS grant yourself.
- The caps are proportional to the hours not worked. For example, if your employee is furloughed for half their usual hours in September, you are entitled to claim 70% of their usual wages for the hours they do not work up to £1,093.75 (50% of the £2,187.50 cap).
- Continue to pay furloughed employees’ National Insurance and pension contributions from your own funds.
Make sure your data is right
It’s important that you provide all the data we need to process your claim. Payment of your grant may be at risk or delayed if you submit a claim that is incomplete or incorrect, so we want to help you get this right. We will get in touch if we see any employee data missing from your previous claims.
Claiming for 100 or more employees: use our template
It’s really important to use the right file type when uploading your data. The easiest way to ensure your file is in the right format is to use our template. To find it search ‘download a template if you're claiming for 100 or more employees through the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme’ on GOV.UK.
If your file is in the wrong format – for example, an incorrect file type or too many or too few columns – it may be rejected. If your file is rejected, you’ll receive a message to say it has not been accepted and your claim will not be processed.
Fraudulent claims
We have started to investigate CJRS claims where fraud is suspected. We will be paying particular attention to claims that differ from the PAYE data we hold and where we have received reports of fraud. Employees are encouraged to report their employer if they have reason to believe that they are abusing the scheme. They can do this anonymously if they prefer. For more information go to GOV.UK and search 'report fraud to HMRC'.
More information
Guidance and live webinars offering you more support on changes to the scheme and how they impact you are available to book online – go to GOV.UK and search 'help and support if your business is affected by coronavirus'.
Our phone lines and webchat are still very busy, so the quickest way to find the support you may need is on GOV.UK. This will leave our phone lines and webchat service open for those who need them most.
Protect yourself from scams
Stay vigilant about scams, which may mimic government messages as a way of appearing authentic and unthreatening. Search 'scams' on GOV.UK for information on how to recognise genuine HMRC contact. You can also forward suspicious emails claiming to be from HMRC to phishing@hmrc.gov.uk and texts to 60599.

26 Aug 2020
Do you have a Light Vehicle Maintenance and Repair Apprentice or perhaps have had one in the past or are maybe looking to take one on? We need your help to make sure that the qualifications your Apprentice takes are fit for purpose to do their job.
The IMI is reviewing the SVQ and Diploma Light Vehicle Maintenance and Repair Qualifications in Scotland at SCQF Level 5 and 7. In order to complete the process we’re looking for Light Vehicle employers to feed into the review. The more input we have the better the outcome of the process.
It’s an incredibly important task, as the automotive landscape is changing rapidly with new technologies emerging, so this an opportunity to make sure qualifications reflect the industry’s changing landscape and that they are future proofed for employer needs over the next few years.
We are looking for employers who would like to take part in an Expert Working Group to help review these qualifications. The main purpose of the group will be to review and give thoughts on the qualification structure, content plus evidence requirements and reach a consensus on any proposed changes.
It will involve taking part in two Expert Working Group meetings; one at the beginning of the project to look at initial thoughts and a second following our wider consultation phase to agree the final changes.
The first meeting will be held on Wednesday 16th September 2020 from 9:30am to 1pm. The second meeting is proposed to take place the week commencing the 30th November, but will be confirmed at a later date. Previously we’ve always held Expert Working Group meetings face-to-face, but given the current circumstances with COVID-19 we’ll be holding these remotely via Zoom or Microsoft Teams. Details on how to join the remote meetings will be given in advance of the meeting.
However if you would like to have your thoughts heard but are unable to commit to the Expert Working Group meetings we will also be holding wider online consultation. This’ll be done via an online survey or telephone discussions for anyone who would prefer to give feedback verbally. The wider consultation is planned to take place between 12th October and 6th November.
If you would like to take part in the Expert Working Group or the wider consultation please email laurah@theimi.org.uk.

24 Aug 2020
The First Minister has updated the Scottish Parliament today on the latest review of the COVID-19 restrictions.
Scotland is to remain in Phase 3 of the route map out of lockdown and indicative dates have been given for the reopening of further sectors of the economy in August and September.
The publication can be viewed here

19 Aug 2020
Update from HMRC:
HMRC are reminding you about changes to the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS) from 1 September and what this means for you.
What you need to do from 1 September
- From 1 September CJRS will pay 70% of usual wages up to a cap of £2,187.50 per month for the hours furloughed employees do not work.
- You will still need to pay your furloughed employees at least 80% of their usual wages for the hours they do not work, up to a cap of £2,500 per month. You will need to fund the difference between this and the CJRS grant yourself.
- The caps are proportional to the hours not worked. For example, if your employee is furloughed for half their usual hours in September, you are entitled to claim 70% of their usual wages for the hours they do not work up to £1,093.75 (50% of the £2,187.50 cap).
- You will continue to have to pay furloughed employees’ National Insurance (NI) and pension contributions from your own funds.
Further guidance and live webinars offering you more support on changes to the scheme and how they impact you are available to book online – go to GOV.UK and search 'help and support if your business is affected by coronavirus'.
We are still receiving very high demand on our phone lines and webchat, so the quickest way to find the support you may need is on GOV.UK. This will leave our phone lines and webchat service open for those who need them most.
Making sure your data is right
It’s important that you provide all the data we need to process your claim. Payment of your grant may be at risk or delayed if you submit a claim that is incomplete or incorrect, so we want to help you get this right. We will get in touch if we see any employee data missing from your previous claims.
You can find everything you’ll need to help make your claim on GOV.UK, including a useful calculator and guidance on the data you need to provide and the format you need to use to ensure your claim is accepted. Search for ‘claim for wages through the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme’.
If you’re claiming for 100 or more employees, please download and use our template as this will help you make sure your data is right – search 'download a template if you're claiming for 100 or more employees through the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme' on GOV.UK.
Finding previous CJRS guidance
We’ve recently updated our CJRS guidance to make it easier for you to find the most relevant, up-to-date information.
If you need to check older guidance – for example, information for your claims ending on or before 30 June – you can search 'check if you can claim for your employees' wages through the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme' or 'check which employees you can put on furlough to use the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme' on GOV.UK. A link to previous guidance can be found in boxes at the top of these pages.

17 Aug 2020
Used car pricing in the UK was the strongest in Europe in July, new data has revealed.
Used car prices rose on average by 1.7 per cent helped by a 22 per cent shortfall in used stock in the market compared with April 1, Indicata’s latest report shows.
Sales fell by 1.8 per cent in July as a result of this stock shortage compared with a 3.7 per cent rise in June.
Consumer appetite for electric and hybrid cars continued, said the firm, with sales up 53.5 per cent and 51.2 per cent year-on-year respectively, while six-nine-year old used cars continue to be the most popular.
Prices of electric cars in July rose by £2,525 to £13,688 and hybrids by £1,461 to £16,156 compared with Q2, although supply was very limited.
In contrast to many other European markets, Indicata found luxury cars and SUVs are the UK’s strongest market segments experiencing a 11.5 per cent and 11 per cent increase year-on-year.
‘July was a very busy month with demand exceeding supply,’ said Indicata group sales director, Jon Mitchell.
‘There are signs from some of our vendor customers that supply is starting to increase coming into August. With the new plate change in September we should also see new part exchange stock coming into the market.
‘Despite that increase in supply prices look as though they will be strong during the summer, but we will have to wait to see how economic conditions will impact prices during the autumn.’
The average asking price in July for a Peugeot 2008, up to one year old and in Allure, petrol, manual trim was £15,368 – £2,550 or 19.9 per cent more than in June.
Used car prices are expected to take a turn downwards, though.
Article courtesy - Car Dealer Magazine
cardealermagazine.co.uk/publish/used-car-pricing-in-the-uk-was-the-strongest-in-europe-in-july-as-demand-exceeded-supply

13 Aug 2020
Update from SMTA's Chief Executive, Sandy Burgess:
SMTA Pledge to “continue the fight” over unfair and unjust Covid Retail Grant refusals!
Below, you will find links to the various response notes associated with our recent review of the legal opportunity to challenge the Scottish Government with regards to their “discrimination” towards our sector by excluding repair workshops from obtaining the grant simply because they do not sell cars or vans!
Regrettably you will note that the legal counsel we enlisted has after extensive research, has advised us that there would be no benefit from taking such a case to court, he does however still maintain that the findings are at best unpalatable and at worst wholly unfair, I, for one agree with the latter. He further suggests that we have to maintain our lobbying efforts to the Scottish Government and their 32 councils and with this in mind, I have been in contact with the Labour Party who have agreed to put several Freedom of Information requests into the Scottish Government, these are;
1. Please advise (a) how many mechanic garages have applied for business support grants. (b) how many of these have applications have been successful. (c) the total sum of payments to date.
2. Please advise what determination the local authority has made as to whether or not mechanic garages are eligible for support, and on what basis this decision has been made.
We will maintain our position on this and keep the fight going for as long as it is possible, I understand that this outcome will disappoint you at this very difficult time however you can be assured of the SMTA’s commitment on this matter.
On another note please keep an eye out for an important announcement early next week regarding challenging this year’s rates bill!
Note 1 - Legal Reply
Note 2 - Policy Note
Note 3 - Non Domestic Rates Regs 2020
Note 4 - Local Government Finance Circular

12 Aug 2020
Cox Automotive:
This month:
- Optimism remains in the industry that demand within the used market will continue
- Desirable retail stock remains in high demand
- Many retailers are reporting that they are pleasantly surprised with the market’s performance

11 Aug 2020
SMTA has had confirmation today from the Scottish Government that there is NO change to the existing regulations regarding the motor trade wearing masks. They have however, advised that face shields no longer meet the definition of a 'face covering' as they do not provide adequate protection against transmission.
The guidelines for SMTA members remains the same:
ENSURE THAT THERE IS A SAFE TWO METRE DISTANCE BETWEEN YOU AND YOUR CUSTOMERS AT ALL TIMES, OR INSTALL A SAFETY CLEAR BARRIER BETWEEN YOUR STAFF AND THE VISITORS TO YOUR SITE.

11 Aug 2020
DVSA have produced some images for Facebook, Twitter and your email signature for to urge consumers to 'Beat the Rush' and book their MOT for September and October early to avoid the rush.
Campaign Toolkit
Email footer image
Facebook post image
Twitter post image

10 Aug 2020
Update from HMRC:
We’re writing to let you know that we have published additional information on the Job Retention Bonus, including details on how to check if you’re eligible and what you need to do now to get ready to claim.
You can find this by going to GOV.UK and searching ‘Job Retention Bonus – Policy Statement’.
Job Retention Bonus
Employers will be able to claim a one-off payment of £1,000 for every employee they have previously received a grant for under the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS), and who remains continuously employed through to the end of January 2021.
To be eligible, the employee must have received earnings in November, December and January, and must have been paid an average of at least £520 per month, and a total of at least £1,560 across the three months.
As the employer, you will be able to claim the bonus after you have filed PAYE information for January 2021, and the bonus will be paid from February 2021. More detailed guidance, including how you can claim the bonus online, will be available by the end of September.
What you need to do now
If you intend to claim the Job Retention Bonus you must:
- ensure all your employee records are up to date;
- accurately report employees’ details and wages on the Full Payment Submission (FPS) through the Real Time Information (RTI) reporting system;
- make sure all of your CJRS claims have been accurately submitted and you have told us about any changes needed (for example if you’ve received too much or too little).
Reminder of changes to CJRS
From 1 August 2020 CJRS continues to provide grants for furloughed employees but no longer funds employers’ National Insurance (NI) and pensions contributions. You now have to make these payments from your own resources for all employees, whether furloughed or not. Our guidance has been updated to reflect these changes.
Further guidance and live webinars offering more support on changes to the scheme and how they impact you are available to book online – go to GOV.UK and search 'help and support if your business is affected by coronavirus'.
Please only contact us if you can’t find the information you need from GOV.UK. This will leave our phone lines and webchat service open for those who need them most.
Making sure your data is right
It’s important that you provide the data we need to process your claim. Payment of your grant may be at risk or delayed if you submit a claim that is incomplete or incorrect. We may be in touch to request employee data if it’s missing from your previous claims.
National Insurance numbers
You need to provide a National Insurance number (NINO) for all employees as part of your CJRS claim. The only exception is in the very limited circumstances where an employee genuinely does not have a NINO, for example if they are under 16 years old.
If you are claiming for an employee whose NINO you don’t currently know, you can check their number by searching GOV.UK for 'Check a National Insurance Number using basic PAYE Tools'.
We can no longer accept claims for fewer than 100 employees by phone where you do not have all employee NINO's unless the employees you are claiming for genuinely do not have these.
Claimed too much in error?
If you have claimed too much for a CJRS grant and have not repaid it, you must notify us and repay the money by the latest of whichever date applies below:
- 90 days after receiving the CJRS money you’re not entitled to
- 90 days from when circumstances changed so that you were no longer entitled to keep the CJRS grant
- 20 October 2020 if you received CJRS money you’re not entitled to or if your circumstances changed on or before 22 July.
If you do not do this, you may have to pay a penalty. We do understand mistakes happen, particularly in these challenging times, and will not seek out innocent errors and small mistakes for compliance action. We will act, however, against anyone who deliberately sets out to defraud the system or claims money they aren’t entitled to.
How to let us know about claiming too much
If you have received more than you are entitled to, you can let us know as part of your next online claim without needing to call us – the system will prompt you to add details on if you have received too much. For more information, search for ‘if you claim too much or not enough from the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme’ on GOV.UK.
If you received too much and do not plan to submit further claims – or you have claimed less than you were entitled to – please contact us by searching 'Contact HMRC' on GOV.UK.

10 Aug 2020
From the Scottish Government:
This guidance explains the risk assessment process in relation to the specific risk of COVID-19 to individuals in the workplace. In particular, this is relevant to those staff members who are returning to work after shielding, those who are returning to normal duties after COVID-19 related restrictions, those who are returning to the workplace after working from home or anyone who has a concern about a particular vulnerability to COVID-19. There are three things which affect
the occupational health risk from COVID-19:
• Prevalence of COVID-19 in Scotland
• Workplace considerations to protect staff from COVID-19
• Personal characteristics that affect outcome from COVID-19
Click here to open the risk assessment guidance

05 Aug 2020
The Scottish Government has today (Wednesday 5 August) published responses to the Advisory Group on Economic Recovery (AGER) report and the Enterprise and Skills Strategic Board (ESSB) report.
Our responses include targeted measures to build a stronger, fairer and greener economic future for Scotland in the wake of coronavirus (COVID-19).
The AGER response also confirms that we have accepted recommendations from the Enterprise and Skills Strategic Board on enhanced partnership working with Industry Leadership Groups.
The responses can be viewed here:

05 Aug 2020

05 Aug 2020
Update courtesy Just Employment Law: www.justemploymentlaw.co.uk The Chancellor of the Exchequer’s “Plan for Jobs” which can be accessed here, further information has now been released on the Government’s Job Retention Bonus. The Government has confirmed that the Job Retention Bonus is a one-off payment of £1,000 (which will be taxable) which employers can claim for all employees, including office holders, company directors, agency workers and those employed by umbrella companies, who meet the following criteria:
In addition, the Government have confirmed that claims for the Job Retention Bonus can be made in respect of:
The Government has confirmed that employers will be able to claim the bonus through the gov.uk website from February 2021. More guidance is expected on how to claim by the end of September 2020. In the meantime, if you intend to claim the bonus in respect of your employees, you should ensure:
More information on the Job Retention Bonus can be accessed here. If you would like to discuss the above, or you require support or advice on any other employment law matters, please do not hesitate to contact a member of the team on 0141 331 5150. |

29 Jul 2020
Update from HMRC:
We’re writing to remind you about changes to the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS) from 31 July and what to do if you have claimed too much.
What you need to do before 31 July
- Submit your CJRS claim for periods ending on or before 30 June 2020 by 31 July 2020. This is the last date you can make those claims. You need to have made a claim at any point on or before 31 July to be able to make a claim for future months.
- Amend your previous claims to add any additional employees you may have missed off in error. After 31 July you will not be able to add any new employees for periods ending on or before 30 June.
What you need to do from 1 August
- From 1 August 2020 the scheme will no longer fund employers’ National Insurance (NI) and pensions contributions. You will have to make these payments from your own resources for all employees, whether furloughed or not.
Live webinars offering more support on changes to the scheme and how they impact you are available to book online – go to GOV.UK and search 'help and support if your business is affected by coronavirus'.
Please check GOV.UK and join one of our webinars if you need further help. This will leave our phone lines open for those who need them most.
Make sure your data is right
It’s important that you provide the data we need to process your claim. Payment of your grant may be at risk or delayed if you submit a claim that is incomplete or incorrect.
Claimed too much in error?
If you have claimed too much for a CJRS grant and have not repaid it, you must notify us and repay the money by the latest of whichever date applies below:
- 90 days of receiving the CJRS money you’re not entitled to
- 90 days of when circumstances changed so that you were no longer entitled to keep the CJRS grant
- 20 October 2020 if you received CJRS money you’re not entitled to, or if your circumstances changed, on or before 20 July.
If you do not do this, you may have to pay a penalty.
How to let us know about claiming too much
You can let us know as part of your next online claim without needing to call us – the system will prompt you to add details on if you have received too much.
If you received too much and do not plan to submit further claims – or you have claimed less than you were entitled to – please contact us by searching ‘Contact HMRC' on GOV.UK.
We are supporting our customers while tackling serious fraud and criminal attacks. We understand mistakes happen, particularly in these challenging times, and will not seek out innocent errors and small mistakes for compliance action. For more information, search for ‘if you claim too much or not enough from the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme’ on GOV.UK.
Claiming for 100 or more employees?
Please use our standard template to submit your employees’ details. It is important that you submit the correct data (including National Insurance numbers) in the correct format.
You can find the template on GOV.UK by searching ‘Job Retention Scheme template download’.
Looking for help to work out your claim?
Please use our online calculator to help you calculate your next claim.
You can find this and guidance on how to use it by searching ‘calculate how much you can claim using the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme’ on GOV.UK.

23 Jul 2020

21 Jul 2020
Over the last year, DVSA's staff have worked hard to help everyone stay safe on Britain's roads. Please see below a letter from Gareth Llewellyn, DVSA Chief Executive, presenting the ‘We are DVSA: Annual Review 2019 to 2020’.
The review demonstrates we achieved all our Business Plan objectives this year, but, along with the rest of the world, we’ve been affected by the coronavirus (COVID-19) pandemic. It also sets out the significant improvements we have made to our services, contributing to our vision of safer drivers, safer vehicles and safer journeys for all.
We recognise that stakeholder engagement, collaboration and continuous improvement are essential to road safety. Because of coronavirus, the future is not as certain as it could be, but we look forward to working with you during 2020 to 2021. We will learn from the impact of the pandemic and review our 5-year strategy in its light. Together, we will continue to keep people safe on Britain’s roads.
Dear stakeholder,
We are DVSA: Annual Review 2019 to 2020
Over the last year, DVSA's staff have worked hard to help everyone stay safe on Britain's
roads. I am delighted to present the ‘We are DVSA: Annual Review 2019 to 2020’, which
demonstrates we achieved all our Business Plan objectives this year, but, along with the
rest of the world, we’ve been affected by the coronavirus (COVID-19) pandemic. It also
sets out the significant improvements we have made to our services, contributing to our
vision of safer drivers, safer vehicles and safer journeys for all.
The coronavirus (COVID-19) pandemic has been an unprecedented challenge, resulting in
many changes to our way of life. In March we took the difficult decision to suspend most
of DVSA’s services, in line with public health guidance. Our priority over the past three
months has been to keep people safe, whilst still providing a critical worker testing service
to support the national emergency response.
Many people have lost their lives or their loved ones to coronavirus and, to them, we
extend our heartfelt sympathy. This is a more muted than usual celebration of what DVSA
has achieved. But we want to acknowledge our colleagues’ great work in 2019 to 2020,
and after the pandemic hit in March 2020.
Coronavirus response
We had to act quickly to keep colleagues and customers safe, while making sure we met
critical workers’ needs. You can read more about how we have responded to COVID-19
on pages 48 and 49. But, in summary we:
• suspended the driving test for most candidates
• set up a system for critical workers to book tests in all categories
• conducted driving tests for NHS and care workers, allocating driving examiners who
were medically fit and who had volunteered to support the national response
• prioritised special ambulance vehicle tests to support the NHS response
• granted MOT extensions on all vehicles
• continued to protect you from unsafe vehicles, while maintaining social distancing
As part of the planning to restart our services, we:
• worked with national stakeholder groups on how to safely restart our services.
Together, we gathered customer feedback, which has helped us to plan how to
return to normal levels of service
• worked with Trade Unions to address staff concerns
• kept customers and staff informed through a detailed communications plan
Significant achievements
Coronavirus is the biggest and most complex challenge the country has faced in a
generation. However, before its onset in March, DVSA was working hard throughout 2019
to 2020 to meet the commitments in our 5-year strategy. We have presented our most
significant achievements in ‘We are DVSA: Annual Review 2019 to 2020’.
Some of the highlights include:
• We digitised the practical driving test
We modernised the way driving examiners conduct and record a practical driving
test, with the development of the Driving Examiner Service (DES) app. The new
app provides a quicker and more accurate digital process on the examiner’s iPad.
• Rollout of the vehicle testing app for testing at ATFs
We developed and rolled-out a vehicle testing app to allow our vehicle standards
assessors (VSAs) to record all bus, lorry and coach tests digitally.
• National Automatic number plate recognition Service
Automatic number plate recognition (ANPR) uses cameras to capture and record
the registration and image of a vehicle. In 2019 we began to look at the value of
joining the National ANPR Service (NAS), with its 10,000 cameras. We saw NAS
bring real benefits to DVSA’s enforcement, with the wider camera infrastructure
allowing us to tackle non-compliance more effectively.
• We won an International Road Safety Award
Ridefree is the award-winning enhanced compulsory basic training course (CBT) for
completely new learner riders. We supported Highways England in its development.
All motorcycle training schools will have free access to this content.
• Our learning materials reached a huge audience
In partnership with The Stationery Office, we produce learning materials for drivers
and riders at all stages of their learning. Since we launched our Theory Test and
Highway Code apps, we’ve sold over 3 million.
This is my last Annual Review, as I had decided to step down as CEO in December. I
leave DVSA in very good hands – including those of our new Non-Executive Chair, Shrin
Honap. I will, of course, share news about my successor when I can.
We recognise that stakeholder engagement, collaboration and continuous improvement
are essential to road safety. Because of coronavirus, the future is not as certain as it could
be. But we look forward to working with you during 2020 to 2021. We will learn from the
impact of the pandemic and review our 5-year strategy in its light. Together, we will
continue to keep people safe on Britain’s roads.

21 Jul 2020
HMRC Update:
We’re writing to remind you about key dates for the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS) and actions you might need to take.
Key dates
- Submit your CJRS claim for periods ending on or before 30 June 2020 by 31 July 2020. This is the last date you can make those claims. You need to have made a claim at any point on or before 31 July to be able to make a claim for future months.
- From 1 August 2020 the scheme will no longer fund employers’ National Insurance (NI) and pensions contributions for furloughed employees. You will have to make these payments from your own resources.
- From 1 September 2020 you will have to start contributing to the wages of your furloughed employees. Grants will be for 70% of usual wages in September and 60% in October, but furloughed employees will continue to be entitled to receive at least 80% of their usual wages. You will have to make up the difference from your own resources.
Live webinars offering more support on changes to the scheme, and how they impact you, are available to book online – go to GOV.UK and search 'help and support if your business is affected by coronavirus'.
Please check GOV.UK and join one of our webinars if you need further help. This will leave our phone lines open for those who need them most.
Make sure your data is right
It’s important that you provide the data we need to process your claim. Payment of your grant may be at risk or delayed if you submit a claim that is incomplete or incorrect.
If you are claiming for 100 or more employees, please use our standard template to submit your employees’ details. It is important that you submit the correct data (including National Insurance numbers) in the correct format.
You can find this template by searching 'Job Retention Scheme template download' on GOV.UK.
More information about the Job Retention Bonus
We wrote to you recently about the introduction of the Job Retention Bonus – a one-off payment of £1,000 to employers who have claimed under CJRS for each furloughed employee who remains continuously employed until at least 31 January 2021.
More information about this scheme will be available on 31 July.
Incorrect claims
CJRS grants are to cover the costs of your furloughed employees' wages (and related payroll taxes, National Insurance and pension contributions until 31 July). We may withhold or recover grants if they are claimed based on dishonest or inaccurate information.
We’re contacting a number of employers at the moment to check that they have claimed the correct amount.
If you have made an incorrect claim that meant you claimed too much, you can let us know as part of your next online claim without needing to call us. If you have made an error and do not plan to submit further claims, or you have claimed less than you were entitled to, please contact us by searching 'Contact HMRC' on GOV.UK.

08 Jul 2020
The Scottish Government have confirmed the rules that will apply on Friday the 10th of July in a letter to the SMTA Chief Executive, Sandy Burgess. Commenting on the letter he stated "that it was encouraging to note that there is no requirement for our dealer staff to wear face masks if they are able to ensure that the two metre social distancing rules are adhered to, or that they are able to provide a physical barrier between the customers and the staff".
To keep it simple, ENSURE THAT THERE IS A SAFE TWO METRE DISTANCE BETWEEN YOU AND YOUR CUSTOMERS AT ALL TIMES, OR INSTALL A SAFETY CLEAR BARRIER BETWEEN YOUR STAFF AND THE VISITORS TO YOUR SITE.

30 Jun 2020

29 Jun 2020
- mandatory MOT tests for car, motorcycle and van owners in England, Scotland and Wales to be reintroduced to keep roads safe
- drivers encouraged to book a test in advance to ensure vehicles are in a roadworthy condition
- vehicle owners with an MOT due date before 1 August will still receive a 6-month exemption
Mandatory MOT testing is to be reintroduced from 1 August 2020 as COVID-19 restrictions are slowly lifted, Roads minister Baroness Vere has announced today (29 June 2020).
Due to the coronavirus outbreak, drivers were granted a 6-month exemption from MOT testing in March to help slow the spread of the virus. However, as restrictions are eased when safe to do so, all drivers whose car, motorcycle or van is due for an MOT test from 1 August will be required to get a test certificate to continue driving their vehicle.
MOT tests are important for road safety and ensure that vehicle parts, including tyres, seatbelts, brakes, lights and exhausts, are in proper working order.
Drivers with an MOT due date before 1 August will still receive a 6-month exemption from testing. However, all vehicles must continue to be properly maintained and kept in a roadworthy condition, and people are able to voluntarily get their MOT sooner should they wish, even if they are exempt from the legal requirement. Motorists can be prosecuted for driving an unsafe vehicle.
Roads Minister Baroness Vere said:
As people return to our roads, it is vital that motorists are able to keep their vehicles safe. That’s why as restrictions are eased, from 1 August MOT testing will again become mandatory.
Garages across the country are open and I urge drivers who are due for their MOT to book a test as soon they can.
Only some garages remained open to conduct essential services during the coronavirus outbreak, but now over 90% are open across the country. Testing capacity has already reached 70% of normal levels and is steadily increasing.
While exemptions are still available for vehicle owners with an MOT due date before 1 August, it is vital that drivers still take their vehicle to be checked if they notice something is wrong in the same way that they usually would.
If drivers are vulnerable or self-isolating they should contact their local garage as many are offering pick-up and drop-off services, so drivers can get their car checked without having to visit a garage.
The Driver and Vehicle Standards Agency (DVSA) has also issued guidance to all MOT testers about safely conducting tests in line with the latest government advice.

29 Jun 2020

29 Jun 2020
See below a link to the latest Labour Market insights from Skills Development Scotland.
https://www.skillsdevelopmentscotland.co.uk/what-we-do/skills-planning/covid-19-labour-market-insights/

29 Jun 2020
Please click the link below for our latest members' update. This update includes a link to our newsletter regarding the non payment of business support grants to some of our members.
Member Update 12

19 Jun 2020
Please find below a link to our member update which includes a message from Sandy Burgess regarding car showrooms not allowed to open until 29 June 2020.
Member Update 11

18 Jun 2020
SMTA today sought clarification from the Scottish Government to find out if the easing of restrictions going into Phase 2 meant that car showrooms could now open. Sadly, we have been advised that this is not the case and from the letter below you will see that this has been given a date of 29 June, this is hugely disappointing news for the Scottish motor trade.
Letter received from Scottish Government below:
Dear Sandy,
Thank you for your e-mail to the Cabinet Secretary for Economy, Fair Work and Culture. I have been asked to respond on her behalf.
In previous correspondence to you of 8 June, the Economy Secretary confirmed car showrooms would be permitted to reopen part of their sales area in Phase 2, in line with physical distancing guidelines. As outlined in this letter, our guidance is updated and reviewed every three weeks in line with the Scottish Government's lockdown review process
Following today’s announcement by the First Minister and publication of the Updated Route Map which outlines the order in which we will carefully and gradually lift lockdown restrictions, I can confirm that all street-access retail throughout Scotland can re-open from 29 June. This includes car showrooms.
Please note, this updated guidance no longer places a restriction on the size of sales area permitted to reopen. For clarity, this means that the previous restriction whereby units larger than 800m2 would have to wait until Phase 3 to reopen no longer applies.
I hope you find this information helpful.
Yours sincerely,
Scottish Government

18 Jun 2020
Update from HMRC:
As part of the government’s support for businesses during COVID-19, HMRC gave businesses the option of deferring their VAT payments if they were unable to pay on time, without incurring late payment interest or penalties. Payment of VAT falling due between 20 March and 30 June 2020 can be deferred until 31 March 2021.
You must continue to file your VAT return on time, even if you defer payment.
We're writing to remind you that the option to defer paying VAT ends on 30 June 2020. This means that VAT returns with a payment due date after 30 June must be paid in full, on time.
If you haven't deferred any VAT payments, you don't need to take any further action. If you have deferred paying your VAT and normally pay by Direct Debit you should now reinstate it.
You should do this at least three working days before submitting your VAT return in order for HMRC to take payment. For further details go to GOV.UK and search for 'Pay your VAT bill'.
Please do not call us for more information, everything you need to know is on GOV.UK. This will leave our phone lines open for those who need them most.
Remember, any VAT payments you have deferred during this period should be paid in full on or before 31 March 2021. You can make ad hoc payments or additional payments with your subsequent VAT returns to reduce the amount outstanding, if you wish.
If you're unable to pay the VAT due and need additional time to pay, please contact HMRC before the payment is due. For help go to GOV.UK and search for 'If you cannot pay your tax bill on time', or call 0300 200 3835. If you do call, please quote 'V1'.

15 Jun 2020
HMRC Update:
What the new online guidance covers
The guidance includes:
- changes to the scheme and key dates that you need to be aware of
- how you can claim if you bring previously furloughed employees back to work part-time from 1 July (known as flexible furloughing) and how many employees you can claim for in any one claim
- how to claim, and the information you’ll need to do so
- how to work out how much you can claim, including an online calculator to help you
- more information on amending your claim.
Webinars offering more support on changes to the scheme and how they impact you are now available to book online – go to GOV.UK and search 'help and support if your business is affected by coronavirus'.
We’d be grateful if you don’t call us for more information. All details are on GOV.UK and in our webinars. This will leave our phone lines open for those who need them most.
What you need to do now
- read the guidance to see how changes to the scheme impact you, using the calculator to understand how much you’ll be able to claim
- book a webinar via GOV.UK if you’d like more support
- consider which employees you want to keep on full-time furlough and which employees will come back to work – on what hours – to agree arrangements with them as needed for your business.
What you need to do from July
- start your flexible furloughing of employees from 1 July onwards. You can decide the hours and shift patterns they work to suit the needs of your business – you’ll pay their wages for the time they’re in work and can apply for a job retention scheme grant to cover any of their usual hours they are still furloughed for. You can still keep employees on full furlough if you need to
- claim for periods ending on or before 30 June, by 31 July – this is the last date you can make those claims
- claim for further furlough periods as needed – the first time you will be able to make a claim for days in July will be 1 July.

12 Jun 2020
Please find below this week's update for our member's of the latest news relating to the motor trade in Scotland. Also this week SMTA feature in the Daily Record see link below:
Member Update 10
https://www.dailyrecord.co.uk/lifestyle/motoring/a-positive-move-for-showrooms-22175041

08 Jun 2020
Scottish Cabinet Secretary for Economy Fair Work and Culture, Fiona Hyslop confirms some car showrooms in Scotland can open in Phase 2.
Letter from Fiona Hyslop can be read here.
If anyone has any queries please contact Sandy Burgess, SMTA Chief Executive sandy.burgess@smta.co.uk
my, Fair Work and Culture

08 Jun 2020
The Scottish Motor Trade Association (SMTA) has said that the politics of COVID-19 North of the border will cost car dealers financially and result in disproportionate job losses across the UK's devolved regions.
The National Franchised Dealers Association (NFDA) revealed the contents of a letter from Cabinet Secretary for Economy, Fair Work and Culture, Fiona Hyslop MSP, which clearly stated that click and collect car sales could be completed during Scotland’s COVID-19 lockdown - provided customers do not enter the showroom environment.
Furthermore, it stated that retailers “may open up to 800 m2 of their sales area, permitting some larger retail outlets such as car showrooms to re-open in Phase 2” of the country’s re-opening plan, which is expected from June 18.
But SMTA CEO, Sandy Burgess, has despaired at the lack of clarity from the Scottish Government to date and said that Scottish car retailers, and the economy, stand to lose out due to the disparity between COVID-19 policy across the UK's devolved nations in a week that saw dealers in England re-open their showroom doors to customers.
“We have been left in a political situation and that shouldn’t be the case,” said Burgess. “This is a health crisis first and foremost, then an economic crisis. The last thing COVID needs to be turned into is a political crisis.”
Burgess said that the decision to keep car showrooms in Scotland closed as their English counterparts re-opened would cost SMTA members financially.
Stalling the ability to trade would dent revenues and also see Scottish dealers suffer more severely from the start of used car pricing movements as the larger English car market begun to trade once again.
And where the NFDA finally received their clarification on Scottish automotive retail’s re-opening schedule this week, Burgess said that many of his numerous questions directed to the Scottish Government in written correspondence remained unanswered.
He said: “Our members have been put in a position where they cannot even plan for a return to showrooms trading as their English counterparts start to ramp-up their operations.
“It’s short-sighted and I fear it will cost the sector economically and in the form of jobs.”
In a public address yesterday (June 4), Scottish First Minister Nicola Sturgeon said that “alongside a public health emergency, we are also now dealing with an economic emergency, on a scale none of us have experienced”.
Sturgeon highlighted the allocation of £2.3 billion to help businesses in Scotland through measures such as grants and business rates relief, “in addition to welcome UK Government measures such as the furlough scheme”.
As of yesterday, Scottish traders are also a little clearer about the scope of their current ability to trade and their showroom re-opening plans, although larger dealerships may still have questions about the legislation.
In her latter to the NFDA, Fiona Hyslop MSP wrote: “This guidance states that retailers may open up to 800 m2 of their sales area, permitting some larger retail outlets such as car showrooms to re-open in Phase 2. Retail units larger than 800sq-m will be permitted to open in Phase 3.
“Each business will need to translate this guidance into the specific actions it needs to take depending on the nature of their business (i.e. the size and type of business, how it is organised, operated, managed and regulated).
“Our guidance has been designed to be applied to cover the spectrum of different retailers in Scotland and we have prepared an operational guide for retailers which includes a downloadable checklist with actions to consider.”
Hyslop added: “As you can appreciate, this is a rapidly evolving situation and our guidance will be updated and reviewed every three weeks in line with the Scottish Government's lockdown review.”
Credit: AM Online

08 Jun 2020
As part of changes to the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS), They've outlined below important dates that may impact you in the coming weeks.
Important dates – what you need to know now
- The scheme will close to anyone who hasn’t been furloughed for 3 weeks by 30 June, so you will only be able to claim for employees after that if they have been furloughed for a full three-week period at any time before the end of June.
- So, if you intend to furlough an employee who hasn’t been furloughed before, you will need to agree that with them and start their period of furlough on or before 10 June – this is the last day on which someone who has never been furloughed before can start a period of furlough and qualify for the scheme – this ensures the minimum three-week period is complete by 30 June.
- You will then have until 31 July to make a claim for any periods of furlough up until 30 June – this applies to both employees furloughed for the first time and those you have previously furloughed and claimed for.
The future of the scheme
- The rules of the scheme are changing from 1 July.
- On 12 June, we’ll publish full guidance on all the scheme changes on GOV.UK – search for 'Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme' to find this – webinars offering more support on the changes will also be available to book online from 12 June – please do not call us for more information, as everything you need to know about the scheme changes will be published online on GOV.UK.
- From 1 July, you’ll have the flexibility to bring previously furloughed employees back to work part time, you can decide the hours and shift patterns they work to suit the needs of your business – you’ll pay their wages for the time they’re in work and can apply for a scheme grant to cover any of their normal hours they are still furloughed for.
- Also, for periods starting on or after the 1 July, the maximum number of employees you can claim for in any period cannot be higher than the maximum number you have claimed for in a previous period. For example, if your highest single claim for periods up to 30 June was for 100 people, you can’t claim for more than this number in later periods.
- From 1 August, you will need to contribute towards the wage costs of your furloughed employees until the scheme ends on 31 October.
Making changes to your claims if you have over-claimed
If you’ve made an error in a CJRS claim that means you received too much money, you must pay this back to HMRC.
We’ve updated the application system so you can tell us if you have over-claimed in a previous claim – when you apply you’ll be asked if you need to reduce the amount to take account of a previous error. Your new claim amount will be reduced to reflect this. You should then keep a record of this adjustment for six years.
If you have made an error in a CJRS claim and do not plan to submit further claims, we are working on a process that will allow you to let us know about your error and pay back any amounts that you have over-claimed. We will update guidance and keep you informed when this is available.

05 Jun 2020
Please find the link below to our latest members' update. Updated information on business support grants and MOT extension from our Chief Executive, Sandy Burgess.
If any of our member's have any queries or questions please do not hesitate to get in touch.
Member Update 9
Letter re DVSA MOT extension

04 Jun 2020
ULEV Skills Baselining Study—final report
We have now received a copy of the complete study on Ultra Low Emission Vehicles carried out by Optimat which many of your may have participated in, please see below for links to read the findings along with an infographic.
Final study can be viewed here
Accompanying infographic can be viewed here

03 Jun 2020
We are conscious that a number of our smaller members will be in need of increased professional support on employment and personnel issues during these difficult times. With this in mind, and in conjunction with our partners, Just Employment Law, the SMTA is pleased to be able to offer all members with up to 10 employees, unlimited expert employment law advice and support from JEL on a retainer basis for a 6 month period – all for a fixed fee of £500 plus VAT (this can be paid in monthly instalments).
Each member who takes up this offer will be assigned their own solicitor from JEL’s experienced team and the retainer will also include unlimited drafting on employment matters as well as the drafting of contracts and staff handbooks. The offer is open to any SMTA member with up to 10 employees and the promotion will run throughout the months of June and July.
Members wishing to take advantage of this offer should contact JEL directly on 0141 331 5150 / enquiries@justemploymentlaw.co.uk quoting “SMTA6”. Preferential rates are also open to SMTA members who have more than 10 employees and who are in need of support at this time and JEL can be contacted via the same contact details.

02 Jun 2020
On Friday 29 May 2020, the Chancellor of the Exchequer set out several key changes to the CJRS, which are due to be implemented gradually over the next few months until the Scheme closes altogether on 31 October 2020.
Briefly, the main changes can be summarised as follows:
10 June 2020 will be the last day employers can place employees on furlough if those employees have not been furloughed previously;
From 1 July 2020, “flexible furloughing” will be allowed, whereby employers can agree with employees to bring them back to work part-time (on potentially any hours and/or shift pattern the employer needs) whilst still keeping them on furlough for the remainder of their weekly contractual hours;
From 1 August 2020, employers will no longer be able to reclaim employer’s National Insurance and pension contributions in respect of any employees remining on furlough;
From 1 September 2020, the government will only reimburse 70% of a furloughed employee’s salary (up to a maximum of £2,190). Employers will be required to top this up to 80% (or more, depending on what has previously been agreed with the employee);
From 1 October 2020, the government will only reimburse 60% of salary (up to a maximum of £1,875), with employers having to continue to top up to 80% (or more, as above).
Courtesy of Just Employment Law

01 Jun 2020
SCOTLAND’S automotive industry chiefs have called on the Holyrood Government to allow the immediate reopening of dealerships.
Scottish Motor Trade Association (SMTA) chief executive Sandy Burgess told Road Record: “Our message to Ministers is that we’re ready to go now. All dealers have taken very robust measures to tackle the coronavirus threat and are all set for appointment-only opening, and we want to help kick-start the economy.”
He said the steps taken by SMTA members to make their premises as safe as possible for consumers and staff went way beyond anything customers would experience in a garden centre. He pointed out that, unlike at garden centres, queues wouldn’t be a problem for those buying a new car.
In writing to the First Minister, Mr Burgess had foreseen Prime Minister Boris Johnson’s announcement earlier this week that showrooms in England could open from June 1.
He emphasised that car retailers were able to embrace proper levels of hygiene and safety and, as large, relatively open spaces, were well equipped to provide ample social distancing and control measures to protect both the workforce and public.
He also asked the Scottish Government to allow a “click and collect” system such as that being run in England. He said this would enable a backlog of cars waiting to be delivered to be shifted from the forecourts.
https://www.dailyrecord.co.uk/lifestyle/motoring/scotlands-car-dealers-are-raring-22102998

29 May 2020
Member Update 8

28 May 2020
Peugeot Austria has abused market power vis-à-vis dealers
In a long-standing legal dispute between the Upper Austrian Peugeot dealer Büchl and Peugeot Austria (PSA), the Cartel Court ruled on 12 May at first instance that the general importer for Peugeot vehicles in Austria had infringed the prohibition of abuse of market power. The Büchl company had turned to the Cartel Court because it - like numerous other Peugeot dealers in Austria and Europe - had suffered from oppressive requirements imposed by PSA which caused it serious economic disadvantages and called into question its independence as an authorised Peugeot dealer.
In its decision, the Cartel Court applies not only Austrian but also European cartel law and makes extensive findings on the problematic business policy of the Peugeot brand. The Büchl case thus also has a signal effect for the dealer networks of other brands in Austria and throughout Europe.
Specifically, the court prohibited the Peugeot brand in the distribution of new cars from economically forcing the dealer to participate in promotions and thus restricting his freedom to set prices for the end customer; from linking bonus payments to the dealer to customer satisfaction surveys; from reducing the dealers' margins if they deliberately fail to achieve sales targets that PSA has deliberately exaggerated; and from competing with the dealers on the end customer market through PSA's own operations with subsidised vehicle prices. A costly control system and hourly rates that do not cover costs were banned in the workshop business, making warranty and guarantee work economically unprofitable for the dealers. Ultimately, PSA must not continue to pass on the costs of its mystery shopping and audit system for new cars and workshops to the dealers.
The Bundesgremium Fahrzeughandel and the Bundesinnung der Fahrzeugtechnik der WKÖ, the Verband österreichischer Kraftfahrzeugbetriebe (VÖK) and the Österreichischer Peugeot-Händlerverband (Austrian Peugeot Dealers Association) welcome the decision and the statements of the Cartel Court, which can be generalised and are groundbreaking beyond the individual case, as an important step towards more fairness in the manufacturer-dealer relationship in Austria and Europe. An appeal by PSA is expected.
CommR Ing. Klaus Edelsbrunner, Federal Chairman of the Board of Management of the Vehicle Dealerships underlines, "It is important that the Cartel Court has now answered a legal question that has been unclear for a long time, at least in the first instance. This at least provides guidelines for correct market conduct based on both Austrian and European law and is therefore groundbreaking for the entire industry and all brands throughout Europe".
KommR Ing. Josef Schirak, spokesman for the motor vehicle retail trade, says: "For many years now, the balance of power between manufacturer/importer and vehicle operation has been deteriorating more and more at the expense of dealers. The Cartel Court has now clarified that in many cases there has been an abuse of market power. He therefore expects the manufacturers/importers to react and to comply with the ruling of the Cartel Court and, for example, to adapt the dealer contracts. "This has clarified a longstanding development in the contractual relationship between manufacturer/importer and authorised dealers", Schirak concluded.
KommR Josef Harb, Federal Guild Master of Automotive Engineering, is pleased that this decision has not only focused on the trade in vehicles, but also on maintenance and workshop operations.
Stefan Hutschinski, Chairman of the Association of Austrian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers (VÖK) clarifies: "This is an enormously important ruling by the Cartel Court in favor of motor vehicle companies, especially now. The pressure from the manufacturers on the companies has been increasing every year - many demands have been made which are extremely questionable from an economic and antitrust point of view. This ruling is a release and the first step in the right direction. All manufacturers throughout Europe are now called upon to orientate their cooperation in a commercially reasonable and antitrust clean way
The Büchl company was represented in the proceedings before the Cartel Court by the Viennese law firm of Dr. Peter Thyri, which specialises in Austrian and European cartel and competition law.

27 May 2020
President Emmanuel Macron wants France to become a leader in manufacturing electric vehicles as the government hands over £7.1bn to save the country’s car industry.
The government wants to use the crisis to make France the number one producer of electric vehicles in Europe.
From Monday, car buyers will get up to 12,000 euros (£10,669) from the government for buying an electric car under the ‘historic’ plan unveiled yesterday.
Buyers will be encouraged to scrap their old cars and buy lower-emissions models.
Macron said: ‘Our country wouldn’t be the same without its great brands – Renault, Peugeot, Citroen. We need not only to save (the industry) but transform it.’
The president said the car industry faced an ‘unprecedented crisis’ with production plunging more than 90 per cent.
Macron set a goal of producing one million electric cars in France by 2025, adding: ‘Our country should embody this avant-garde.’
Macron’s plan does not include a £4.45m French government loan guarantee under discussion for struggling Renault.
Macron said the Renault loan guarantee is contingent on keeping open two key French factories. The car firm is expected to announce a £1.78bn cost-cutting plan to unions this week.
The French president met industry representatives and unions at the Elysee presidential palace yesterday morning, then announced the investment plan on a visit to supplier Valeo, which makes equipment for electric cars, at its factory in northern France.
France’s car industry employs 400,000 people and is a big part of its manufacturing sector. The plan to support the industry comes at a crucial time for Renault, which came into the virus crisis in particularly bad shape after the 2018 arrest of its long-time chief executive Carlos Ghosn.
French finance minister Bruno Le Maire warned the company’s survival is at stake.
Renault and Nissan have scheduled an announcement today that is expected to address the future of their alliance.
French unions blockaded a Renault plant in western France yesterday, fearing fallout from the virus could lead to widespread job losses and factory closures.
Bailouts in the country a decade ago included a government bonus plan that encouraged consumers to buy newer cars, though that did not prevent thousands of job cuts.
Article courtesy www.cardealermagazine.co.uk

26 May 2020
Saving jobs while reducing emissions
IndustriAll Europe, Ceemet, ACEA, CLEPA, CECRA and ETRMA call for an ambitious recovery plan for the automotive sector
COVID-19 provoked an unprecedented crisis in the sector with an effective standstill of car production and distribution in Europe for several weeks. Sales came to a halt, investments have plummeted and the market introduction of new clean models has been postponed. At the same time, post-pandemic work organisation is increasing production costs.
The economic and social impact of the COVID-19 crisis on the automotive sector is particularly severe. Workers, although supported by short-time work arrangements, have seen their incomes reduced, and companies are facing cash drains as their revenues have disappeared. Currently, there is little visibility on what the future holds. If this situation persists, the sector risks a meltdown with large-scale bankruptcies and restructuring.
During the financial crisis (2008-13), the automotive sector lost 440.000 jobs (in car production and the aftermarket). If no measures are taken, this number risks being dwarfed by the current recession which may be much deeper.
Therefore, industriAll Europe, Ceemet, ACEA, CLEPA, CECRA and ETRMA, the European business organisations and the trade unions for the sector call on the European Commission for a bold industrial recovery plan. Such a plan should be based on two objectives. First of all, bringing the industry back on track by stimulating sales and reviving production, and secondly, supporting the industry in its journey towards a carbon-neutral future, based on the Green Deal and Europe’s climate objectives.
To date, the sector has been substantially investing in its transition towards the new paradigm of a carbon-neutral and digitalised economy: including, alternative powertrains, batteries, connected cars, mobility services, and automated driving. The industry can make a real contribution to the Green Deal and mitigating the climate emergency. But due to COVID-19, strong support from the national governments and the Commission is needed in order to help the sector to make the necessary investments in transitioning to decarbonisation while supporting European jobs and keeping its contribution to EU exports and the social welfare of European citizens.
To bring the sector back on track and enable it to emerge from this recession, the European automotive sector urgently needs:
Coordinated measures to support the relaunch of the industry incl. the aftermarket with harmonised guidance on preventive health and safety measures for the workplace; coordination is also needed to avoid further disruptions in the sophisticated automotive supply chains.
Support for viable companies to maintain their resilience. To avoid stranded assets liquidity support has to be maintained as long this is needed: state aid, investment guarantees, tax breaks, soft loans
Support for companies in maintaining/developing their human capital while the income and job security of workers must be preserved e.g. through continuation of short-time work arrangements connected to skills upgrading
Introduce/reinforce temporary demand stimulus measures by vehicle renewal schemes that are coordinated on EU level and financially supported by the Commission. These measures should be eligible for latest technologies and in addition be differentiated according safety and environmental performance based on certified CO2 emissions. Demand stimulus is needed to re-start the assembly lines and to preserve jobs. It should also restore the capacity of companies to generate the cash flows they need to invest in a sustainable future.
Take into account these extraordinary circumstances when assessing the impact of regulatory reforms on the sector.
Develop and maintain technological leadership by means of ambitious technology programmes to support both digital and low-carbon transitions
Provide investment support (grants, loans, equity) for the market introduction of new sustainable technologies
Accelerate the roll-out of charging and re-fuelling infrastructure for cars, vans and commercial vehicles in public, as well as private, places, and deliver at least 2 million charging points and refuelling stations across the EU for all vehicle types as indicated earlier.
Introduce/reinforce market incentives to promote the uptake of alternative powertrains
Promote industrial collaboration and industrial alliances to share the cost of the development and market introduction of new low-carbon technologies
Facilitate investments in the next generation digital infrastructure as a key enabler for more reliable connectivity between vehicles
Make use of innovative public procurement to support demand and to bring new innovations to the market
Boost investment in the research and developments as well in the production of batteries, hydrogen, and low-carbon liquid fuels, within the European Union.
Develop the circular economy connected to the automotive supply chain (recycling, re-manufacturing, re-use)
Support the many automotive SME’s in redefining their value chain positioning in a fast-changing automotive landscape
As the COVID-19 crisis has serious ramifications for jobs, industriAll Europe, Ceemet, ACEA, CLEPA, CECRA and ETRMA, call for the organisation of a just transition for every worker affected by restructuring. Solutions have to be found through timely anticipation of change, an effective social dialogue at all levels, active labour market policies, up-and re-skilling, and support to redevelopment plans for automotive regions.
The EU must maintain the ambition to keep the full automotive value chain inside the EU. This would allow the EU to keep a strong European automotive sector and to maintain our global leadership in clean vehicles, to deliver on its climate objectives and to maintain/create high quality jobs. Finally, a recovery of the automotive sector will generate positive knock-on effects for the overall economy.

26 May 2020
How to use the Coronavirus Statutory Sick Pay Rebate Scheme to claim back employees' coronavirus-related Statutory Sick Pay (SSP).
Please click this link which will take you to GOV.UK website

22 May 2020
This week's update includes important issues the Scottish motor industry is facing at this time including a member' message from SMTA Chief Executive.
Important updates on the Business Support Grant non payment for some of our members and the DVSA MOT extension.
Read your weekly update as at 22/5/20 here

20 May 2020
I do hope this statement finds you and yours all safe and well.
The offices of the SMTA have never stood so empty for so long, but as families, friends and businesses, right across the world – continue to adjust so admirably to an unfolding catastrophe there is much to be thankful for and more to be hopeful for.
To date we, as your association have worked hard to answer hundreds of member, non-member and political enquiries as quickly as possible, and we are still receiving more and more each and every day. It’s essential that we are there for our members, present and future. Not least while we continue to provide vital support such as our Consumer Conciliation Service, Trading Partners, MOT QMS advice and support along with Scotsure and membership guidance as and when the need arises.
In what felt like a heartbeat, we have gone from operating our South Queensferry HQ based within traditional buildings with people and processes to a virtual call centre dispersed over multiple living rooms, kitchens and even garden sheds across Scotland, with some staff receiving office equipment to their doorsteps and connecting remotely to our HQ centre systems. Whilst we all may have been less able than normal to reply personally to members calls and emails, we do strive to ensure we are dealing with every enquiry across the business as effectively as possible. Currently we have furloughed approximately 50% of our team across all departments, while it may take slightly longer to get through to us, and we may need two or three days to reply to non-urgent emails, our promise remains. We are here to encourage, promote & protect our members interest as we always have been.
The efforts that so many have gone to, and the sacrifices people are making, can give inspiration to all of us and help to bring tomorrow closer. A tomorrow where our businesses are once again fully operational and everyone can travel freely to work and visit their families and friends, in the first instance within the UK but ultimately around the world.
Sandy Burgess FIMI
Chief Executive SMTA

19 May 2020
Update from HMRC:
We’re writing to let you know that the coronavirus Statutory Sick Pay Rebate Scheme will launch online on 26 May.
The scheme will enable employers with fewer than 250 employees to claim coronavirus-related Statutory Sick Pay (SSP). Tax agents will also be able to make claims on behalf of employers.
You’re eligible to use the scheme if:
- you’re claiming for an employee who’s eligible for sick pay due to coronavirus
- you had a PAYE payroll scheme in operation before 28 February 2020
- you had fewer than 250 employees across all PAYE schemes on 28 February 2020
- you’re eligible to receive State Aid under the EU Commission Temporary Framework.
The repayment will cover up to two weeks of the applicable rate of SSP, and is payable if a current or former employee was unable to work on or after 13 March 2020 and entitled to SSP, because they either:
- have coronavirus
- are self-isolating and unable to work from home
- are shielding because they’ve been advised that they’re at high risk of severe illness from coronavirus.
To prepare to make a claim, you should keep records of all the SSP payments you wish to claim for.
For more information about eligibility and how employers can prepare to use the scheme, please visit GOV.UK and search 'Check if you can claim back Statutory Sick Pay paid to employees due to coronavirus (COVID-19)'.
Please only call us if you cannot find the support you need on GOV.UK advice pages or through our webchat service – this will leave our lines open for those who need our help most.
You can find out more about this coronavirus support measure, and others such as HMRC’s Job Retention Scheme, by signing up to one of our webinars. For more information please visit GOV.UK and search for 'Help and support if your business is affected by coronavirus (COVID-19)'.
A word about scams
We are aware of an increase in scam emails, calls and texts. If someone gets in touch claiming to be from HMRC, saying that financial help can be claimed or that a tax refund is owed, and asks you to click on a link or to give information such as your name, credit card or bank details, please do not respond. You can forward suspicious emails claiming to be from HMRC to phishing@hmrc.gov.uk and texts to 60599.

18 May 2020
Update from HMRC:
It’s nearly a month since the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS) opened and many businesses will be preparing to make another claim in order to receive money by the end of May.
To ensure you receive a payment by the end of May, you need to apply by Wednesday 20 May.
When you make a claim through the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme, you’ll receive the money within six working days.
After making a claim, please keep all records and calculations, in case we need to contact you to discuss these.
Update on the scheme
On 12 May, the Chancellor Rishi Sunak announced that the CJRS scheme will be extended until the end of October. The scheme will continue in its current form until the end of July.
From 1 August to the end of October, we will introduce more flexibility so employers will be able to bring their furloughed employees back to work part-time and contribute to paying employees' wages while still receiving support from the scheme.
These measures will apply across all regions and sectors in the UK economy, and we expect to publish more details of how this will work by the end of May.
Guidance and support
In the meantime, more information is available online to help you apply – go to GOV.UK and search 'Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme'.
Online guidance has recently been updated with:
- more information for furloughed employees
- the work furloughed company directors can undertake
- what time periods you can claim for
- more detail on non-discretionary payments, holiday pay and record keeping.
Our webinars are also available to help you, and there are two about the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme on our YouTube channel 'HMRCgovuk' – an overview of the scheme and a detailed session about how to make a claim. You can book a place on a live webinar by going to GOV.UK and searching 'help and support if your business is affected by coronavirus'.
Please remember that grants are only intended for the payment of employees' salaries and related National Insurance, and pension contributions.
Payments may be withheld or need to be repaid in full if based on dishonest or inaccurate information or found to be fraudulent, and we may call you to check the details of your claim.
Protect yourself from scams
Stay vigilant about scams, which may mimic government messages as a way of appearing authentic and unthreatening. Don't give out private information or reply to text messages, and don't download attachments in emails you weren't expecting. Search 'scams' on GOV.UK for information on how to recognise genuine HMRC contact. You can also forward suspicious emails claiming to be from HMRC to phishing@hmrc.gov.uk and texts to 60599.

14 May 2020
Please find below this week's update for our member's of the latest news relating to fiscal measures and the motor trade in Scotland.
This week's update includes important issues the Scottish motor industry is facing at this time including an update from SMTA Chief Executive regarding DVSA and the 6 month holiday on MOTs and Covid-19 grant funding issues our members are having.
Weekly Update as at 14/5/20

14 May 2020
COVID-19 : INDUSTRY GUIDANCE AND BEST PRACTICE FOR AUTOMOTIVE AFTERMARKET
- New automotive sector-specific guidance for aftermarket providers published by GEA, IAAF, IMI, SMTA and SMMT today.
- MOT testers and service and repair sector ready to welcome back more customers with comprehensive COVID-19 safety measures across all points of interaction.
- Sector can cope with significant ramp-up in demand but calls for end of six-month MOT extension as soon as possible.
The UK automotive aftermarket sector has signalled its readiness to cope with increased demand for MOT tests, service, maintenance and repair with the publication of new sector-specific guidance1 by the Garage Equipment Association (GEA), Independent Automotive Aftermarket Federation (IAAF), Institute of the Motor Industry (IMI), Scottish Motor Trade Association (SMTA) and the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT).
Although workshops have been allowed to stay open throughout the lockdown, helping to keep vehicles roadworthy for essential journeys, the new guidance will help companies of all types and sizes in the aftermarket operate safely while minimising the risk of Covid-19 transmission.
The best-practice guidance covers the entire aftermarket sector, including workshops, warehouses, mobile operations and parts distributors. It covers every aspect of their operations, from clear communications with customers and colleagues to social distancing, sanitisation and hygiene, and collection/delivery of vehicles from vulnerable owners. It is designed to complement government advice and help the aftermarket sector demonstrate safe practices for employees and customers across all points of interaction. It comes as vehicle mileages start to climb and the sector calls for an end to the six-month MOT extension.
Courtesy SMMT.

12 May 2020
SMTA's Chief Executive, Sandy Burgess has contacted every chief executive at every council in Scotland regarding the major issue with the non payment of business support grants to the automotive sector. A copy of this letter can be viewed here.
In addition, we would encourage all our members who have been rejected for one of the business support grants to contact their local MSP or MP to bring this issue to their attention.
Sandy Burgess, SMTA Chief Executive can be contacted at sandy.burgess@smta.co.uk

11 May 2020
Member Update:

08 May 2020
We will be producing an update for our member's of the week's news relating to fiscal measures and the motor trade in Scotland. This week's update includes important issues the Scottish motor industry is facing at this time including grant relief not being issued to some of our members, please click the link below to read.
Weekly Update as at 08/05/20

07 May 2020
News published today on www.cardealermagazine.co.uk
The Scottish Motor Trade Association has hit out over a communication breakdown that is seeing some garages missing out on thousands in grant relief during the coronavirus crisis.
It all boils down to the interpretation by individual councils as to who is eligible for the money from the Retail, Hospitality and Leisure Grant Fund and a gap in guidance issued by the Scottish government.
A one-off £25,000 grant is available to ratepayers of properties in the retail, hospitality and leisure sectors whose rateable values are between £18,000 and £51,000.
However, because of an inconsistency in guidelines issued by the Scottish government to local authorities, with garages not being specifically listed in one particular table although they are in another, claims for the £25,000 are being rejected by some councils, meaning a ‘double whammy’ for businesses having to pay rates and not getting any support, even though they’re shut other than for essential repairs and MOTs.
Read the full article here at Car Dealer Magazine

07 May 2020
A revaluation of business rates will no longer take place in 2021 to help reduce uncertainty for firms affected by the impacts of coronavirus.
Legislation had been introduced to bring the next revaluation forward by one year from 2022 to 2021, but following the recent economic impacts of the coronavirus pandemic ministers want to ensure businesses have more certainty during this difficult time.

05 May 2020
From Lawgistics - www.lawgistics.co.uk
On the bright and green side, some garages are now re-opening to meet the demand. Some dealers have aptly adjusted to selling cars in the lockdown, taking on board the imposed restriction on trade and doing business distantly. Essential workers and all those who cannot work from home still need transport to commute, goods need to be delivered.
There is, reassuringly, a demand to meet and there are jobs to be done. Dealers and garages may have to start to recalling their staff from furlough.
If you are in this fortunate position and need your staff to come out of furlough to do work, this certainly can be done.
Just remember, the minimum furlough duration is 3 weeks. It is the employer’s decision which employees remained furloughed and who is coming back to work. This decision must not be in any manner discriminatory. It is worth reminding your staff that on furlough ending, the normal terms of employment resume.
Click here for a template created by Lawgistics

05 May 2020
Joint Press Release from: CECRA, ACEA, CLEPA and ETRMA
Europe’s four auto sector associations publish 25-point action plan for successful restart
Brussels, 5 May 2020 – COVID-19 is having a major impact on the economy, with retail and manufacturing activity crippled without precedence and concerns mounting on consumer sentiment. The European automotive sector, which has been hit particularly badly, proposes a plan comprised of 25 key actions to ensure a strong restart of the sector and the economy at large.
Targeting decision makers at EU and national level, the action plan lists tangible recommendations to successfully exit from the corona crisis. It is issued by the four associations representing the full automotive supply chain: from equipment and tyre suppliers, to vehicle manufacturers, to dealers and workshops (ACEA, CECRA, CLEPA and ETRMA). Together, they want to contribute to a policy response to C-19 that ensures public health, minimises the impact on the economy and maintains focus on the overarching objectives of our time: the digital and carbon-neutral society.
As part of the action plan, the sector calls for coordinated vehicle renewal schemes for all vehicle types and categories across the EU. This will boost private and business demand, support economic recovery across the board as well as accelerate the rejuvenation of the vehicle fleet on Europe’s roads. Purchase and investment incentives should be based on similar criteria across Europe, drawing on both national and EU funding. Such schemes should be enhanced by scrapping premiums, and should take into account society’s climate ambitions and resource-efficiency objectives in concert with the economic impact.
Eric-Mark Huitema, Director General of ACEA, the automobile manufacturers’ association stated: “It is now crucial to bring the entire automotive value chain back into motion. We need a coordinated relaunch of industrial and retail activity, with maintained liquidity for businesses. Targeted measures will need to be taken to trigger demand and investment. Demand stimulus will boost the utilisation of our manufacturing capacity, safeguarding jobs and investments.”
Bernard Lycke, Director General of CECRA, the association of automotive dealers and workshops says: “To relaunch mobility and economic activity, it will be essential that vehicle dealerships and motor vehicle workshops reopen as soon as possible in the countries where they are still closed. Targeted purchase incentives and scrappage schemes for all categories of vehicles will, in addition to spurring the recovery, make a positive contribution towards carbon neutrality and road safety.”
Sigrid de Vries, Secretary General of CLEPA, the association of the automotive suppliers’ industry in Europe says: “Restarting the automotive sector will act as an engine of overall economic recovery because of the significant employment impact and immediate knock-on effect on other sectors. Investment in people and R&D remains key as well. Europe needs a strong automotive ecosystem to stay competitive and push ahead with ambitious environmental, digital and road safety targets.”
Fazilet Cinaralp, Secretary General of ETRMA, the European Tyre & Rubber Manufacturers Association: “The automotive sector is committed to emerging from this crisis stronger than before. A successful restart requires a supportive regulatory framework that protects public health, minimises the impact on the economy and ensures a transition to a circular, carbon-neutral economy. In close collaboration with the European Commission, we want to contribute to a policy response that brings about a successful COVID-19 recovery.”

04 May 2020
Update from Just Employment Law:
Since the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (the CJRS) was announced on 26 March 2020 there have been many versions of the Government’s guidance on the CJRS.
This week, further key changes have been made to the Government’s guidance on the CJRS, in the wake of the CJRS portal’s first week in operation. These can be summarised as follows:
Collective agreement reached between an employer and a trade union to furlough workers will be an acceptable form of consent for the purpose of a CJRS claim.
An employee who was on a fixed term contract can be re-employed, furloughed and claimed for if either: (a) their contract expired after 28 February 2020 and an RTI payment submission was notified to HMRC on/before 28 February 2020; or (b) it expired after 19 March 2020 and an RTI payment submission was notified to HMRC on/before 19 March 2020. If the fixed term contract has not yet expired, it can be extended or renewed, and they can be furloughed and claimed for under the CJRS.
If a group of companies had multiple PAYE schemes and transferred all employees into a new consolidated PAYE scheme after 28 February 2020, they will be eligible to furlough those employees and claim for them under the CJRS.
Union or non-union representatives (including elected workforce representatives) may undertake duties/activities for the individual or collective representation of other workers whilst furloughed (such as during TUPE or redundancy consultation), provided they do not provide services to or generate revenue for, or on behalf of, the organisation which has furloughed them or any linked or associated organisation.
Company directors paid annually can be furloughed and claimed for via the CJRS provided they meet certain conditions, including being notified to HMRC on an RTI submission on/or before 19 March 2020 in relation to a payment of earnings in the 2019/20 tax year.
Where employees transferred to a new employer via TUPE on/after 28 February 2020, the new employer can claim for those employees under the CJRS if the TUPE or PAYE business succession rules apply to the change in ownership.
The normal rules for all forms of family-related leave and pay apply irrespective of whether an employee has been furloughed (and furlough must end before the start of the leave). However, new regulations have been introduced which provide that where an employee was furloughed and then started a form of family-related leave on or after 25 April 2020, their statutory pay for that leave should be calculated based on the pay they would have received if not furloughed.
The Government launched a coronavirus business support finder tool on 20 April 2020 which uses an online questionnaire to identify whether a business or self-employed person could be entitled for support from various government schemes, including the CJRS. This can be accessed here.

04 May 2020
Britain’s small businesses will be able to apply for quick and easy-to access loans of up to £50,000 from today – with the cash expected to land within days.
- small businesses will be able to apply for quick and easy-to-access loans from today
- businesses will be able to borrow between £2,000 and £50,000 with the cash arriving within days
- loans will be 100% government backed for lenders, and businesses can apply online through a short and simple form
Thousands of small firms and sole traders – including high street staples like hairdressers, coffee shops and florists – will be eligible for 100% government-backed Bounce Back Loans to help them make it through the coronavirus outbreak.
From 9am this morning, small business owners can apply to accredited lenders by filling out a simple online form, with only seven questions.
The government has also agreed with lenders that an affordable flat rate of 2.5% interest will be charged on these loans. And any business that has already taken out a Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan of £50,000 or less can apply to have these switched over to this generous new scheme.
The Bounce Back Loan scheme is the latest step in a package of world-leading support measures launched by Chancellor Rishi Sunak – with £7.5 billion already awarded in business grants, 4 million jobs supported through the job retention scheme and generous tax deferrals supporting hundreds of thousands of firms. To apply, see further information about the Bounce Back Loan scheme.
The Chancellor of the Exchequer, Rishi Sunak, said:
Small businesses will play a key role creating jobs and securing economic growth as we recover from the Coronavirus pandemic.
The Bounce Back loan scheme will make sure they get the finance they need - helping them bounce back and protect jobs.
Business Secretary Alok Sharma said:
We are backing small businesses, which are the backbone of our communities, with the support they need to stay afloat.
This new scheme of 100% government-guaranteed loans gives owners of even the smallest businesses the confidence and flexibility to borrow a sum which works for them. This will help ensure they can continue to trade, and be a key part of our efforts to reboot the British economy.
As part of the scheme, small businesses can borrow between £2,000 and £50,000. The government will provide lenders with a 100% guarantee and cover the cost of any fees and interest for the borrower for the first 12 months. No repayments will be due during this period to enable firms to get back on their feet.
The loans are available through a network of lenders, including the five largest banks.
Further Information
- Eligible companies will be subject to standard customer fraud, anti-money laundering (AML) and Know Your Customer (KYC) checks prior to any loan being made. Some State Aid restrictions may apply to applications.
- The borrower always remains 100% liable for the debt.

30 Apr 2020
We will be producing an update for our member's of the week's news relating to fiscal measures and the motor trade in Scotland.
Weekly Update as at 30/04/20

30 Apr 2020
Update from DVLA:
The DVLA have had a number of queries about the use of trade plates during the COVID-19 Pandemic and their use during a test drive while adhering to the social distancing rules.
DVLA has reviewed the relevant legislation on trade licensing and ascertained that a prospective purchaser may test drive a vehicle on trade plates, without the trade licence holder being present.
However, trade plates are the property of the Secretary of State and motor traders should take all precautions to ensure that trade plates are not stolen from the vehicle.

30 Apr 2020
A £100 million package of additional grant support for small and medium sized businesses (SMEs) and newly self-employed people opens at 2pm today. There are funds available:
Pivotal Enterprise Resilience Fund
Newly Self-Employed Hardship Fund

28 Apr 2020
Bestplate has a special offer for SMTA members - “Sneeze Screens”, for hygiene and protection, manufactured in 3mm material with cut out.
A 6 pack of the screens is £270 plus vat and carriage (700 (w) x 650 ( h) x 3mm with fixings)
Carriage cost is £10 per 25kg parcel, each single parcel holds 6 screens.
If you are interested and would like to find out more please contact Norman Stirling, SMTA Membership Development Manager on 07917 095014, or you can order direct by contacting Bestplate - see below.
To order contact:
patrick.allport@bestplate.com
m: +44(0)7967 716388
t. 01253 345 287

28 Apr 2020
Small businesses will benefit from a new fast-track finance scheme providing loans of between £2,000 and £50,000 with a 100% government-backed guarantee for lenders, the Chancellor announced on Monday 27 April.
You can find more information here: Small businesses boosted by bounce back loans

27 Apr 2020
We attach a copy of a letter received from the Cabinet Secretary of the Scottish Government responding to our challenge for clearer guidelines about the task of selling and more importantly delivering vehicles with on-line transactions. The letter confirms official clearance for our members who are car dealers to be able to sell and deliver vehicles during lockdown.
SMTA members who are distance selling can print a copy of the letter here.

27 Apr 2020
Update from HMRC:
The Employer Bulletin (April 2020, Issue 83) includes the latest update on the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme, along with updates on the Statutory Sick Pay Rebate Scheme and the deferral of VAT payments.
Please go online at GOV.UK if you need further support.

23 Apr 2020
Update from The Scottish Government
The Scottish Government has today (23 April) published COVID-19: A Framework for Decision Making. It sets out some of the challenges Scotland faces and outlines the approach and principles that will guide us as we make decisions about transitioning out of the current lockdown arrangements. As a government we will listen to the best scientific advice and to the people of Scotland as we make our judgements. This is a living document and will be updated as evidence, modelling, and our assessment of the different options open to us develops. We will seek to engage at every opportunity and be open and transparent as our thinking evolves.
Click here to read the document.

22 Apr 2020
Please find a Q&A document for employers from Just Employment Law that you may find useful.
Coronavirus update for Employers

21 Apr 2020
DVLA Update for members:
The Coronavirus Pandemic has had a significant impact on DVLA’s services. In line with advice from Public Health Wales they have a very limited number of staff on-site who are focusing on applications from those who are directly involved in the response to the COVID-19 pandemic.
In particular, they are prioritising applications relating to HGV drivers and key workers to make sure they get any documentation they need as quickly as possible. They are only processing key worker applications, others being significantly delayed or unable to be processed until further notice.
Their Contact Centre is also focusing its services on those in most need and are telling customers not to call unless they are directly involved in the nation’s response to COVID-19. Unfortunately, the Contact Centre will not be able to respond to any other calls or general queries until further notice.
Whilst DVLA’s paper application processes have been severely impacted by the pandemic, DVLA’s digital services continue to operate as normal. We are therefore encouraging all applicants to utilise these digital services whenever possible. Please find a list of their digital services and the link to their website here

20 Apr 2020
Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme extended by one month to reflect continuing social distancing measures.
Chancellor of the Exchequer, Rishi Sunak, said:
We’ve taken unprecedented action to support jobs and businesses through this period of uncertainty, including the UK-wide Job Retention Scheme. With the extension of the coronavirus lockdown measures yesterday, it is the right decision to extend the furlough scheme for a month to the end of June to provide clarity.
It is vital for people’s livelihoods that the UK economy gets up and running again when it is safe to do so, and I will continue to review the scheme so it is supporting our recovery.

20 Apr 2020
Update from HMRC:
We want to help you get ready to make your claim under the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme when it goes live today.
There’s now updated guidance on how to calculate your claim and a simple step-by-step guide.
There will also be a calculator available when the system goes live on Monday for you to check your calculations online before you make your claim.
Please have all your information and calculations ready before you begin your application. If you have a payroll provider, they will be able to help you with this. You should retain all records and calculations in case we need to contact you about them.
You can now claim online for a grant for 80% of your furloughed employees’ salaries, up to a maximum of £2,500 per employee, per month, through the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme.
This scheme will be open until the end of June 2020.
Before you make a claim:
- please read all the available guidance on GOV.UK before you apply
- gather all the information and the precise calculations you need before you start your application – if you have a payroll provider, they will be able to help you with this
- you can find out more in the calculation guidance where you can access a claim calculator – this will allow you to check your claim for most employees who are paid the same amount each pay period
- access our simple step-by-step guide for additional help.
After you’ve made a claim:
- keep a note or a print-out of your claim reference number – you won’t receive a confirmation SMS or email
- retain all records and calculations for your claims, in case we need to contact you about them
- expect to receive the funds six working days after you apply, provided your claim matches records that we hold for your PAYE scheme – please do not contact us before this time
- to receive payment by 30 April, you will need to complete an application by 22 April
- please ask your furloughed employees not to contact us directly – we will not be able to provide them with any information on individual claims.
We expect to be very busy so we would ask that you only call us if you can’t find what you need on GOV.UK or through our webchat service – this will leave our lines open for those who need our help most.
HMRC will check claims made through the scheme and will act to protect public money against anyone who makes a claim using dishonest or fraudulent information.
We’d encourage you to also protect your own credentials from potential scammers and opportunist criminal activity.
Please only call us if you can’t find what you need on GOV.UK – this will leave our lines open for those who need our help most.

20 Apr 2020
The Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) has said that it expects motor finance providers to offer “exceptional and immediate support to customers facing payment difficulties” due to COVID-19 coronavirus.
In draft guidance to the sector published this morning the regulator outlined temporary measures in a bid to help motorists which it said might be having temporary difficulty in making their finance or leasing payments due to a loss of or reduction in their income, or those who expect to experience such difficulties.
The guidance states that finance firms should agree to three-month payment deferrals, reduced payments or a rescheduled term to help customers “without delay”.
Read full article at AM Online

16 Apr 2020
Each week we will be producing an update for our member's of the week's news relating to fiscal measures relating to the motor trade in Scotland.
Update at 16.4.20

16 Apr 2020
Update from HMRC:
We are now writing to tell you how and when to access the system with some more information about what you will need to have ready before the system goes live.
We are also updating you on an important change to the scheme relating to employee eligibility:
you can claim for employees that were employed as of 19 March 2020 and were on your PAYE payroll on or before that date; this means that you will have made an RTI submission notifying us of payment of that employee on or before 19 March 2020
employees that were employed as of 28 February 2020 and on payroll (i.e. notified to us on an RTI submission on or before 28 February) and were made redundant or stopped working for you after that, and prior to 19 March 2020, can also qualify for the scheme if you re-employ them and put them on furlough.
More information on this can be found on GOV.UK.
How to claim
As you prepare to make a claim, please note:
the online claim service will be launched on GOV.UK on 20 April 2020 – please do not try to access it before this date as it won’t be available
the only way to make a claim is online – the service should be simple to use and any support you need available on GOV.UK; this will include help with calculating the amount you can claim
you can make the claim yourself even if you usually use an agent
claims will be paid within 6 working days; you should not contact us unless it is absolutely necessary – any queries should be directed to your agent, representative or our webchat service
we cannot answer any queries from employees – they will need to raise these with you, as their employer, directly.
Information you will need before you make a claim
In addition to the information in our previous email, you will need to have the following before 20 April 2020:
a Government Gateway (GG) ID and password – if you don’t already have a GG account, you can apply for one online, or by going to GOV.UK and searching for 'HMRC services: sign in or register'
be enrolled for PAYE online – if you aren’t registered yet, you can do so now, or by going to GOV.UK and searching for 'PAYE Online for employers'
the following information for each furloughed employee you will be claiming for:
- Name.
- National Insurance number.
- Claim period and claim amount.
- PAYE/employee number (optional).
- if you have fewer than 100 furloughed staff – you will need to input information directly into the system for each employee
- if you have 100 or more furloughed staff – you will need to upload a file with information for each employee; we will accept the following file types: .xls .xlsx .csv .ods.
If you want an agent to act for you
Please note:
agents authorised to act for you on PAYE matters can make the claim on your behalf using their ID and password
you will need to tell your agent which UK bank account you want the grant to be paid into, in order to ensure funds are paid as quickly as possible to you.
You should retain all records and calculations in respect of your claims.
Guidance on GOV.UK is being regularly updated so please review it frequently.

15 Apr 2020
Almost a fifth of car buyers are poised to make a purchase as soon as the current COVID-19 coronavirus lockdown is lifted, according to survey data published by What Car?.
The automotive consumer publication surveyed nearly 3,000 active online car researchers and found that 18.2% said that they intend to buy their next car immediately after the lockdown restrictions are lifted.
It also found that 36% of in-market buyers feel that retailers should respond to their online enquiries within 24 hours, despite the ongoing crisis, with a further 13% expecting contact within half that time and 6% want it within an hour.
Read the full AM Online article here

10 Apr 2020
Update from HMRC:
We want to help you get ready to make a claim under the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme.
If you’re eligible for the scheme, there are things that you can do now to be ready when the system is up and running later this month.
You’ll need to provide the following to make a claim:
- The bank account number and sort code you’d like us to use when we pay your claim.
- The name and phone number of the person in your business for us to call with any questions.
- Your Self-Assessment UTR (Unique Tax Reference), Company UTR or CRN (Company Registration Number).
- The name, employee number and National Insurance number for each of your furloughed employees.
- The total amount being claimed for all employees and the total furlough period.
If you use an agent who is authorised to act for you for PAYE purposes, they will be able to make a claim on your behalf, so please speak to them now.
However, if you use a file-only agent (files your RTI return but doesn’t act for you in other matters), they won’t be able to make a claim for you and you’ll need the information listed above from them to make the claim yourself.
For more detailed advice, please visit GOV.UK. This guidance is being regularly updated, so please review it frequently.
You may also find this recorded webinar helpful, 'Coronavirus (COVID-19) Job Retention Scheme', available on HMRC’s YouTube channel.
An email from HMRC will be sent in the next few days with more details on how and when to access the online system – please do not try to do this until we let you know it is available.

10 Apr 2020
The DVLA contact center is now only taking calls from key workers.
Please do not to call the contact centre unless you are a key worker directly involved in the response to the COVID-19. Key workers only can contact DVLA here
The contact centre Easter opening times :
Date |
Opening hours |
Thursday 9 April |
10am to 4pm |
Good Friday 10 April |
Closed |
Saturday 11 April |
Closed |
Easter Sunday 12 April |
Closed |
Easter Monday 13 April |
Closed |
Tuesday 14 April |
10am to 4pm |
All other customers should please use their online services, which are all currently available.

09 Apr 2020
Some franchised car dealers have been accused of abusing Government’s Job Retention Scheme (JRS) as businesses across the UK prepare for the opening of the HMRC's portal to register for the salary support.
HMRC chief executive Jim Harra outlined details of the application process and revealed that the opening date for applications would be April 20 in a letter distributed yesterday (April 8).
But as many car retail businesses were poised to take advantage of the scheme in a bid to safeguard their business during the current COVID-19 coronavirus lockdown, it was alleged that others with furloughed staff were attempting to exploit the scheme.
Ian Ferguson, the founder of car retail dispute resolution business RejectMyCar.com, said that he had uncovered evidence that the JRS scheme was being abused by some car retail groups whose furloughed staff have continued to work in direct contravention of the scheme’s rules.
Read full article at AM Online here

08 Apr 2020
The Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan Scheme (CBILS) is available for SMEs through more than 40 accredited lenders across the UK.
Visit www.british-busness-bank.co.uk here for more info

08 Apr 2020
Please find a Q&A document for employers from Just Employment Law that you may find useful.
Coronavirus update for Employers

07 Apr 2020
Update from DVLA to all SMTA members:
Due to the reduced number of staff that DVLA have available to work on site in the DVLA they are having to prioritise their work and services to focus on critical workers and the services that they are providing to deal with the pandemic and to keep the country going.
The DVLA Contact Centre is now available from Monday to Friday between 10am and 4pm. In order that we can focus their available resources on those in most need they are now prioritising their resources to handle urgent calls from those who are directly involved in the nation’s response to COVID-19 as a key worker. Their staff will not be able to respond to other queries at this time.
Please can we ask that any members, who meet the above criteria, to use one of the following links which will provide them with up to date contact details for drivers and vehicles related issues. These links will be kept up to date with the latest information.
Vehicles Information: Click here
Drivers & Medical Information: Click here
For updates and advice please go to https://www.gov.uk/dvla

07 Apr 2020
Coronavirus help | Ben Support for Life
There’s no doubt that we’re in unusual and difficult times. The Coronavirus is affecting everyone’s lives – both home and work. In this section you can find information on how we can help and tips and advice for specific areas of your health and wellbeing that may be affected as a result of the current situation.
Ben are sharing some important information to help people understandhow they can help in these extraordinary times.
To help Ben manage and prioritise urgent cases, we ask that you check Ben's website first for information, tips and advice and then, if you need additional help, to contact their helpline.


07 Apr 2020
Update from UK Government:
This is a difficult time for apprentices, employers and providers of apprenticeship training, assessment and external assurance. The government is committed to supporting apprentices, and employers continue to build the skills capabilities the country needs now and in the future.
The Education and Skills Funding Agency (ESFA) is responding by taking steps to ensure that, wherever possible, apprentices can continue and complete their apprenticeship, despite any break they need to take as a result of COVID-19, and to support providers during this challenging time.
The support we are providing includes:
- introducing flexibilities to allow furloughed apprentices to continue their training as long as it does not provide services to or generate revenue for their employer
- encouraging training providers to deliver training to apprentices remotely, and via e-learning, as far as is practicable
- allowing the modification of end-point assessment arrangements, including remote assessments wherever practicable and possible in order to maintain progress and achievement for apprentices
- clarifying that apprentices ready for assessment, but who cannot be assessed due to COVID-19 issues, can have their end-point assessment rescheduled
- apprentices whose gateway is delayed can have an extension to the assessment time frame
- enabling employers and training providers to report and initiate a break in learning, where the interruption to learning due to COVID-19 is greater than 4 weeks
- clarification on how to record breaks in learning so that funding is not unnecessarily disrupted
- confirming that, where apprentices are made redundant, it is our ambition to find them alternative employment and continue their apprenticeship as quickly as possible and within 12 weeks
Visit Gov.UK for more information here

06 Apr 2020
Rough passage ahead! The new car registration activity in Scotland for March mirrored that of the rest of the UK in returning a huge drop of 48.65% against 44.04% for the other nations combined, this meant that as a whole the UK experienced a 44.00% decline in registrations against 2019 and has very significant impacts for the remainder of 2020.
The reason for the drop off does not need confirming, we as an industry, consumer groups and media are all very well aware of what the problem has been in this instance and that it will continue to blight every sector of our economy for some time to come. That said there are fantastic efforts being made by many to find a cure and a vaccine for the virus so we can fight off this current crisis and return to doing what we all can to ensure a speedy recovery for everyone.
Our sector is doing their bit in often very challenging situations to ensure essential workers can continue to travel to and from their place of work, supplying labour, parts and often supplying vehicles to help with the common fight, The SMTA is very proud of its membership playing their part for their communities across the nation.
Sandy Burgess SMTA Chief Executive commented “There is no real point in trying to analyze the figures for March beyond what they are, the key critical consideration we all have is for the safety of our staff, our business partners and our customer base be that rural or metropolitan it’s the space we are all in right now.”
For further information, please contact:
Sandy Burgess or Karen Thompson
SMTA Ltd, Palmerston House, 10 The Loan, South Queensferry, EH30 9NS
info@smta.co.uk

06 Apr 2020
Update from UK Government on commission payments included in the 80% of wages (up to a £2,500 limit) employers can claim for their employees:
You can claim for any regular payments you are obliged to pay your employees. This includes wages, past overtime, fees and compulsory commission payments. However, discretionary bonus (including tips) and commission payments and non-cash payments should be excluded.

06 Apr 2020
Update from HMRC:
The employer guidance and guidance for employees have been further updated in line with some of the main queries we have received from stakeholders. Whilst all the guidance has been refreshed, the main areas I would draw your attention to are:
- the more detailed information on scheme eligibility
- further information on how to calculate a claim
- clarification of what constitutes wages.

03 Apr 2020
Update from HM Revenue and Customs
At Budget 2020 the Chancellor announced details about a new coronavirus (COVID-19) Statutory Sick Pay Rebate Scheme.
This scheme will allow small and medium sized employers, with fewer than 250 employees, to apply to HMRC to recover the costs of paying Statutory Sick Pay to their employees.
Today HMRC has published new online guidance which includes information about who can use the scheme and the records employers must keep.
HMRC is working urgently to set up a system for reimbursement. Existing systems are not set up to facilitate payments to employers.
Details about when the new Statutory Sick Pay Rebate Scheme can be accessed and when employers can make a claim will be announced as soon as possible.
We will continue to update you and the new GOV.UK guidance when these details are available.

03 Apr 2020
Each week we will be producing an update for our member's of the week's news relating to fiscal measures relating to the motor trade in Scotland.
Weekly Update as at 03/04/20

02 Apr 2020
We note below a few common questions and answers that may help you with regard to furloughing your employees. Please be sure you are aware of the rules of furlough and that your employee is aware also.
Can a furloughed employee work elsewhere?
Yes, providing they had that job prior to 1 March 2020. It remains to be clarified if a furloughed employee can take up new employment elsewhere whilst on furlough.
Can a furloughed employee take annual leave when on furlough?
This may be possible but again awaiting clarity on this point. In the meantime, in case HMRC does not permit furlough and annual leave to be taken at the same time it is recommend that an employee does not take annual leave (including any public holidays) during the first three weeks of furlough leave.
If an employee takes a holiday after having at least three consecutive weeks of furlough leave, no further holiday should be agreed until they have been back on furlough leave for a further three weeks, if applicable.
Whether you are topping up the furlough payments to the employee or not, they should receive full pay (as they normally would) for any period of annual leave. It is not yet clear if HMRC will reimburse you at all for periods of annual leave taken during furlough leave. Nor do we know if taking annual leave will be treated as breaking a continuous period of furlough leave, hence the advice in the first and second paragraphs of this question.
Can I bring a furloughed employee back to work and then ‘re-furlough’ them?
The scheme does not appear to preclude this, provided that each period of furlough is a minimum of three weeks. However, the government guidance does not include an express confirmation that the same person can be furloughed more than once

02 Apr 2020
Dealers will need cashflow to bridge the gap until the Government’s business and employee support funds drop in, however they must resist a fire sale of stock, ASE Global’s chairman Mike Jones has warned. His advice came as global analysts IHS Markit predicted a year-on-year 10 million light vehicle sales decline (12.2%) worldwide to 78.8m units in 2020 due to the Coronavirus pandemic and national counter-measures.
IHS automotive economist Peter Nagle said "If quarantine measures get extended and economic stimulus activities are not sufficient, the decline could be 18% to 20% globally to around 71m units. Most of the world’s mature economies are suffering “historic declines” causing recession, Nagle said, however IHS forecasts “bounce backs” in 2021.
He pointed out that in China, after eight weeks of factory closures, nine cities are now introducing incentives for people to buy cars, particularly electric vehicles.
“It may take a long time for people to feel comfortable in crowds. It could take two to three years for most economies to return to where they were before,” Nagle said. “Aversion to public transport after the crisis could help vehicle sales, but there’s limited upsides. That happened after the SARS outbreak.”
Dealers’ problems are more immediate, and Jones said during a webinar with Auto Trader that many of the UK banks and finance houses he’s spoken with are looking to provide extra support for dealers, such as sustaining their stocking loans as normal. Dealers should not be buying more stock at the moment, he said.
His advice was for dealers to maintain or increase dialogue with their banks and funders. “We should be planning for the future, looking at what the cash position will be, to tell them about potential problems and have plans A, B and C ready.” He said dealers can be building a pipeline, to get arranged for a fast start when showrooms open again. Historically, after other crises, new car sales and service bookings once recovery begins can lag slightly but used car sales build quickly, he said.
His advice to all dealers was to “steer clear” from cashing out of stock if possible. “The one thing people shouldn’t be doing is panic selling. It’s very difficult from a cashflow point of view, but there is no market out there from a demand point of view, so if people are looking to liquidate stock it’s a phenomenally difficult time to do that.”
Jones predicted a 40% fall in March new car registrations. He urged dealers to be cautious about their approaches in the weeks ahead, and not be over-eager to begin handovers.
Article: AM Online

02 Apr 2020
Emergency volunteering leave
Emergency volunteering leave is a new concept allowing workers to leave their primary job and temporarily volunteer in the health or care sector. The following is of note for employers:
Workers are entitled to be absent from work on leave for the period specified in an emergency volunteering certificate (EVC), issued by an appropriate authority.
To qualify for this leave, no later than three working days before the first day of the leave period, the worker must notify their employer in writing of their intention to be absent from work and provide their employer with a copy of the EVC.
Workers can take only one period of leave in each volunteering period. The period of leave set out in the EVC must be either two, three or four consecutive weeks and must begin and end in the same “volunteering period” (i.e. an initial 16 week period, beginning on the date that the relevant section and schedule of the 2020 Act come into force, but further periods can be set thereafter).
Employers are not entitled to refuse a request for this leave, unless they have less than ten employees.
Employers are not required to pay workers their normal wages or salary during this period of leave.
That said, workers absent on this leave have the following rights: to benefit from their terms and conditions that would have applied had they not been absent (except in relation to pay), to return to the job that they did before the leave on no less favourable terms and conditions and to protection from detriment and dismissal for having taken the leave.
Source: Just Employment Law

31 Mar 2020
For SMTA members, with the ever developing Covid-19 situation, there may be a possibility that you or your staff may be stopped and asked why you are travelling. We would like you to refer to an email we have sent today which has a copy of a letter confirming you are exempt from closure and must be able to travel back and forward to your garage.
If you do not have the email (please check your junk folder and add us to your safe senders list), please contact us at info@smta.co.uk and we will send you another copy.
Stay safe.

31 Mar 2020
Please see below an update on which of our SMTA Trading Partner suppliers are still open for business, please note that this is an ever changing situation we all find ourselves in and this list may change at any time.
Bestplate | Open for business |
Easityre | Reduced opening hours, 9am-3pm and service vans leaving once per day at 10am. |
GES | Still fulfilling most orders. |
Johnsons Workwear | Open for business, max delay on orders would be one day |
Northburn Oils | Closed |
Scottish Fuels | Open for business, member offer now available for SMTA motor oil |
Stapleton Tyres | Open for business, no cash payments. |
Tracker | Open for business |
Tyrebin | Closed |
Yokohama Tyres | Open for business, orders via www.yokohamab2b.com |

31 Mar 2020
The government has introduced a temporary new law to deal with Coronavirus disruption.
Employees and workers can carry over up to 4 weeks’ paid holiday over a 2-year period, if they cannot take holiday due to Coronavirus.
Information on this can be found on ACAS website here

30 Mar 2020
The DVSA has today announced an extension to the deadline for MOT Training & Assessment to the end of April 2020.
If you have not yet completed your Training and Assessment you can do this with SMTA in conjunction with the IMI. Please email: pauline.galloway@smta.co.uk

30 Mar 2020
Please find a Q&A document on furlough for employers from Just Employment Law that you may find useful.
Coronavirus Update for Employers

30 Mar 2020
Update from HMRC, see below:
The Chancellor announced a VAT payments deferral on 20 March to support businesses with cash flow during the COVID-19 pandemic.
This means that all businesses with a UK VAT registration have the option to defer VAT payments due between 20 March and 30 June.
You therefore have until 31 March 2021 to pay any VAT deferred as a result of this announcement.
You do not need to inform HMRC if you wish to defer payment. You can opt in to the deferral simply by not making VAT payments due in this period. If you pay by Direct Debit you should cancel this with your bank. You should do so in sufficient time so that HMRC does not attempt to automatically collect on receipt of their VAT return.
Should you wish, you can continue to make payments as normal during the deferral period. HMRC will also continue to pay repayment claims as normal. You must continue to submit VAT returns as normal.
For more information please go to GOV.UK.

27 Mar 2020
Update received from HMRC, see below:
The government is committed to doing whatever it takes to support businesses and individuals through the Coronavirus pandemic. On 20 March as part of these efforts the Chancellor announced the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme.
This funding will be open to all employers with a PAYE payroll scheme that was created and started on or before 28 February 2020, including charities. Employers can apply for grants of 80% of furloughed employees' (employees on a leave of absence) monthly wage costs, up to £2,500 a month, plus the associated Employer National Insurance contributions and minimum automatic enrolment employer pension contributions on that wage, provided they keep the worker employed. The scheme will cover the cost of wages backdated to 1 March 2020, if applicable.
HMRC have been working night and day to develop this scheme, and we can now confirm that we have been able to publish further details of the scheme on GOV.UK. We are aiming to have the scheme up and running by the end of April 2020. More detailed guidance will be published in due course and please be assured we will advise you when the scheme is open.
Guidance for employers is available on GOV.UK. You may also find the guidance for employees helpful.

27 Mar 2020
Self-employed workers can apply for a grant worth 80% of their average monthly profits to help them cope with the financial impact of coronavirus, the chancellor has announced.
The money - up to a maximum of £2,500 a month - will be paid in a single lump sum, but will not begin to arrive until the start of June at the earliest.
- Self-employed people will be able to apply for a grant worth 80% of their average monthly profits over the last three years, up to £2,500 a month.
- At least half their income needs to have come from self-employment as registered on the 2018-19 tax return filed in January - anyone who missed the filing deadline has four weeks from now to get it done and still qualify.
- The scheme is open to those who earn under £50,000 a year - up to 3.8 million of the 5 million people registered as self-employed.
- Unlike the employee scheme, the self-employed can continue to work as they receive support.
- The money, backdated to March, will arrive directly into people's banks accounts from HMRC, but not until June.
- The grants will be taxable, and will need to be declared on tax returns by January 2022.
- Company owners who pay themselves a dividend are not covered.
Source BBC news, read full article here

26 Mar 2020
Each week we will be producing an update for our member's of the week's news relating to fiscal measures relating to the motor trade in Scotland.
Weekly Update as at 26.3.20

26 Mar 2020
SMTA is a member of CECRA and are fully supportive of their action to write to the European Commission, details below:
COVID-19 : Automotive sector letter to von der Leyen
Brussels, 26/03/2020
The European associations representing vehicle manufacturers (ACEA), suppliers (CLEPA), tyre manufacturers (ETRMA), dealers and repairers (CECRA) wrote a joint letter to the President of the European Commission, Ursula von der Leyen, about the implications of the COVID‐19 crisis on the automotive sector and the measures that the European Commission could potentially take in this context.
Please, find the letter here :
COVID-19 : Automotive sector letter to von der Leyen

26 Mar 2020
Today the UK Government provided a further update on businesses and premises that are exempt from closure and clarified that repair shops are now on the list, please see below.
All retail to close with notable exceptions:
• Supermarkets and other food shops
• Medical services (such as dental surgeries, opticians and audiology clinics, physiotherapy clinics, chirpody and podiatry clinics, and other professional vocational medical services)
• Pharmacies and chemists, including non-dispensing pharmacies
• Petrol stations
• Bicycle shops
• Hardware shops and equipment, plant and tool hire
• Veterinary surgeries and pet shops
• Corner shops and newsagents
• Off-licences and licenced shops selling alcohol, including those within breweries
• Laundrettes and dry cleaners
• Post Offices
• Vehicle rental services
• Car garages and repair shops
• Car parks
• High street banks, building societies, short-term loan providers, credit unions and cash points
• Storage and distribution facilities, including delivery drop off points
• Public toilets
• Shopping centres should stay open if they contain units which are not required to close

25 Mar 2020
Scottish Business Support Grants
Two types of grants are available:
1. Retail, hospitality and leisure businesses with a rateable value between £18,001 and up to and including £50,999 will be able to apply for a one-off grant of £25,000.
2. A one-off grant of £10,000 will also be available to small businesses who get:
Applying for a grant and getting paid:
To apply, you'll need to complete an application form. Please follow the appropriate council links below:
Aberdeen City
Aberdeenshire
Angus
Argyll & Bute
Clackmannanshire
Dumfries & Galloway
Dundee City
East Ayrshire
East Dunbartonshire
East Lothian
East Renfrewshire
Edinburgh
Comhairle nan Eilean Siar
Falkirk
Fife
Glasgow City
Highland
Inverclyde
Midlothian - Apply via Edinburgh City Council
Moray
North Ayrshire
North Lanarkshire
Orkney Islands
Perth & Kinross
Renfrewshire
Scottish Borders
Shetland Islands
South Ayrshire
South Lanarkshire
Stirling
West Dunbartonshire
West Lothian

25 Mar 2020
We have been made aware by Co-operative Bank of a few high value fraud cases recently whereby business customers have fallen victim to invoice diversion scams (fake email/hacked emails requesting payment and that the account details to send it to have changed).
Please find attached details of the current scams that the bank has been made aware off and a leaflet that the Co-operative Bank has produced.
Coronavirus - How criminals are preying on fears of Covid-19
SME Fraud Awareness Brochure from Co-operative Bank

25 Mar 2020
Please see a link below to an update from Lawgistics who provide info on whether your business should be open or closed and offer guidance on the next step to furlough an employee.
Lawgistics Update

25 Mar 2020
Update from DVSA, from 30 March 2020, MOT due dates for cars, motorcycles and light vans will be extended by 6 months. This is being done to help prevent the spread of coronavirus.
- Vehicle owners to be granted MOT exemption in battle against coronavirus
- Coronavirus (COVID-19): MOTs for cars, vans and motorcycles due before 30 March 2020
- Coronavirus (COVID-19): MOTs for cars, vans and motorcycles due from 30 March 2020
- Coronavirus (COVID-19): MOT centre and tester guidance

24 Mar 2020
If you are having problems logging into the system for your MOT annual training and assessment please find below a link to a document that will assist.
Remember you have until 31st March to complete your training and assessment.
MOT Training & Assessment Logging in Helpsheet

24 Mar 2020
Grants to help businesses with COVID-19 impact.
Read full article here
Businesses can now apply for grants to help them deal with the impact of the coronavirus (COVID-19) outbreak.
The one-off grants are designed to help protect jobs, prevent business closures and promote economic recovery, and more than 90,000 ratepayers across Scotland will be able to benefit.
The grant support is additional to separate tax relief measures and is part of a package of measures worth £2.2 billion.
Small businesses in receipt of the small business bonus scheme or rural relief, as well as hospitality, leisure and retail business can benefit.
Two types of grant are now available to ratepayers:
• a one-off £10,000 grant to ratepayers of small businesses
• a one-off grant of £25,000 available to retail, hospitality and leisure business ratepayers with a rateable value between £18,001 and £50,999
The list is not exhaustive and if businesses think they may be eligible for one of these grants, they should contact their local authority, which are administering the scheme on behalf of the Scottish Government.
Cabinet Secretary for Finance Kate Forbes said:
“While our primary concern is for people’s health, it is clear that the Coronavirus (Covid-19) outbreak will have severe economic consequences, and we are treating it as an economic emergency.
“We are determined to help keep companies in business and support them and their staff during this difficult time.
“Local authorities are the most efficient way to deliver this and we have worked closely with them to deliver these measures – and eligible businesses can apply now.
“Local authorities will aim to make payments within 10 working days, and I’d like to thank them for their help in ensuring this support is delivered as quickly as possible.
“The COVID-19 situation, however, is both severe and fast-moving and requires a coordinated UK response: I will continue to work closely with the UK Government and the other devolved administrations.”

24 Mar 2020
Please find the latest information we have from the UK Government advising that under their list of exceptions to closure include, Garages, Petrol Stations and Car Rentals.
Guidance notes - see page 3 for exceptions to closure

23 Mar 2020
If you are faced with having to furlough your employees as part of the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme here are two documents that will assist. One is a letter template to issue to your employees and guidance on what it means to furlough employees.
Furlough Notice - letter template
Government Guidance on Job Retention Scheme

23 Mar 2020
At present (23 March 2020 2pm) MOT tests will continue, The Department for Transport continues to keep MOT testing for cars, motorcycles and light vans under review. They will provide an update in due course.
The DVSA has suspended MOTs for all heavy goods vehicles (HGVs) and public service vehicles (PSVs) for up to 3 months from 21 March 2020. All HGV and PSV vehicles with an MOT will be issued with a 3-month certificate of temporary exemption (CTE) until further notice.
Vehicles must be maintained, kept safe to drive (roadworthy) and operate within the terms of operators’ licence conditions.

23 Mar 2020
https://www.british-business-bank.co.uk/ourpartners/coronavirus-business-interruption-loan-scheme-cbils/
Bank of Scotland's support for businesses impacted by Coronavirus
https://business.bankofscotland.co.uk/business-home/coronavirus/cbils.html?WT.ac=bos-bb_and_sme-covid_19-support-tile-FOM-cbils_homepage
Royal Bank of Scotland's support for business impacted by Coronavirus
https://www.business.rbs.co.uk/business/support-centre/service-status/coronavirus/government-scheme.html

02 Mar 2020
We are delighted to announce our guest speaker for our Annual Dinner & Awards 2020 is 'Eddie The Eagle Edwards'!
Eddie Edwards, also known as Eddie ‘the Eagle’, is a British skier and Olympic speaker who was the first Briton to compete in the Olympic ski jumping challenge at the 1988 Olympic Games in Calgary. Born in Gloustershire Edwards made his first attempt to join the British Olympic’ team in 1984, narrowly missing out on a place in the downhill skiing team.
It was Edwards’ determination and arguably his lack of success that made him so popular amongst audiences however and Edwards has continued to feed off of this success in his work as a sports speaker in the years’ that followed. Edwards’ lack of success at Calgary inspired the instigation of the Eagle Rule at Olympic qualifications, which states that competitors must achieve a certain level of success in international tournaments before they can qualify to represent their country.

18 Feb 2020
Almost a thousand motor industry executives gathered at Birmingham's ICC for the 2020 AM Awards gala dinner and ceremony to celebrate many of the best businesses, teams, individuals and products in the UK's motor retail industry.
Congratulations to SMTA member Arnold Clark who won three awards: Dealer Group of the Year – sponsored by Black Horse; Best Dealer Group (more than 10 sites) – sponsored by heycar and Best Used Car Dealer Group (franchised and independent) – sponsored by Autoclenz
For a full lilst of all winners click the link: https://www.am-online.com/news/latest-news/2020/02/03/am-awards-2020-the-results
Article: AM Online

06 Feb 2020
CECRA update on renewal process of the vertical block exemption
Automotive BER 461/2010:
- Fact-finding study and the public consultation planned for Q3/2020;
- Evaluation report: 2021;
- The input should be on the performance of the current regime and not, at this stage, on what the post-2023 will look like.

23 Jan 2020
The DVLA has revised its official policy on trade plates following lobbying from the Used Vehicle Industry Group (UVIG) over worries about dealers using untaxed ex-demos and pre-registered cars.
Under the old policy, dealers could not use trade plates on cars were they were the registered keeper of the vehicle, such as with ex-demonstrators or pre-registered cars.
Dominic Threlfall, managing director of Pebley Beach Group and a member of the UVIG, said: "To test drive these cars you officially would have to tax them. The reality being a lot of dealerships were not aware of this, and those that were ignored it and potentially left themselves open to prosecution.
"After significant canvassing, we are now able to transfer our own cars into 'trade' and then used trade plates on them.
"It seems a small change, but it will keep dealerships legal."
The DVLA's update states that dealers should inform it online when they're transfering a vehicle into sale stock, and they'll no longer be registered as the keeper "and the vehicle will be notified as transferred out of your business, or to another section of your business, as trade stock for sale. The trade plates can then be used to test drive the vehicle by a prospective buyer."
Threlfall said the UVIG has members representing trade associations, motor auctions, dealerships and finance and leasing companies, and one of its aims is to help the industry optimise the use of DVLA systems, which are very consumer focused and can be quite an administration burden for dealerships.
He believes the DVLA will pay closer attention to cars transferred into trade in the future, as vehicles between owners might be transferred multiple times between traders and it is difficult for DVLA to know exactly where they are at any point.
If parking or speeding infringements occur that creates an issue for the DVLA and dealerships, said Threlfall.
Article: AM Online

08 Jan 2020
Renault is developing a new connectivity service that will link its cars with smart-home devices, allowing owners to control objects in their home from their car.
The French car maker has partnered with smart-home technology specialist Otodo in order to develop the new service.
It will be available in all Renault models fitted with Easy Link infotainment systems, including the new Zoe, Clio and Captur.
With this new connectivity service, users can control various objects in their home directly from their vehicle’s dashboard, as well as send instructions from their home, using a smartphone or connected speaker, to their connected Renault vehicle to prepare or share an itinerary.
Users select the objects they want to include in the available scenarios, and the instructions associated with each object.
The Leaving Home scenario puts their home to “sleep” by switching the thermostat to energy-saving mode, closing the shutters and turning off the lights.
The Arriving Home scenario wakes it up.
Users then decide when they want the system to prompt them to activate the scenarios based on the distance between the vehicle and home.
Jean-François Labal, marketing and partnership head for Connected Cars and Services at Groupe Renault, said: “Cars need to blend into our digital lives. With this service, we’re offering our customers a trailblazing experience and a completely secure system to connect their home’s connected objects to their vehicle. The interface to set it up is very intuitive and it comes with two advantages: it’s automatic so it makes life simpler and it saves energy by switching lights and heating on and off as needed.”
The service, which is being previewed at the Consumer Electronics Show (CES), is expected to be operational in 2020.
Article: AM Online

10 Dec 2019
“It’s business as usual” but not as we would want it to be! Sandy Burgess Chief Executive of the Scottish Motor Trade Association commenting on the new car registration results for Scotland in November 2019 has highlighted the continual decline in the industry results as “disappointing but understandable” given the political turmoil of late”!
Scotland’s results for the month came in at 4.21% down on the same period in 2018, this equates to 522 less new cars being registered across the country, the largest percentage drop was in the Borders at 22.73% down and then Dumfries & Galloway at 18.73%, there was two areas of growth in Lothian up 2.43% and Central at 1.74%.
The Scottish private car market continues to show resilience against the rest of the UK which is encouraging for the future, alternative fueled vehicles continue to grow ahead of any market conditions as more and more motorists embrace the transition to electric or hybrid technology. Registrations for pure electric in November 2019 come in at 2.74% against the same period in 2018 at 0.6% and hybrids measure 6.09% against 4.98% for the month 2019 & 18 respectively.
The market is in dire need of political resolution and some level of financial stability to allow a return to a stable market, the deals are out there, the dealers are prepared, stocked and trained, there is a growing desire for transition to clean, economical and technically outstanding vehicles, bring it on!

04 Dec 2019
Don't miss out on our fantastic offer from SMTA Trading Partners in conjunction with Yokohama - your chance to win 2 tickets to see Chelsea FC with hospitality at Stamford Bridge courtesy of Yokohama! The prize includes full corporate hospitality, return flights and overnight accommodation! (Terms and Conditions apply please ask for details).
All you need to do is purchase tyres from Yokohama using your SMTA Trading Partners account from now until end of February (remember there's an additional special offer for the month of December!) and for our members who don’t have a Trading Partners account and wish to participate please contact one of our Territory Account Managers who will be more than happy to help. Remember, joining SMTA Trading Partners is free.
Contact our Territory Account Managers today!
David McNeill - Eastern Region - 07375 057560
Marcus Lawrence - Western Region - 07375 057561
Graham Bruce - Northern Region - 07766 695265

27 Nov 2019
Park’s Motor Group had helped to expand the Automobili Lamborghini UK dealership network with the opening of a new showroom in Leeds.
The Scottish AM100 retail group officially opened the doors at its second Leeds supercar showroom of 2019 – it opened its new McLaren Automotive franchise last month – to take the Italian carmaker’s UK representation to 11 locations.
Park’s will look to grow the success with supercars with the opening of its first Lamborghini franchise. Earlier this year the group’s McLaren Glasgow facility was named the British brand’s European Retailer of the Year for the third time in four years.
Ross Park said: “We are delighted to be appointed to the Lamborghini franchise and to open this new Leeds location. “Park’s Motor Group has a stated commitment to growth through providing the best possible service to our clients, which reflects the demands of Lamborghini and its discerning clientele. “The investment made in this new showroom and an expert team demonstrates our commitment and enthusiasm for playing a significant role in Lamborghini’s future success in the region.”
Park’s Motor Group had helped to expand the Automobili Lamborghini UK dealership network with the opening of a new showroom in Leeds.
The Scottish AM100 retail group officially opened the doors at its second Leeds supercar showroom of 2019 – it opened its new McLaren Automotive franchise last month – to take the Italian carmaker’s UK representation to 11 locations.
Park’s will look to grow the success with supercars with the opening of its first Lamborghini franchise. Earlier this year the group’s McLaren Glasgow facility was named the British brand’s European Retailer of the Year for the third time in four years.
Andrea Baldi, the chief executive of Automobili Lamborghini EMEA Region, together with Park’s Director Ross Park, welcomed more than 200 guests to an inauguration ceremony last week where the latest Lamborghini models were presented, including the new Huracán EVO coupé and Spyder.
Article credit: AM Online

25 Nov 2019
SMTA's Chief Executive, Sandy Burgess attended an important meeting of CECRAs Independent repairers division which took place in London on 19th November. Many points concerning the future of Independent Repairers were highlighted.
A large number of CECRA's members delegations discussed the overall future of Independent repairers during a meeting organised by CECRA's UK member, IGA.
The division especially emphasised the issues concerning the vehicle access to data and the implementation of SERMI (Security related Repair and Maintenance Information).

12 Nov 2019

05 Nov 2019
Looks like someone is ready to attend the SMTA Annual Dinner 2019 this Thursday. Big Ted is looking forward to meeting everyone on the 7th November and he's looking forward to meeting his new owner!
#smtadinner

24 Oct 2019
Despite the increasingly important role played by the internet in the consumer buying journey, physical dealerships remain key, the latest NFDA Consumer Attitude Survey revealed.
The National Franchised Dealers Association (NFDA), which represents franchised car and commercial vehicle retailers across the UK, is pleased to announce the findings of consumer vehicle purchasing patterns in the UK.
The Consumer Attitude Survey was commissioned by the National Franchised Dealers Association (NFDA), which represents franchised car and commercial vehicle retailers across the UK, and executed by Public Knowledge, a leading market research agency. This is the 'Dealer Insight' of the seventh edition of the survey, which polled 2,000 consumers across the UK in a 15-minute online survey.
The NFDA Consumer Attitude Survey revealed that 75% of car purchases, for cars under seven years old, are made at franchised dealers; 14% are made at independent garages; 5% at used car supermarkets and 5% from private sellers. When considering only brand-new cars, 93% of them were bought at franchised dealerships.
The survey found that 50% of consumers visit a car dealership website before purchasing a vehicle. However, surprisingly, 32% of respondents bought a car from a physical franchised dealership without using any dealer, manufacturer or other car sales website before buying the car. Buyers of prestige brands are significantly more likely to visit manufacturer websites, 46%, and research in papers/magazines, 13%, than those buying volume brands, 32% and 8%, respectively.
The findings showed that 63% of consumers intend to purchase their next vehicle from a franchised dealer showroom and 9% from a franchised dealer website.
Read more of the article here

21 Oct 2019
- New survey shows escalating fears of ‘no deal’ Brexit to UK automotive sector, with a third cutting jobs and 80.3% concerned about damage to their future business prospects.
- More than £500m already wasted on measures that will not deliver returns, rather than being invested in much-needed R&D.
- Profitability, new business opportunities and investment all under threat as industry faces £5bn WTO tariff bill on cars and vans alone – a cost which cannot be mitigated.
- All sides urged to agree an orderly withdrawal with sufficient transition time to negotiate an ambitious free and frictionless economic relationship between the UK and the EU.
The results are consistent and striking. One in three UK automotive businesses is already cutting jobs, up from one in eight when the survey was last carried out in November 2018. Four-fifths (80.3%) fear leaving the EU without a deal will have negative consequences for their future prospects (up from 74.1% 10 months ago).
Virtually the same number (79.6%) are worried about the impact on their profitability while two-thirds (62.2%) are saying ‘no deal’ will impact their ability to win overseas business and a similar number state that they will be unable to invest in their UK operations.
In a sign that the mere threat of ‘no deal’ has already hurt the UK, 11.8% of firms said that they had already divested from their UK-based operations and 13.4% are relocating operations overseas. Overall, three quarters (77.2%) of firms say that there has already been a negative impact on business even before the UK has left the EU.
Read full story here
Credit: SMMT

14 Oct 2019
Park’s Motor Group has officially opened the doors at its new McLaren Automotive supercar showroom facility in Leeds – after 17 months trading from a temporary facility.
The AM100 retail group, whose McLaren dealership in Glasgow was named as the British supercar brand’s European Retailer of the Year for the third time in four years back in March, welcomed visitors to its new site on Aire Valley Drive, Leeds, on October 2 at an event which saw the dealership packed with classic McLaren cars.
It also marked the completion of a development which saw the dealership's workforce operate from a temporary facility after the franchise point joined the McLaren network in May, 2018.
Read the full article here
Article courtesy AM Online

07 Oct 2019
- Scotland’s new car registrations market declines 11.28% in September against same period last year. There can be no doubt that the political uncertainties consumers are faced with daily is causing a drop off in buyer’s confidence.
- Year to date figures are also down against last year by 4.67% and only two regions of Scotland are now recoding growth year to date, Tayside and Central
- These figures equate to a drop of 3,515 units in September alone and 7,093 year-to-date.
September’s volumes did see the traditional Scottish market being held up by the private buyer recording a registration mix of 56.4% with the fleet and business sectors slowing quite significantly against previous recording declines of 11.57% and 64.39% respectively.
As elsewhere in the UK there was good news for battery electric cars (BEVs), which saw the continued growth recording 5.05% share for Hybrid and 1.79% share for pure electric during the month, as more and more manufacturers bring new variants to market this number should increase.
Sandy Burgess, SMTA Chief Executive, said, “September is one of the industry’s key critical months, such a dramatic fall of in levels of business is very concerning and the politicians must take heed of the serious consequences being recorded across our sector as a result of the continued stalemate and theatre being played out in Westminster and Holyrood!
The Scottish market has recorded a dramatic drop off when the rest of the UK has had a more modest result, this is most certainly impacted by the additional pressure we have given the 2032 ambitions of the Scottish Government, which in principle we are supportive of, but we have been calling for detail and structure to these ambitions for two years now and there has been very little detail provided for business or consumer to take a structured decision about their future mobility purchase plans.”

03 Oct 2019
Sales of new diesel cars have fallen for the 29th month in a row, although the pace of decline is slowing, according to the Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders (SMMT).
Its figures show August 2019s new car market was 1.6% behind August 2018, at 92,573 car sales. Within that, petrol and alternative fuel vehicles (AFVs) rose in demand, but diesel orders dropped 12.2%.
Registrations from both the private and fleet sectors decline in the month, down 1.7% and 3.5% respectively, as demand in the small volume business segment increased by some 962 units.
Zero-emission cars grew fastest, up 377.5% to 3,147 units, as new models and some pent up demand boosted registrations, while 4,014 hybrid electric cars also joined UK roads, an uplift of 36.2%. However, the decline in plug-in hybrid registrations continued, down 71.8% to just 907 vehicles.
Credit: Automotive Management

23 Sep 2019
Arnold Clark is to install 164 automated external defibrillators (AEDs) in its network of dealerships at a cost of £150,000.
The defibrillators will be used to help staff, customers and the wider community in case of an emergency.
It said that 400 of the 12,000 staff have been trained in CPR and using a defibrillator unit.
The defibrillators provide clear instructions to allow anyone to use them, both in writing and in the form of an automated voice.
Once the pads have been correctly attached, it assesses the heart rhythm and will only administer a shock if it is needed.
Arnold Clark has also embarked on an information campaign within the communities they work in, sending leaflets to local businesses to let them know that there are defibrillators on site should they be required.
Last year Pendragon agreed a deal with St John Ambulance to install ZOLL AED Plus defibrillators at all dealerships, service centres, accident repair body shops, and preparation centres across the group’s network (AED: automated external defibrillator)
Arnold Clark CEO and group MD Eddie Hawthorne said: “Hundreds of people visit Arnold Clark every day, our employees, our customers, our suppliers, our manufacturers and just general visitors to our sites.
So we are taking a stand in our local community to make sure we provide a service that’s valuable – and that’s to make sure there’s a defib machine in our garages. Even when we are closed, there are still 21 external defibs available to the wider community.”
Recently the British Heart Foundation visited Arnold Clark’s GTG Edinburgh training centre in order to provide training to a number of employees.
(Article courtesy Motortrader.com)

18 Sep 2019
- 13.8 million Europeans work in the auto industry (directly and indirectly), accounting for 6.1% of all EU jobs.
- 11.4% of EU manufacturing jobs – some 3.5 million – are in the automotive sector.
- Motor vehicles account for €428 billion in taxes in the EU15 countries alone.
- The automobile industry generates a trade surplus of €84.4 billion for the EU.
- The turnover generated by the auto industry represents over 7% of EU GDP.
- Investing €57.4 billion in R&D annually, the automotive sector is Europe's largest private contributor to innovation,
accounting for 28% of total EU spending.

12 Sep 2019
SMTA members - Mobityre & Autocare based in Kilmarnock were proud wiinners at Ayrshire Business Awards 2019 and won the award for 'Best Service Company' - recognising the best in business held earlier this year at Ayr Racecourse.
Congratulations from everyone at the SMTA!
mobiletyrefittingscotland.co.uk

09 Sep 2019
MSPs have backed plans to introduce powers for local councils to implement a levy on workplace parking spots.
SMTA will continue to discuss the workplace parking levy with Transport Scotland and challenge them to give us a hearing for the motor industry to be given a blanket exception against this scheme. More updates on this matter will follow.

05 Sep 2019
New car registrations in Scotland for the month of August rose by 1.66% against a drop in the rest of the UK by -1.88% meaning the result for the whole of the month of August was -1.62%.
Stronger business registrations (up by 72.35%) and fleet (up by 7.51%) compensated for the marginal drop in private registrations of (-5.47%) when measured against August 2018. The private results are no real surprise given that private buyers are more plate conscious than the business operator and the up-coming September 69 plate launch.
Fuel mix sees continued growth of the electric vehicle sector in both hybrid and pure electric formats, the latter showing the greatest growth.
Overall year to date the Scottish market continues to out perform the rest of the UK albeit they are both in decline on last years results, Scotland down by -2.97% and the rest of the UK down by -3.40% respectively.
Sandy Burgess, SMTA Chief Executive, said “With all the uncertainty around supply and the dreaded Brexit situation I am delighted to confirm that our market is continuing to hold its own at these very challenging times for private consumers and businesses across Scotland. The new September 69 plate is now starting to be seen across the county and with a number of very strong retail and business incentives available in our members showrooms I would be confident that our industry will rise above the general noise in the market place and deliver a strong result for the month ahead.”

02 Sep 2019
Fewer cars are failing their MOT test for exhaust issues, despite the introduction of new, more strict, regulations.
Data from Protyre reveals that there has been a 21% decrease in the proportion of cars that failed an MOT test in the last year.
The DVSA introduced new legislation on May 20, 2018, affecting diesel cars with diesel particulate filters. These cars will fail the test if any visiable smoke is seen coming from the exhaust tailpipes.
David Sholicar, Protyre’s national retail operations manager, said: “The fall in the proportion of MOT fails attributed to exhaust issues at first appears surprising as the new MOT test includes stricter regulations on emissions from diesel cars. The test changes also mean that it is now law that any car with a diesel particulate filter automatically fails its MOT if smoke is visible from its exhaust.”
Analysis from Protyre shows that only 7% of diesel vehicles that failed their MOT test did so because of issues with the exhaust - compared to 11% of all vehicles overall that failed their MOT test because of exhaust issues.
These new figures come despite overall increases in the raw number of MOT tests that failed because of exhaust issues shown in the most up-to-date DVSA figures.
“One reason for this reduction is down to the reduced popularity of diesel cars and nationwide year-on-year decreases in sales of new diesel vehicles in recent years of up to 20%. However, the data also shows that the decreased proportion of MOT fails (despite an overall increase in numbers) is likely down to stricter criteria on other components,” Sholicar added.
The data also shows a 7% year-on-year increase in the proportion of MOT tests that failed because of warning lights and a 7% year-on-year decrease in the proportion fails because of faulty brakes.
The proportion of MOT test fails attributed to failed suspension compontents decreased 11% and the proportion attributed to faulty car lamps also decreased 8%.
The new MOT test includes new testable items related to braking device performance, the daytime running of lamps and the Engine Malfunction Indicator Lamp.
In the year since the changes to the MOT test, faulty suspension was the most common reason for a test fail, followed by brakes, lamps, tyres and obstructions to drivers’ view of the road.
Article courtesy AM Online

29 Aug 2019
Electric vehicle registrations in Europe totalled 96,000 units in July, as the fuel type's share of the monthly market reached 7.4%.
The growth - 29% up year-on-year - was driven by Tesla – the top-selling brand – and Renault, which saw a 103% volume increase after its Zoe model became the top-selling BEV during the month. Other notable results included Volkswagen, where volume was up by 64%, Hyundai, where volume was up by 334%, and Audi, which sold 1,735 un